Microsoft Programmer's Library 1.3

home *** CD-ROM | disk | FTP | other *** search

/ Microsoft Programmer's Library 1.3 / Microsoft_Programmers_Library.7z / MPL / os2 / os2usr.txt < prev next >

Wrap

Text File | 2013-11-08 | 778.4 KB | 22,735 lines

Microsoft Operating System/2 - User's Guide ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Microsoft(R) Operating System/2 - User's Guide Version 1.2 ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Microsoft Corporation. The software and/or databases described in this document are furnished under a license agreement or nondisclosure agreement. The software and/or databases may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. The purchaser may make one copy of the software for backup purposes. No part of this manual and/or database may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems, for any purpose other than the purchaser's personal use, without the written permission of Microsoft Corporation. (C) Copyright Microsoft Corporation, 1990. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. Patent #4,825,358 Patent #4,779,187 Microsoft(R), MS(R), MS-DOS(R), the Microsoft logo, and InPort(R) are registered trademarks, and Windows(tm) is a trademark, of Microsoft Corporation. SideKick(R) is a registered trademark of Borland International, Inc. IBM(R), PC/AT(R), and PS/2(R) are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. SY13238-0490 OEMO786-1Z Table of Contents ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Welcome Part 1: Using Presentation Manager Chapter 1 Learning Basic Presentation Manager Skills Chapter 2 Running Applications with MS OS/2 Chapter 3 Using File Manager Chapter 4 Printing Files Chapter 5 Changing System Settings with Control Panel Chapter 6 Using System Editor Chapter 7 Using MS OS/2 Command Reference Part 2: Using Cmd and the DOS Session Chapter 8 Running Cmd Chapter 9 Using MS OS/2 Utilities Chapter 10 Using the DOS Session Chapter 11 Using MS OS/2 Batch Programs Part 3: Configuring and Maintaining Your System Chapter 12 Maintaining Your System Chapter 13 Setting Up Your Hard Disk Chapter 14 Using Start-Up Files in MS OS/2 Chapter 15 Using MS OS/2 Configuration Commands Chapter 16 Using the High-Performance File System Appendix A Chapter 17 Using MS OS/2 Device Drivers Part 4: Appendixes Appendix A ANSI Escape Sequences Appendix B Using MS OS/2 Dual Boot Appendix C Using Picture Utilities Terms Welcome ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The Microsoft Operating System/2 User's Guide is designed to be a comprehensive, easy-to-use guide to Microsoft(R) Operating System/2 (MS(R) OS/2), including the graphical environment of Presentation Manager and the powerful multitasking capabilities of MS OS/2. This guide is divided into three parts and has a terminology section and three appendixes ("ANSI Escape Sequences," "Using MS OS/2 Dual Boot," and "Using Picture Utilities"). It is designed for both beginning users and those who are familiar with advanced computer topics. In this guide, you will find the following parts: Part I: Using Presentation Manager Chapters in this part explain basic concepts that you will need when working in the graphical environment of Presentation Manager: ■ Using Presentation Manager windows ■ Starting applications ■ Working with files, directories, and disks ■ Printing ■ Changing system settings ■ Creating and editing text files ■ Viewing the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference Part 2: Using Cmd and the DOS Session Chapters in this part describe using cmd, the MS OS/2 command interpreter, and command, the DOS command interpreter. The following topics are discussed: ■ Using cmd commands ■ Using MS OS/2 utility programs to manage files, directories, and disks ■ Using DOS ■ Writing batch programs In this manual, the term DOS refers to the MS-DOS(R) and IBM Personal Computer DOS operating systems. Part 3: Configuring and Maintaining Your System Chapters in this part describe how to customize your system by doing the following: ■ Creating start-up files ■ Changing your CONFIG.SYS file ■ Changing and maintaining system hardware ■ Using the high-performance file system How to Use This Guide This guide is organized as a comprehensive reference and is arranged by task. It is not necessary to read it straight through. You are given instructions for accomplishing each task; some shortcuts and alternative methods are also provided. You may find this guide too detailed if you are just getting started. For a visual overview of and a hands-on introduction to MS OS/2, see Chapter 2, "A Visual Overview of MS OS/2," and Chapter 3, "Learning Basic MS OS/2 Skills," in Microsoft Operating System/2 Getting Started. Before using this guide, you should install MS OS/2 on your system. For information about installing MS OS/2, see Chapter 1, "Setting Up MS OS/2 and Using the Manuals," in Microsoft Operating System/2 Getting Started. Notational Conventions To help you locate and interpret information easily, this guide uses specific typographic conventions and a standard syntax format and terminology. The following typographic conventions are used in this guide: Convention Used for ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── bold Command-line commands, utilities, options, and portions of syntax that you must type exactly as shown italic Variables and placeholders that represent information you must provide monospace Sample command lines, program code, program output, and examples Convention Used for ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── ALL CAPITALS Filenames, directory names, and acronyms SMALL CAPITALS Names of keys on your keyboard Initial Capitals Presentation Manager commands and menu names Key combinations and key sequences appear in the following format: Notation Meaning ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── KEY+KEY A plus sign (+) between keynames means you must press the keys at the same time─for example, "Press ALT+ESC" means that you press the ALT key and hold it down while you press the ESC key. KEY, KEY A comma (,) between keynames means you must press the keys in sequence─for example, "Press ALT, SPACEBAR" means that you press the ALT key and release it, and then press the SPACEBAR and release it. DIRECTION keys Arrow keys on your computer keypad indicate DIRECTION keys. The name refers to the direction in which the arrow on the key points: UP, DOWN, RIGHT, or LEFT. .ET Syntax Conventions Syntax represents the order in which you must type a command-line command or utility name and any arguments and options that follow it. You may type commands, arguments, and options in either uppercase or lowercase letters. The following elements are used in syntax lines in this guide: Notation Meaning ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── [ ] Indicates optional items. To include the optional information described within the brackets, type only the information, not the brackets themselves. drive: Specifies a disk drive. You need to specify a drive name along with a filename only if you are using a file that is not on the current drive. The colon (:) must be typed as shown. .RT Notation Meaning ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── path Specifies a complete directory path, using the following syntax: [\edirectory...][\edirectory...]\edirect ory You need to specify a path along with a filename only if the file is not in the current directory. filename Specifies a file and includes a filename extension, if any─for example, REPORTS.AUG. ... Indicates that an argument can be repeated several times in a command line. Type only the information, not the ellipsis (...) itself. Using a Mouse and the Keyboard You can use both a mouse and the keyboard with MS OS/2. In this guide, textured bars in the left margin point out instructions for performing tasks. If separate sets of instructions are provided for the mouse and the keyboard, the mouse procedure is described first. If mouse and keyboard instructions appear in a two-column list, the mouse procedure is on the left, the keyboard procedure is on the right. The following list describes mouse actions used in this guide: Action Meaning ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Point Move the mouse pointer until the tip rests on a specific object or area on your screen. Click Press and release the mouse button. To click an object means to point to that object (for example, an icon or a menu name) and press and release the mouse button. Double-click Press and release the mouse button twice in rapid succession. Drag Press the mouse button and hold it down while moving the mouse pointer. Presentation Manager responds to both the left and right mouse buttons on a two-button mouse. The left and right mouse buttons perform different types of tasks. You can change which button Presentation Manager recognizes for particular tasks. For information about how to do this, see Chapter 5, "Changing System Settings with Control Panel." Part 1: Using Presentation Manager ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── In this part of the Microsoft Operating System/2 User's Guide, you will find instructions on everything from basic tasks, such as looking at your files and directories or starting applications, to more complex tasks, like setting up a printer and changing system settings. You will learn how to use File Manager to work with your files and directories, as well as how to create and edit files using System Editor. You will be able to use these skills to work with any application written for the graphical Presentation Manager environment. Chapter 1 Learning Basic Presentation Manager Skills ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Introduction Presentation Manager is a graphical environment in Microsoft Operating System/2 (MS OS/2) that presents applications in windows and is designed to provide an easy-to-use, standard interface for applications. You can quickly switch from one application to another by using a mouse or the keyboard. If you have not worked with a graphical interface before, there are a few skills and terms you need to learn. Once you master these skills, you can use them with any Presentation Manager application. This chapter provides information on the following Presentation Manager skills: ■ Selecting menus ■ Choosing commands ■ Using dialog boxes ■ Sizing, moving, and arranging windows ■ Using icons ■ Using Help ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note All examples of filenames and directory names in this chapter use the file allocation table (FAT) file system, which is the file system used by DOS and MS OS/2 versions 1.1 and earlier. For information on using high-performance file system (HPFS) filenames and directory names, see Chapter 16, "Using the High-Performance File System." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Presentation Manager Basics In Presentation Manager, applications run in windows. These windows divide your screen so that you can see several different applications at one time. With Presentation Manager, there are several ways in which you can arrange windows and control applications. The following is a typical Presentation Manager window. (This figure may be found in the printed book). The Presentation Manager Window Here are some terms that ill help you learn about and use Presentation Manager windows: ■ The selection cursor shows where you are in a window or in a dialog box. If you have a mouse installed, you will also see a mouse pointer shaped like an arrow. ■ The work area is where you do most of your work with an application. For example, if you start a text-editing application, the contents of a document file appear in the work area. In Desktop Manager─the first application you see when you start Presentation Manager─the work area contains a list of the program groups you can open. The work area of the Main-group window, which opens automatically when you start Presentation Manager, contains a list of applications you can start. ■ The title bar, located at the top of each window, displays the name of the application or group. ■ The menu bar contains the names of the command menus in an application. ■ The System-menu box represents the System menu. This menu is common to all Presentation Manager windows. You use its commands to size, move, and close windows, and to switch to other applications and groups. ■ The Maximize box enlarges your window. If you don't have a mouse, you can use the Maximize command from the System menu. ■ The Minimize box reduces your window to an icon. If you don't have a mouse, you can use the Minimize command from the System menu. ■ The icon area is the area along the bottom of your screen. When you reduce applications or groups to icons, the icons appear along the bottom of your screen. When you first start Presentation Manager, the icons for the DOS session and Print Manager appear at the bottom of your screen. Working in a Window In Presentation Manager, you must select the area or object your next action is going to affect. You select a window and then work in it, you select a menu and then choose a command, you select an area within a file and then do something to it. The way you select varies, depending on the task. Selections are displayed in a variety of ways. Remember this basic concept: First select, then carry out the action. Presentation Manager always shows you where you are in a window and what you've selected. The selection cursor identifies your place in a window or dialog box. You move the selection cursor by using either a mouse or the keyboard. The selection cursor changes shape, depending on the kind of application you're working with and the kind of task you're trying to accomplish. For example, in dialog boxes, the selection cursor is a dotted box that shows you which dialog-box option is selected. Selecting an Item in a Window In the work area of many windows, you can select only one item at a time─for example, a disk-drive icon or an application. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To select an item, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click the item. Press the DIRECTION keys to move the selection cursor to the item. In some windows, you can select several objects at once. This action is called extending a selection. For more information, see the following section, "Extending a Selection in a Window." Extending a Selection in a Window In some windows, you can extend a selection to include more than one item─for example, a block of files that are next to each other or files scattered throughout a window. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note The information in the following section on extending a selection does not apply to selecting in a list box. For more information on selecting in a list box, see "Working with a List Box," later in this chapter. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Selecting Blocks of Items To select a block of items by using a mouse, do the following: Mouse 1. Click the first item in the block that you want to select. 2. Press and hold down SHIFT and click the last item you want to select in the block. Or 1. Move to the first item in the block that you want to select and press and hold down the left mouse button. 2. While holding down the left mouse button, move to the last item you want to select. If, after selecting, you want to extend the selection further, do the following: 1. Press and hold down SHIFT. 2. Press and hold down the left mouse button and move to the last item you want to select. To select a block of items by using the keyboard, follow these steps: Keyboard 1. Press the DIRECTION keys to move to the first item you want to select. 2. Press and hold down SHIFT. 3. While holding down SHIFT, press the DIRECTION keys until you have selected the items you want. To select more than one block of items by using a mouse, follow these steps: Mouse 1. Select the first block of items as described in the mouse procedure for selecting a block of items. 2. Press and hold down CTRL. 3. Click the first item in the next block of items you are selecting. 4. Press and hold down SHIFT+CTRL. 5. Click the last item you want to select in the block. Follow these steps to select more than one block of items by using the keyboard: Keyboard 1. Select the first block of items as described in the keyboard procedure for selecting a block of items. 2. Press SHIFT+F8. The selection cursor begins to blink. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. Press the DIRECTION keys to move the selection cursor to the first item in the next block of items you want to select. 4. Press the SPACEBAR to select the item. 5. Press the DIRECTION keys to move the selection cursor to the last item you want to select in the block. 6. Press SHIFT+SPACEBAR. Selecting Scattered Items To select scattered items, follow these steps: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Press and hold down CTRL while 1 Press SHIFT+F8 (the selection cursor clicking each item. begins to blink). 2 Press the DIRECTION keys to move to each item. 3 Press the SPACEBAR to select each item. Selecting All Items in a Window To select all the items in a window, do the following: Keyboard ■ Press CTRL+/ (slash key). To cancel the selection, do the following: Keyboard ■ Press CTRL+\e (backslash key). Canceling a Selection and Undoing an Action You can cancel any selection from a group of selected items by doing the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Press and hold down CTRL and 1 Press SHIFT+F8 (the selection cursor click the selected item. begins to blink). 2 Press the DIRECTION keys to move to the selected item. 3 Press the SPACEBAR. .ET ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note If you are combining mouse and keyboard techniques to extend a selection, clicking an item without holding down the CTRL key cancels your previous selections. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── To undo your last selection or action, do the following: Keyboard ■ Press ALT+BACKSPACE. Dragging Icons If you are using a mouse, you can quickly perform specific tasks like starting an application, printing a file, or copying a file by dragging the appropriate icon. For example, if you want to print a file, you can drag the file icon onto the Print Manager icon or into the Print Manager window. Or you can start an application by dragging a data-file icon from File Manager onto a program icon or title in a group window. .RT Remember to use the right mouse button instead of the left mouse button when you drag icons. The left mouse button is used for selecting, and the right mouse button is used for dragging. To drag an icon, follow these steps: 1. Using the left mouse button, click the item (file or application) you want to select. 2. Hold down the right mouse button and move the mouse pointer. As soon as you start moving the mouse, the pointer becomes the icon for the selected item. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. Continue moving the mouse until the icon is in the location you want (in a window or over another icon). 4. Release the mouse button. Switching Between Windows In Presentation Manager, the window you are currently working in is called the active window. The active-window title bar is a different color to distinguish the active window from other windows. Each time you start Presentation Manager, two Presentation Manager applications start automatically: Desktop Manager and Print Manager. The Main-group window opens automatically, and the DOS session─a special environment for running DOS programs─starts as well. When you are running more than one application or have more than one group open, you must select the application or group you want to work in. There are several ways to switch between applications and groups. In this section, some of the methods for moving between applications are summarized. For more information on running applications and opening groups, see Chapter 2, "Running Applications with MS OS/2." You can use the Task List to switch between applications. The Task List contains the names of all the applications you are running and of all the groups you have open. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To display the Task List, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click the right mouse button Press CTRL+ESC. anywhere on the Presentation Manager background (outside of a window). Once the Task List is displayed, you can use it to switch to another application or group. To switch to another application or group, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Double-click the application or 1 Press the UP or DOWN key to select group title. the application or group title you want. 2 Press ENTER. You can also switch directly to an application or group without using the Task List. There are several techniques you can use depending on whether the application or group is running in a window or as an icon, and whether or not you have a mouse. If an application or group window is visible in the Presentation Manager screen, you can switch to it by using a mouse: Mouse ■ To switch to an application or group window, click the window. Or ■ To switch to an application or group running as an icon, double-click the icon. To switch between applications (including full-screen applications) and groups by using the keyboard, do the following: Keyboard 1. Press ALT+ESC. 2. Continue pressing ALT+ESC until the application or group you want appears. For more information on running applications and using the Task List, see Chapter 2, "Running Applications with MS OS/2." Commands and Menus Presentation Manager commands are organized in menus. Each application or group window has its own menus, with a System menu common to all windows. The System menu is represented by a box in the upper-left corner of each window; all other menus are repre- sented by names in the menu bar below the title bar at the top of each window, as shown in the following example. (This figure may be found in the printed book). In Presentation Manager, you select a menu, then choose a command from that menu. Choosing a command carries out an action. Choosing a Command You can choose a command by using either a mouse or the keyboard. To choose a command by using a mouse, do the following: Mouse 1. Click the menu name on the menu bar. 2. Click the command name. If you're using the keyboard, you have two ways to choose commands from menus: a basic method and a direct-access method. To choose a command by using the basic method, do the following: Keyboard 1. Press ALT or F10 to select the menu bar. 2. Press the LEFT or RIGHT key to move to and select the menu you want. 3. Press ENTER to display the menu. 4. Press the UP or DOWN key to move to and select the command you want. 5. Press ENTER to choose the command. If an underlined letter appears in a command name or menu name, you can use the direct-access method. To choose a command by using the direct-access method, do the following: Keyboard 1. Press ALT or F10. 2. Press the underlined letter in the menu name you want. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. Press the underlined letter in the command name you want. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note If more than one menu or command name shares the same underlined letter, Presentation Manager selects the first menu or command listed. Press the underlined letter again to select the next menu or command. To see the menu or choose the command, press ENTER. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If you decide you do not want to choose a command, you can cancel the menu. You can cancel a menu without making another selection by doing the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click in a blank area outside of Press ALT or F10. the menu. Pressing ESC also cancels the menu; however, the selection cursor remains on the menu bar so that you can select another menu. To move back to the application work area, press ESC again. A check mark next to a command name on a menu indicates the command has been chosen and is active. (This figure may be found in the printed book). An ellipsis (...) next to a command name on a menu indicates that a dialog box will appear when the command is chosen. For more information, see "Using a Dialog Box," later in this chapter. The System Menu In addition to application menus, a System menu appears in the upper-left corner of each window; it is represented by the System-menu box. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Although you choose commands from the System menu as you would from any other menu, you select the System menu in a different way. To select the System menu, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── In the upper-left corner of a Press ALT+SPACEBAR or SHIFT+ESC. window, click the System-menu box; from an icon, click the icon. You use System-menu commands to manipulate windows─for example, to change their size or move them on your screen, and to switch between applications and groups. Some dialog boxes also have System menus. The following list describes the System-menu commands: Command Action ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Restore Restores a window to its former size after it has been enlarged (by using the Maximize command) or reduced to an icon (by using the Minimize command). Move Moves a window to another location on your screen. Size Changes the size of a window. Minimize Reduces a window to an icon. Maximize Enlarges a window to its maximum size. Close Closes a window. Switch To Displays the Task List (a list of the applications you have running and the groups you have open). Some applications do not have all of these commands listed on their System menus. For example, the Close command is not on the System menu in Desktop Manager because you cannot close the Desktop Manager window. Commands in a Work-Area Window In some applications, such as File Manager, you can open windows in the application work area. These windows also have System menus, but you select them a little differently. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To select the System menu from a window in an application, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click the System-menu box in the 1 Press SHIFT+ESC to select the System window. menu in the main application window. 2 Press the RIGHT key. The following is a keyboard shortcut for selecting the System menu from a window in an application: Keyboard ■ Press CTRL - (hyphen key). (This figure may be found in the printed book). The commands on the System menu of a work-area window vary depending on the application; for example, in some Presentation Manager applications you cannot close work-area windows by using the Close command. For more information, see the manual for your application. Inactive Commands When you see a grayed command on a menu, it means the command is inactive and cannot be used. (This figure may be found in the printed book). You may have to make a selection before you can use the command, or it may be that the command cannot be used with the current selection or active application. For example, you cannot use either the Minimize or the Size command when an application is reduced to an icon. Shortcut Keys Some menus have shortcut keys, usually listed to the right of the command name. Often these keys are a combination of a function key and the ALT, SHIFT, or CTRL key. You can use these keys to choose commands without first selecting the menu where each command is located. The following list shows the System-menu shortcut keys: Command Press ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Restore ALT+F5 Move ALT+F7 Size ALT+F8 Minimize ALT+F9 Maximize ALT+F10 Close ALT+F4 Switch To CTRL+ESC For example, to enlarge a window by using the Maximize command and its shortcut keys, you select the window and press ALT+F10. Using a Dialog Box Presentation Manager displays a dialog box when additional information is needed to carry out a command. Each dialog box contains areas where you provide information; there are different kinds of areas, depending on the kind of information needed. The following is a typical dialog box. (This figure may be found in the printed book). The following are a few terms that will help you learn about and use dialog boxes: ■ The text box is where you type information. The text you type appears to the left of the insertion point, a flashing vertical line. ■ A list box contains the names of available choices. For example, in the illustration above, the names of directories appear in a list box. ■ A command button carries out a command when it is chosen. These buttons have labels that indicate what they do─for example, Rename, Cancel, or Help. Choosing a command button may cause another dialog box to be displayed. For example, choosing the Help button causes a Help dialog box to appear. A command button that displays other dialog boxes has an ellipsis (...) following its name. (This figure may be found in the printed book). ■ A round option button is used to select an option for a particular command. In a group of option buttons, only one option at a time can be selected. ■ A square check box is also used to select an option for a particular command. In a group of check boxes, several or all options can be selected at one time. ■ A grayed command or grayed option is inactive, which means that it cannot currently be used. Dialog boxes usually display information that reflects what you have selected on your screen─for example, a filename in File Manager. They also display previously selected options or default settings of Presentation Manager options. Moving in a Dialog Box You can move around in a dialog box to make several selections from each group of options. The area you are working in is usually marked by a selection cursor or a flashing insertion point. Often, moving to an area selects the area as well. In some cases, you must move in an area to select one option from a group of options─for example, a filename in a list box or one option button in a group of option buttons. You can move to and select any item or area in a dialog box by doing the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click the item or area. Press TAB. To move in the opposite direction through a dialog box by using the keyboard, do the following: Keyboard ■ Press SHIFT+TAB. Often, you can select an area by moving to it. However, sometimes you must also make a selection in the area─for example, when you move to a check box. To select the option by using the keyboard, do the following: Keyboard ■ Press the SPACEBAR. Pressing the SPACEBAR again cancels the selection. Selecting in a Dialog-Box Area Sometimes you must move and select inside a dialog-box area─for example, when you want to select text in a text box. The mouse and keyboard techniques for selecting inside a dialog box are different from those you use for moving between areas or for selecting areas. Selection techniques may vary depending on the kind of area you are working in. The following sections explain how to move and select in each dialog-box area: text boxes, list boxes, option-button groups, check boxes, and command buttons. Working with a Text Box Often a text box, as shown in the following example, contains text that reflects a selection from your application window, such as a filename, or information about a particular file, such as an attribute. (This figure may be found in the printed book). You can easily select and edit text in text boxes. To move to another location in a text box by using the mouse, do the following: Mouse ■ Click the text you want to move to. To move to another location in a text box by using the keyboard, use the following keys: To move Press ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Right or left one character RIGHT or LEFT Up or down one line UP or DOWN To the beginning of the next CTRL+RIGHT word To the beginning of the previous CTRL+LEFT word To the beginning of the current HOME line To the end of the current line END To the beginning of the text box CTRL+HOME To the end of the text box CTRL+END To insert new text, do the following: ■ Move to the location where you want the text to appear and begin typing. If you want to replace or edit text, you must first select the text you want to change. You can select text by using either a mouse or the keyboard. To select text in a text box, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Drag across the text you want to 1 Move to the text you want to select. select. 2 Press and hold down SHIFT and press the DIRECTION keys to move to and select the text you want to change. Once you select text, you can delete it or replace it with new text. To delete text in a text box, follow these steps: 1. Move to the text you want to delete. 2. Select the text. 3. Press DEL or BACKSPACE. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note If you do not select any text, pressing DEL deletes the character to the right of the insertion point and pressing BACKSPACE erases the character to the left. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── To replace text in a text box, do the following: 1. Move to the text you want to replace. 2. Select the text. 3. Type the new text. You can also copy or move text from one place to another in a text box. This is useful if you are working in a large text box─for example, an attribute text box that contains several lines of text. To move text in a text box, follow these steps: 1. Move to and select the text you want to move. 2. Press SHIFT+DEL. 3. Move to the location where you want the text to appear. 4. Press SHIFT+INS. To copy text in a text box, do the following: 1. Move to and select the text you want to copy. 2. Press CTRL+INS. 3. Move to the location where you want to copy the text. 4. Press SHIFT+INS. Some text boxes include lists of items from which you can select. These text boxes display your current selection, followed by a Down arrow. The list itself is hidden when the dialog box first appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To change the information in a text box that includes a list, you can either edit the displayed selection or you can display the list and select an item from it. To display the list, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click the Down arrow. Press ALT+DOWN. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Once a list is displayed, you can select an item by using either a mouse or the keyboard. To select an item by using a mouse, do the following: Mouse ■ Click the item. To select an item by using the keyboard, follow these steps: Keyboard 1. Press the DIRECTION keys to move to the item you want. As you move through the list, the item you want will appear in the text box. 2. Press ALT+DOWN to select the item and hide the list. You can use a mouse or the keyboard to hide the list without making a selection. To hide the list, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click the Down arrow again. Press ALT+DOWN again. .ET Working with a List Box As you move in a list box by using either a mouse or the keyboard, the selection cursor shows you which item or items you have selected. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To select an item by using a mouse, do the following: Mouse ■ Click the item. .RT If you are using the keyboard, there are several keys you can use to move and select in a list box: To move Press ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Up or down one item at a time UP or DOWN Right or left one character at a RIGHT or LEFT time To the left side of the box HOME To the right side of the box END To the top of the list CTRL+HOME To the bottom of the list CTRL+END Up to the first item in the PAGE UP visible portion of the list Down to the last item in the PAGE DOWN visible portion of the list Right one width of the list box CTRL+PAGE DOWN Left one width of the list box CTRL+PAGE UP In some list boxes, you can select more than one item. To select several items in a list box, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Press and hold down CTRL and 1 Press the UP and DOWN keys to move click each item you want. the cursor to the item you want to select. 2 Press the SPACEBAR. In Presentation Manager, some lists are hidden when the dialog box first appears. These lists are represented by a list box which displays the current selection, followed by a Down arrow. (This figure may be found in the printed book). .ET To display the list, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click the Down arrow. Press ALT+DOWN. .RT Once the list is displayed, you can select an item by using either a mouse or the keyboard. To select an item, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click the item. 1 Press the DIRECTION keys to move to the item you want. 2 Press ALT+DOWN to select the item and hide the list. Or 1 Press the first letter of the item. 2 Press ALT+DOWN. You can use a mouse or the keyboard to hide the list without making a selection. To hide the list, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click the Down arrow again. Press ALT+DOWN again. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note Unlike text boxes that include lists, you cannot edit the selection displayed in a list box. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Working with an Option Button In Presentation Manager, you can select only one option button from a group of option buttons. Moving to a button selects it. Darkened buttons are selected. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To select an option button, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click the option button. Press a DIRECTION key to move to and select the button or, if the option name contains an underlined letter, press that letter. Working with a Check Box In Presentation Manager, check boxes are used in a dialog box when you can select more than one option from a group of options. Check boxes that contain an "X" are selected. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To select a check box, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── 1 Click the check box. 2 Press TAB to move to the check box. 3 To cancel the selection, 4 Press the SPACEBAR. click the check box again. 5 To cancel the selection, press the SPACEBAR again. Working with a Command Button In Presentation Manager, command buttons carry out actions─for example, completing commands or displaying additional dialog boxes. An ellipsis (...) next to a command-button name indicates that another dialog box will appear when the command button is chosen. If an arrow (>) appears next to a command-button name, the dialog box expands to display more information. To choose a command button by using a mouse, do the following: Mouse ■ Click the command button. To choose a command button by using the keyboard, follow these steps: Keyboard 1. Press TAB to move to the command-button area. The selection cursor appears in the selected command button, and the button border changes color. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. To move to another command button, press the RIGHT or LEFT key. 3. To choose the selected command button, press ENTER. When a dialog box first appears, one command button is selected. This selection represents the option you are most likely to want (the default setting). (This figure may be found in the printed book). To automatically choose the default command button, do the following: Keyboard ■ Press ENTER. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note Even if you move to another area of the dialog box, pressing ENTER still chooses the default command button. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Closing a Dialog Box To close a dialog box without carrying out the command, do the following: ■ Choose the Cancel button. Some dialog boxes have System menus. You can use the Close command from this menu to close these dialog boxes. You can cancel any dialog box by doing the following: Keyboard ■ Press ESC. Using a Scroll Bar Some Presentation Manager application windows and list boxes have scroll bars that you can use to view the information that doesn't fit in the window or list box. (This figure may be found in the printed book). You can use a mouse to scroll a file in a window or to scroll the information in a list box by doing the following: Mouse ■ Drag the small box (the scroll box) in the scroll bar to the position that corresponds to the general location where you want to work (beginning, middle, or end of the file or list box). The following list details how to scroll more precisely when using a mouse: To scroll Do this ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── One line Click the scroll arrows at either end of the vertical scroll bar. Right or left Click the scroll arrows on either end of the horizontal scroll bar. One screen up or down Click the scroll bar on either side of the vertical scroll box. One screen to the right or left Click the scroll bar on either side of the horizontal scroll box. Continuously Point to the scroll arrows at either end of the scroll bars and hold down the mouse button. If you are using the keyboard, do the following to scroll after you have reached the last character or item in a window or list box: Keyboard ■ Press the DIRECTION key that points in the direction you want to scroll. For example, to scroll right, move the selection cursor or insertion point to the far-right character or item in a window or list box and continue pressing the RIGHT key. Some applications allow you to scroll by the screenful (that is, as much information as will fit in one window or list box at one time). The following keys can be used in some applications to scroll a file or list box; not all applications use these keys in the same way, so try them out with each application: To scroll Press ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Up one screen PAGE UP Down one screen PAGE DOWN Left to the beginning of a line HOME Right to the end of a line END Up to the beginning of a file or CTRL+HOME list Down to the end of a file or CTRL+END list Left one screen CTRL+PAGE UP Right one screen CTRL+PAGE DOWN Moving a Window or an Icon You can move a window or an icon to a different location on your screen by using a mouse or the keyboard. To move a window by using a mouse, do the following: Mouse ■ Drag the window title bar to a new location. To move an icon by using a mouse, do the following: Mouse ■ Drag the icon to a new location. To move a window or icon by using the keyboard, do the following: Keyboard 1. Select the window or icon you want to move by using the Task List or by pressing ALT+TAB. 2. Select the System menu by pressing ALT+SPACEBAR or SHIFT+ESC. 3. Press M to choose the Move command. 4. Use the DIRECTION keys to move the window or icon to a new location. 5. After moving the window or icon to its new location, press ENTER. Changing the Size of a Window Windows can be arranged several ways on your screen. If you are using a mouse, you can directly manipulate each window border to change its size. If you are using the keyboard, System-menu commands can be used to change a window's size and shape (you can also change window size by using the Maximize, Minimize, and Restore boxes, which are explained later in this chapter). (This figure may be found in the printed book). .ET ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note Some windows are limited in the ways they can be sized. Some applications, such as Control Panel, have a fixed size. You can only reduce these windows to icons and restore them. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── (This figure may be found in the printed book). .RT To change the size of a window by using a mouse, follow these steps: Mouse 1. Select the window you want to size. 2. Point to the border or corner you want to move. The mouse pointer becomes a two-headed arrow. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. Drag the corner or border until the window is the size you want. If you are using the keyboard, use the Size command to change the size of your windows by doing the following: Keyboard 1. Select the window you want to size by using the Task List or by pressing ALT+TAB. 2. Select the System menu by pressing ALT+SPACEBAR or SHIFT+ESC. 3. Press S to choose the Size command. 4. Press one DIRECTION key to select the border you want to move. 5. Press the DIRECTION keys to move the border. 6. When you finish adjusting the size, press ENTER. Enlarging a Window or an Icon You can enlarge a window to its maximum size using a mouse by doing the following: Mouse ■ Select the window you want to enlarge and click the Maximize box or double-click the title bar, shown in the following example. (This figure may be found in the printed book). The Maximize box disappears, and the Restore box takes its place. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To enlarge an icon by using a mouse, follow these steps: Mouse 1. Click the icon you want to enlarge. The System menu appears. 2. Click the Maximize command. To enlarge a window or an icon by using the keyboard, do the following: Keyboard 1. Select the window or icon you want to enlarge by using the Task List or by pressing ALT+TAB. 2. Select the System menu by pressing ALT+SPACEBAR or SHIFT+ESC. 3. Press X to choose the Maximize command. Reducing a Window to an Icon You can reduce an application or group window to an icon when you have finished working with it but want it available for later use. The application is still running in memory or the group is still open (represented by an icon), but it is not taking up space on your screen. You can select and move icons on your screen in the same way you select and move windows. When you want to work with your application or group again, you can easily restore it to its previous size. To reduce a window by using a mouse, follow these steps: Mouse 1. Select the window you want to reduce. 2. Click the Minimize box, shown in the following example. (This figure may be found in the printed book). If you are using the keyboard, follow these steps to reduce a window to an icon: Keyboard 1. Select the window you want to reduce by using the Task List or by pressing ALT+TAB. 2. Select the System menu by pressing ALT+SPACEBAR or SHIFT+ESC. 3. Press N to choose the Minimize command. Restoring a Window or an Icon You can restore a window to its previous size after reducing it to an icon or enlarging it to fill your screen. The Restore command returns a window to its original size, or to the size you last made it. The Restore command also returns a window to its previous location on your screen. If you are using a mouse, you can use the Restore box to return a window to its previous size by doing the following: Mouse 1. Select the window you want to restore. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. Click the Restore box. To restore an icon to its previous size by using a mouse, do the following: Mouse ■ Double-click the icon. Follow these steps to restore a window or an icon using the keyboard: Keyboard 1. Select the window or icon you want to restore by using the Task List or by pressing ALT+TAB. 2. Select the System menu by pressing ALT+SPACEBAR or SHIFT+ESC. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. Press R to choose the Restore command. Arranging Windows and Icons Having several windows open at one time and several icons at the bottom of your screen can make it difficult to see all of your applications and groups while you work. You can use commands on the Desktop menu in Desktop Manager to arrange your windows and icons on your screen. (This figure may be found in the printed book). .ET As shown in the first of the following examples, the Tile All command sizes windows and arranges them side by side so that all windows are visible. The area at the bottom of your screen is reserved for icons. As shown in the second of the following examples, the Cascade All command arranges application and group windows in an overlapping pattern so the title bar of each window remains visible. .RT (This figure may be found in the printed book). .ET (This figure may be found in the printed book). .RT The Arrange Icons command organizes icons in the icon area of your screen. (This figure may be found in the printed book). If you are using a mouse, follow these steps to use the Tile All, Cascade All, or Arrange Icons commands: .ET Mouse 1. Switch to Desktop Manager. If Desktop Manager is not visible, click the right mouse button anywhere outside a window to display the Task List. Then, double-click Desktop Manager. 2. Click the Desktop menu. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. Click the Tile All, Cascade All, or Arrange Icons command. .RT If you are using the keyboard, follow these steps to use the Tile All, Cascade All, or Arrange Icons command: Keyboard 1. Display the Task List by pressing CTRL+ESC or by choosing the Switch To command on the System menu in the active window. 2. Press the DIRECTION keys to move to and select Desktop Manager from the list of applications, and then press ENTER. 3. Press ALT, D to select the Desktop menu. 4. To choose the Tile command, press T; to choose the Cascade All command, press C; to choose the Arrange Icons command, press I. Using Help Most Presentation Manager applications provide Help information. When you request Help, Help information appears on your screen in a separate window. Like Presentation Manager applications, the Help window contains its own menus and commands. This section explains only the basics about using Help. For more information on tasks you can perform by using Help menus and commands, see Chapter 7, "Using MS OS/2 Command Reference." The way you display Help depends on whether you are selecting a menu, working in a dialog box, or working in the work area of a window. If you are selecting a menu or command, do the following to display Help information: Keyboard ■ Press F1. If you are working in a dialog box, do the following to get Help information: ■ Choose the Help button or press F1. (This figure may be found in the printed book). You can also display Help information from an application window by using the commands on the Help menu. (This figure may be found in the printed book). The following list describes each command on the Help menu: ■ The Help For Help command describes how to display Help information and explains how to work with the Help window. ■ The Extended Help command displays general Help information for the application you are currently using. ■ The Keys Help command describes how to use the keyboard in the application you are currently using. ■ The Help Index command displays an index of all Help topics available for the application you are currently using. Do the following to display general Help information for the application you are currently using: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── 1 Click the Help menu on the 2 Press ALT, H to select the Help menu. menu bar. 3 Click the Extended Help 4 Press E to choose the Extended Help command. command. The Help window appears in front of your application window or dialog box. (This figure may be found in the printed book). The Help information that appears takes into account what is currently selected in the application window. For example, if you select a menu, the Help window contains information on the commands in the menu; if you're working in a dialog box, the Help window contains information on each area of the dialog box. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Using the Help Index Help contains an index of all Help topics available for the application you are currently using. You can display the Help index from either an application, group, or Help window. To display the Help index, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── 1 Click the Help menu on the 2 Press ALT, H to select the Help menu. menu bar. 3 Click the Help Index command. 4 Press I to choose the Help Index command. The Index window appears inside the Help window. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To get information on a particular topic, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Double-click the topic you want. 1 Press the UP or DOWN key to move to and select the topic you want. 2 Press ENTER. Displaying Keyboard Information By looking at the Keys Help window, you can find out how different keys are used in your application. To open the Keys Help window, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── 1 Click the Help menu on the 2 Press ALT, H to select the Help menu. menu bar. 3 Click the Keys Help command. 4 Press K to choose the Keys Help command. The Keys Help window appears inside the Help window. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Displaying Help Information on a Term or Concept In some Help windows, you can display additional Help information on a related term or concept. The terms and concepts for which you can display additional Help information appear in a different color within the Help text. To display Help information for a related term or concept, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Double-click the term or concept 1 Press TAB to select the term or about which you want information. concept you want. . 2 Press ENTER. Displaying Previous Help Information Each time you display Help, the new Help information appears in front of the previous Help information without replacing it. This allows you to look at previous Help information at any time. You can have up to 10 occurrences of Help open in the current Help window. To display previous Help information, do the following: ■ Select the Options menu and choose the Previous command. The Help information immediately preceding the current Help reappears. Choosing the Previous command repeatedly displays each previous occurrence of Help. If there is no previous occurrence of Help information available, then choosing the Previous command closes the Help window. .ET You can also view previous Help information by using the Viewed Pages command. The Viewed Pages command displays a list of all the Help topics you have viewed, so that you can quickly select the topic you want. To display a list of the previous Help topics, do the following: ■ Select the Options menu and choose the Viewed Pages command. The Viewed Pages window appears inside the Help window. (This figure may be found in the printed book). .RT You can use either a mouse or the keyboard to display previous Help information from the Viewed Pages window. To redisplay Help information, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Double-click the Help topic you Press the UP or DOWN key to move to and want. select the Help topic you want, and then press ENTER. Closing the Help Window The Help window remains open and in front of your application window. When you finish with the Help window, you can close it by using a mouse or the keyboard. To close the Help window by using a mouse, do the following: Mouse ■ Double-click the System-menu box in the Help window. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To close the Help window by using the keyboard, follow these steps: Keyboard 1. Select the System menu. 2. Choose the Close command. Working with MS OS/2 Messages When MS OS/2 encounters problems that require immediate action, it sends messages to your screen. There are several types of messages, depending on the type of problem encountered. When you are working in Presentation Manager, most messages appear in dialog boxes. A Presentation Manager message tells you what caused the problem─for example, if the application you are using cannot find a particular file. These dialog boxes also contain Cancel and Help buttons that you can use to cancel the message or to get further information. Other problems, especially those caused by your computer system, cause messages to appear in a full screen. For example, if you forget to close a disk-drive door when you attempt to format a floppy disk, a message may appear. (This figure may be found in the printed book). The problem, identified by a message number, is shown along with the available options for correcting the problem. To choose an option, do the following: Keyboard ■ Press the DIRECTION keys to move to and select the action you want, and then press ENTER. The following options are available: Option Action ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Return the error to the program Sends the error back to your application. If possible, you return to your application. However, additional error messages may appear in your application. End the program Closes your application. Retry the operation Causes the application to try the action again. Choose this option when there is a problem you can correct, such as closing a disk-drive door. You can use the message number to get additional information by using the help command in the MS OS/2 command interpreter, cmd. For more information on the help command, see Chapter 9, "Using MS OS/2 Utilities," and the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. Quitting Presentation Manager Before you turn off your computer, it is recommended that you use the Shutdown command in Desktop Manager. The Shutdown command on the Desktop menu performs the following tasks, making it safe for you to turn off your computer: ■ Saves any unsaved changes you made to your data files ■ Shuts down the file system ■ Closes all applications that are still running ■ Closes group windows that are still open To use the Shutdown command, follow these steps: 1. Switch to Desktop Manager. 2. Select the Desktop menu and choose the Shutdown command. The Shutdown dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. To save program information, such as the size and location of application windows or icons, turn on the Save check box. 4. To quit Presentation Manager, choose the Shutdown button; to cancel the command and continue working in Presentation Manager, choose the Cancel button. If any applications are still running, additional dialog boxes may appear, asking if you want to save files or settings before closing each application. 5. Respond to each dialog box. After all applications are closed, a dialog box appears, informing you that all applications have ended. 6. Turn off your computer, or to resume working with Presentation Manager, press CTRL+ALT+DEL. Chapter 2 Running Applications with MS OS/2 ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Introduction Presenta ■ Desktop Manager, a Presentation Manager application, is used to open program groups that run in separate windows. Each window can contain an application written for the graphical environment of Presentation Manager, as well as a DOS or a full-screen OS/2 application. A DOS application is an application that runs under the Microsoft disk operating system (MS-DOS) or a computer manufacturer's version of DOS. A full-screen OS/2 application is an application that runs in its own screen rather than as part of a Presentation Manager window. Some full-screen OS/2 applications are not designed to run in the graphical environment of Presentation Manager. Other full-screen OS/2 applications can run in windows in Presentation Manager. Once you open a program group, you can start any application displayed in the work area of the program-group window. ■ The Task List is used for switching between applications and groups. You can use the Task List to switch to group windows, Presentation Manager applications, full-screen OS/2 applications, or one DOS application. All of your applications continue to run. You can switch between them without quitting or closing files. When you switch back to an application or group, you can con- tinue your work where you left off. .ET This chapter explains how to perform the following tasks: ■ Opening program groups by using Desktop Manager ■ Starting applications ■ Switching between applications by using a mouse, the keyboard, and the Task List ■ Creating, renaming, and deleting program groups from Desktop Manager ■ Adding applications to and deleting applications from program groups ■ Changing application information ■ Copying applications from one group to another ■ Running full-screen OS/2 applications in Presentation Manager windows ■ Quitting applications and closing windows .RT About Sessions In MS OS/2, there are three types of applications you can use: Presentation Manager applications, OS/2 full-screen applications, and DOS applications. Each type of application runs in a separate environment called a session. The Presentation Manager session is where you run Presentation Manager applications─applications written for the graphical environment of Presentation Manager. Desktop Manager is an example of a Presentation Manager application. It runs in a window, and you work with it by choosing commands and completing dialog boxes. Full-screen OS/2 applications run in a full-screen session. These are applications that are not designed for the Presentation Manager graphical environment. You can start up to 12 separate full-screen sessions, running one application in each session. In a full-screen session, you cannot see the Presentation Manager session. .ET You can return to the Presentation Manager session from a full-screen session at any time by using the Task List. When you switch back to the Presentation Manager session, you see each full-screen OS/2 session represented by an icon. Each session is also listed by name in the Task List. (This figure may be found in the printed book). .RT Although full-screen OS/2 applications are not Presentation Manager applications, some can run in windows and share the screen with Presentation Manager applications. For example, the MS OS/2 command interpreter, cmd, can run in a window. When a full-screen OS/2 application is running in a window, it is running in the Presentation Manager session. Many of the advantages of a Presentation Manager application are available through the System-menu commands. When you are working with a full-screen OS/2 application in a window, however, the commands, mouse, and keyboard work exactly as they do in a full screen. (This figure may be found in the printed book). The DOS session is where you run applications designed to run with DOS. This session is like having a separate 640-kilobyte computer running DOS. You can run only one DOS application at a time, but Presentation Manager lets you switch to the DOS session any time you like by using the Task List. The DOS session starts when you start Presentation Manager and is represented on the Presentation Manager screen by the DOS icon. The DOS session is listed in the Task List as DOS. HPFS Filename Considerations The high-performance file system (HPFS) is an optional installable file system that greatly increases the speed of reading from and writing to your hard disk. When you use HPFS, you have greater flexibility in naming your files and directories than when you use the file allocation table (FAT) file system. For example, you can use longer names for HPFS files and you can include additional characters not allowed in FAT filenames. Because both DOS and some earlier versions of MS OS/2 use the FAT file system exclusively, applications written for these operating systems generally encounter problems when attempting to access files and directories named using the new HPFS naming rules. DOS and earlier MS OS/2 applications do not recognize these new filenames and therefore cannot access the files. All examples of filenames and directory names in this chapter use the FAT file system. For more information on HPFS filenames and directory names and how they are processed by DOS and earlier MS OS/2 applications, see Chapter 16, "Using the High-Performance File System." Starting an Application with Desktop Manager With Desktop Manager, you can open program groups that contain your applications. Desktop Manager starts automatically and opens the Main group when you turn on your computer. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Applications in the Main group are represented by icons, followed by their titles, in the work area of the Main-group window. Other program groups that contain applications appear in the work area of the Desktop Manager window. To start an application from a group window, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Double-click the application 1 Press the UP or DOWN key to move to name or icon. and select the application you want to start. 2 Press ENTER. You can also use the Open command on the Program menu to start an application by doing the following: 1. Select the application in the group window. 2. Select the Program menu and choose the Open command. After you start an application from a group window, the window remains open. You can use the Minimize On Use command on the Program menu to automatically reduce the group window to an icon each time you start an application. To use the Minimize On Use command, do the following: ■ Select the Program menu and choose the Minimize On Use command. The appearance of your screen will depend on the kind of application you start. If you start a Presentation Manager application, like File Manager or Control Panel, the application runs in a window in front of other application or group windows. (This figure may be found in the printed book). As shown in the following example, if you start a DOS application, such as Microsoft Works, the Presentation Manager screen disappears and the DOS application takes its place. (This figure may be found in the printed book). If you start a full-screen OS/2 application─for example, OS/2 Full Screen─the Presentation Manager screen disappears and the application screen takes its place. (This figure may be found in the printed book). If the application is a full-screen OS/2 application that runs in a window, the application runs in a window in front of other Presentation Manager application windows. (This figure may be found in the printed book). This window, however, is somewhat different from other Presentation Manager application windows. It has a System menu and a title bar, but no menu bar. For more detailed information on working with full-screen OS/2 applications running in windows, see "Working with a Full-Screen OS/2 Application in a Window," later in this chapter. Opening a Program Group Applications in Desktop Manager are divided into program groups and are represented as icons in the Desktop Manager window. When you start Presentation Manager, applications in the Main group automatically appear in a separate window. (This figure may be found in the printed book). The following list describes the programs in the Main group: ■ File Manager is a Presentation Manager application that is used to view and organize files and directories. You can also use File Manager to start applications. You will find more details on using File Manager in Chapter 3, "Using File Manager." ■ OS/2 Window is the MS OS/2 command interpreter, cmd, that runs in a window in Presentation Manager. Running cmd this way allows you to view your other applications. You can also reduce the cmd window to an icon. ■ OS/2 Full Screen is the MS OS/2 command interpreter, cmd, that runs as a full-screen application. When you start this application, the Presentation Manager screen disappears and you see the MS OS/2 command prompt. ■ Print Manager is a Presentation Manager application that is used to manage and control printing jobs that have been sent to your printer. When you start MS OS/2, Print Manager starts automatically and runs as an icon in the icon area at the bottom of your screen. ■ OS/2 System Editor is a Presentation Manager text-processing application that is used to create and edit text files. ■ OS/2 Command Reference is a Presentation Manager application that is used to view the contents of the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. This reference contains general information as well as information on particular MS OS/2 commands. In addition to the Main group, Desktop Manager contains a Utilities group. The Utilities group contains the following utilities and applications: ■ Control Panel is a Presentation Manager application that is used to install printer drivers, to change country information and screen colors, and to set the date and time. ■ Copy Diskette is an MS OS/2 utility program that is used to duplicate a floppy disk. ■ Compare Diskettes is an MS OS/2 utility program that is used to compare the contents and the tracks of two floppy disks. ■ Label Diskettes is an MS OS/2 utility program that is used to assign a new volume label to a floppy disk. ■ Format Diskette is an MS OS/2 utility program that is used to format floppy disks in drive A. ■ Disk Information─CHKDSK is an MS OS/2 utility program that is used to check for errors and available storage space on your disks. ■ Fixed Disk Utility is a Presentation Manager utility program that is used to set up partitions on your hard disk and to assign drive letters to partitions. ■ Print Picture is a Presentation Manager application that is used for printing graphic document files that have a picture-interchange format or metafile format. ■ Display Picture is a Presentation Manager application that is used for displaying graphic document files on your screen. ■ Convert Picture is a Presentation Manager application that is used for converting files from picture-interchange format to metafile format (the format used in Presentation Manager). To open a program group by using a mouse, do the following: Mouse 1. Switch to Desktop Manager. 2. Double-click the group name or icon. Do the following to open a group by using the keyboard: Keyboard 1. Switch to Desktop Manager. 2. Press the DIRECTION keys to select the program group you want to open, as shown in the following example. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. Press ENTER. You can also use the Open command on the Desktop Manager Group menu to open a program group. Do the following to use the Open command: 1. Switch to Desktop Manager. 2. Select the program group you want to open. 3. Select the Group menu and choose the Open command. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note If a group is already open, using the Open command or double-clicking the group name in Desktop Manager makes the group window the active window. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── You can add new program groups to Desktop Manager by using the commands on the Group menu. Once you open a program group, you can change the applications in it by using the commands on the Program menu. For information on adding new groups, see "Creating a Program Group in Desktop Manager," later in this chapter. For information on changing applications in program groups, see "Adding an Application to a Program Group," "Changing Application Information," "Copying an Application to Another Group," and "Deleting an Application from a Program Group," later in this chapter. Starting an Application from File Manager In Presentation Manager, there are several ways you can start your applications. In addition to starting an application from a group window, you can also start an application by opening a program file in File Manager. Program files, as shown in the following example, usually have the filename extension .BAT, .EXE, (This figure may be found in the printed book). ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note The information in this section is intended to be an introduction to File Manager. For more complete information on starting applications from File Manager, see Chapter 3, "Using File Manager." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── To start an application from File Manager by using a mouse, do the following: Mouse 1. Switch to the Main-group window. 2. Start File Manager. 3. In the Directory Tree window, double-click the name of the directory that contains the application you want to start. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 4. Double-click the program file for the application you want to start. If you are using the keyboard, follow these steps to start an application from File Manager: Keyboard 1. Switch to the Main-group window. 2. Start File Manager. 3. In the Directory Tree window, press the DIRECTION keys to move to and select the name of the directory that contains the application you want to start, and then press ENTER to open the directory window. 4. In the directory window, press the DIRECTION keys to move to and select the program file for the application you want to start, and then press ENTER. Dragging a Data-File Icon Another method for starting an application from File Manager by using a mouse is to drag one or more data files onto an application icon or title in the group window. Starting an application in this way automatically opens the data file with the application. To start an application by dragging a data file from File Manager, do the following: Mouse 1. Start File Manager from the Main-group window. 2. Open the directory containing the data file you want to use. 3. Arrange the windows on your screen so that the File Manager directory window containing the data file you want to use and the group window containing the application you want to start are both visible. 4. Select the data file you want to use. 5. Using the right mouse button, drag the data-file icon onto the icon or title of the application you want to start. (This figure may be found in the printed book). You can start several occurrences of the same application. A separate occurrence of the application will start for each data file. If your application allows you to work with more than one file at a time, you can also start one occurrence of the application with several data files. To open several data files and start several occurrences of the application, do the following: Mouse 1. Select the data files you want to use. 2. Using the right mouse button, drag the data-file icons over the icon or title of the application you want to start. If you want to start only one occurrence of the application, do the following: ■ Press and hold down ALT while dragging the data-file icons onto the icon or title of the application you want to start. Some applications do not allow you to open more than one file at a time. For these applications, only the first file in your selection is opened. The other files are ignored. Starting an Application from the MS OS/2 Command Interpreter You can also start applications from the MS OS/2 command interpreter, cmd. To start an application from the MS OS/2 command interpreter, do the following: 1. Switch to the Main group and start either OS/2 Full Screen or OS/2 Window. 2. At the MS OS/2 prompt, type the command (and any command-line arguments) that starts the application and press ENTER. The appearance of your screen will depend on whether your application runs in a window or a full screen. If you start a full-screen OS/2 application, you see only the application screen. If you start a Presentation Manager application or a full-screen OS/2 application that runs in a window, the application window appears in front of other windows. When you complete your work with a particular application, you can quit the application. You can also quit the MS OS/2 command interpreter. To quit the MS OS/2 command interpreter, follow these steps: Keyboard ■ At the MS OS/2 prompt, type exit and press ENTER. Or ■ If you are running the MS OS/2 command interpreter in a window, you can quit by closing the window. If you are using a mouse, do the following to close the MS OS/2 command-interpreter window: Mouse 1. Double-click the System-menu box. A message box appears, asking you to confirm your decision to end the program and close the window. 2. Choose the Yes button. If you are using the keyboard, follow these steps to close the MS OS/2 command-interpreter window: Keyboard 1. Press SHIFT+ESC to select the System menu. 2. Choose the Close command. A message box appears, asking you to confirm your decision to end the program and close the window. 3. Choose the Yes button. Starting a DOS Application from the DOS Session In MS OS/2, you can run one DOS application at a time in a special environment called the DOS session─almost as if the application were running under DOS on a separate computer. You can switch between the DOS session and other MS OS/2 applications or groups; however, the multitasking capabilities of MS OS/2 are not available in the DOS session. The DOS session is represented by an icon at the bottom of your screen when you start Presentation Manager. (This figure may be found in the printed book). ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note Because DOS does not allow many of the features used in HPFS names, DOS applications may ignore files and directories named using the HPFS naming rules. For more information on HPFS filenames and how they are processed by DOS applications, see Chapter 16, "Using the High-Performance File System." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── In addition to starting a DOS application from a group window, you can start a DOS application directly from the DOS session. To run a DOS application in this way, you must first switch to the DOS session. To switch to the DOS session, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Double-click the DOS icon. 1 Press CTRL+ESC to display the Task List. 2 Choose DOS from the list of applications. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To start a DOS application from the DOS session, do the following: ■ At the DOS prompt, type the command (and any command-line arguments) that starts the application and press ENTER. You can run only one DOS application at a time in the DOS session; however, you can switch back to Presentation Manager and use other MS OS/2 applications without quitting your DOS application. Details on switching between applications are provided in the following section. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note You may experience problems with some DOS graphics applications when you switch between the DOS session and another session. In some DOS graphics applications the screen may not be restored correctly when you return to it from another session. If this occurs, close the DOS graphics application before switching to another session. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Switching Between Applications and Program Groups After you start more than one application or open more than one group window, you need to choose the application or group you want to work with and then switch to it. There are several ways to accomplish this depending on whether you use a mouse or the keyboard. Switching Between Visible Applications and Groups You can use a mouse to switch quickly between applications or groups that are visible on your Presentation Manager screen by doing the following: Mouse ■ To switch to an application or group window, click the window. Or ■ To switch to an application or group running as an icon, double-click the icon. You can also use the following keyboard technique to switch between Presentation Manager windows and icons, full-screen OS/2 applications, and the DOS session by doing the following: Keyboard ■ Press ALT+ESC until you reach the application or group you want to select. If you press ALT+ESC to switch to a Presentation Manager application or group that is running as an icon, its System menu appears. You must first use the Restore command to restore the application or group before you can work with it. Switching Between Applications and Groups by Using the Task List The Task List is used to keep track of your applications and can be used to switch quickly between them. You can display the Task List from the DOS session or from a full-screen OS/2 application, as well as from Presentation Manager. The applications you are currently running and the groups that are currently open are displayed in the Task List. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To display the Task List in Presentation Manager, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Position the mouse pointer Press CTRL+ESC. anywhere outside window and click the right mouse button. You can also display the Task List by using the Switch To command on the System menu by doing the following: ■ Select the System menu and choose the Switch To command. To switch to another application or group, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Double-click the name of the 1 Press the DIRECTION keys to move to application or group you want to and select the name of the application switch to. or group you want to switch to. 2 Press ENTER. You can use the Switch To button in the Task List to switch to a selected application or group by doing the following: 1. From the Task List, select the application or group you want. 2. Choose the Switch To button. You can cancel the Task List without switching to an application or group by using either a mouse or the keyboard. To cancel the Task List, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click the screen background Press ESC. (anywhere outside a window). Adding an Application to a Program Group To make starting applications easier and faster, you can add them to a program group by using the New command on the Program menu. This command stores the name of your application, its path, and any command arguments in the program group. To add an application to a program group, follow these steps: 1. Switch to the program group you want to add your application to. 2. Select the Program menu and choose the New command. The New Program dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. For details on completing the New Program dialog box, see the information following this procedure list. 4. To add the application, choose the Add button. The following list describes each area of the New Program dialog box: ■ In the Program Title box, you type the title of your application. This is the name that will appear in the program-group window. You can use any name you want, as long as it is unique in the program group. ■ In the Path and File Name box, you type the disk-drive letter and a colon (:); the path, separating each directory in the path with a backslash (\e); and the filename of your application. For example, to add the XCOPY.EXE application file on drive C in your OS2 directory, you would type the following: c:\eos2\excopy.exe ■ In the Parameters box, you type any command arguments─for example, a filename or an option. Type these arguments just as you would if you were typing the command at the MS OS/2 prompt. Argument information is optional, but some applications do not run correctly without this information. When you start an application by dragging a data-file icon onto an application icon, the data-file name is the last command argument (by default). If you want the data-file name to appear at another place in relation to the command arguments, type %* at the correct location. To display a dialog box requesting argument information each time you start the application, type the request you want displayed, surrounded by square brackets ([ ]) in the Parameters box. For example, if you want the dialog box to display "Enter your parameters now," you would type the following: [ your parameters now] ■ In the Working Directory box, you type the location of the working directory─for example, the directory that contains particular text files for a text-editing application. Adding a Program File from File Manager If you are using a mouse, you can add a program to a group by dragging the program-file icon from File Manager onto the group window or group icon. To use this method, do the following: Mouse 1. Start File Manager from the Main-group window. 2. Open the directory containing the program file you want to add. 3. Arrange the windows on your screen so that the directory window containing the program file you want to add and the group window or icon you want to add the program file to are both visible. 4. Select the program file you want to add. 5. Hold down the right mouse button and drag the program-file icon onto the group window or icon. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 6. Complete the New Program dialog box. Changing Application Information You can change any information used to start an application by using the Properties command on the Program menu. For example, you may want to change the working directory for an application or provide an additional argument, such as a filename. For full-screen OS/2 applications, you can use the Properties command to change whether an application runs in a window or in a full screen. To change the information used to start an application, follow these steps: 1. Switch to the program group containing the application you want. 2. Select the application from the group. 3. Select the Program menu and choose the Properties command. The Properties dialog box appears, displaying the current program information. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 4. Move to the dialog-box area you want to change and type the new information. 5. Choose the Change button. The last section in the dialog box, Program Type, lists two options: Presentation Manager and Other. When you start an application, Pre- sentation Manager can determine its type─Presentation Manager or Other─and whether the application should run in a window or in a full screen. Presentation Manager applications always run in windows. Some applications, though, can run in a window or in a full screen, depending on what is specified by the application. To change the default setting for running your application full-screen or in a window, do the following: 1. Switch to the program group containing the application you want to change. 2. Select the application from the group (it cannot be a Presentation Manager application). 3. Select the Program menu and choose the Properties command. The Properties dialog box appears (the Other option in the Program Type section is selected). (This figure may be found in the printed book). 4. Choose the Change button. The How to Run the Program dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 5. If you want your application to run in a full screen, select the Run the Program Full-Screen option. If you want your full-screen OS/2 application to run in a window, select the Run the Program in a Text Window option. If your application is a DOS application, select the Run the Program in DOS Mode option. If you want your application to determine whether it runs in a window or in a full screen, select the Let the Program Decide option. .ET If you select the Run the Program in a Text Window option, you can also turn on the Close the Window When the Program Ends check box. This automatically closes the window when you quit your application. 6. Choose the Enter button. .RT Copying an Application to Another Program Group You can copy applications to different program groups. You may want to include a frequently used application, such as the MS OS/2 command interpreter, cmd, in more than one program group. To copy an application to a different group by using a mouse, follow these steps: Mouse 1. Arrange the group window containing the application you want to copy and the group window or icon to which you want to copy the application so that they are both visible on your screen. .ET 2. Select the application you want to copy. 3. Press and hold down CTRL and, using the right mouse button, drag the application icon onto the group window or icon that you want to copy the application to. (This figure may be found in the printed book). .RT If you are using a mouse, you can also move an application from one group to another without copying it. To do this, do the following: Mouse ■ Press the right mouse button and drag the application icon onto its new group window or icon. To copy an application to a different group by using the keyboard, follow these steps: Keyboard 1. Switch to the program group containing the application you want. 2. Select the application you want to copy. 3. Select the Program menu and choose the Copy command. The Copy Program dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). The name of the application you selected appears at the top of the dialog box. 4. Select the group you want to copy the application to. 5. To change the application name in its new group, type the new name in the Change Title To box. 6. Choose the Copy button. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note If you want to move an application from one group to another without copying it by using the keyboard, you must first copy the application to a new group and then delete it from the old group. The following section explains how to delete an application. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Deleting an Application from a Program Group You can delete any application from a program group by using the Delete command on the Program menu. To delete an application, do the following: 1. Switch to the program group containing the application. 2. Select the application you want to delete. 3. Select the Program menu and choose the Delete command. A dialog box appears, asking you to confirm your decision to delete the program. 4. Choose the Yes button to delete the application; choose the No button to return to the program group; choose the Help button for information on the Delete command. Creating a Program Group in Desktop Manager You can create a new program group in Desktop Manager by using the New command on the Group menu. The program-group name you create appears in the Desktop Manager window. To add a program group to Desktop Manager, follow these steps: 1. Switch to Desktop Manager. 2. Select the Group menu and choose the New command. The New Group dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. Type the name of the group in the New Group Name box. 4. Choose the Add button. After you add a new group, Desktop Manager automatically opens the group so that you can add or copy applications to it. You add applications by using the Add command on the Program menu of the group window. You can also switch to another group and copy applications by dragging them with a mouse or by using the Copy command. For more information on copying applications from one group to another, see "Copying an Application to Another Program Group," earlier in this chapter. Changing the List in a Program-Group Window When you open a program-group window, the applications in the group are represented by title and icon. You can change the list so that only the application titles appear in the group window. (This figure may be found in the printed book). You change the way the contents of a group window are displayed by using the Text and Icon commands on the View menu. To display only application titles in a group window, follow these steps: 1. Switch to the program group window you want to change. 2. Select the View menu and choose the Text command. The next time you select the View menu, you will see a check mark next to the Text command, indicating that the text view is active. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To redisplay both the application icons and application titles, do the following: ■ Select the View menu and choose the Icon command. The next time you select the View menu, a check mark will appear next to the Icon command, indicating that the icon view is active. Renaming a Program Group You can change the name of a program group in Desktop Manager by using the Rename command on the Group menu. To rename a program group, follow these steps: 1. Switch to Desktop Manager. 2. Select the group name you want to change. 3. Select the Group menu and choose the Rename command. The Rename Group dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 4. Type the new group name in the New Name box. 5. Choose the Rename button. Deleting a Program Group You can remove a program group from Desktop Manager by using the Delete command on the Group menu. However, you must first remove all applications from the group by using the Delete command on the Program menu. For more information on deleting applications from a group, see "Deleting an Application from a Program Group," earlier in this chapter. To delete a program group, do the following: 1. Switch to Desktop Manager. 2. Select the program group you want to delete (the group should not contain any applications). 3. Select the Group menu and choose the Delete command. The Delete Group dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 4. Choose the Delete button. Working with a Full-Screen OS/2 Application in a Window Many full-screen OS/2 applications can run in a window even though they are not specifically designed as Presentation Manager applications. Running an application in a window gives you many of the advantages of a Presentation Manager application: you can size the window, you can use a mouse to switch to the application, and you have easy access to other applications. For information on how to make a full-screen OS/2 application run in a window, see "Changing Application Information," earlier in this chapter. (This figure may be found in the printed book). .ET You can select the System menu from a full-screen OS/2 application running in a window by doing the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click the System-menu box. Press ALT or SHIFT+ESC. (This figure may be found in the printed book). .RT Using Help Help information is available on running an application in a window; however, you get Help information for a full-screen OS/2 application running in a window in a different way than you get it for a regular Presentation Manager application. To get Help information on running a full-screen OS/2 application in a window, do the following: ■ Select the System menu and choose the Help command. The Help window appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). The Help window itself is a Presentation Manager window and works in the same way that other Presentation Manager windows work. You can close the Help window by doing the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Double-click the System-menu box. Press ESC. Switching Between Applications and Program Groups You can switch to another application or program group from a full-screen OS/2 application running in a window the same way you switch from an application running in Presentation Manager: by clicking in another window, by pressing ALT+ESC or ALT+TAB to move to the next application or window, or by clicking the right mouse button outside a window or pressing CTRL+ESC to display the Task List. In addition, the Switch Window command on the System menu lets you switch to another application or group. To switch to another application or group by using the Switch Window command, do the following: ■ Select the System menu and choose the Switch Window command. Reducing the Text Size To display more information in a window, you can reduce the size of the text displayed in a full-screen OS/2 application running in a window. To reduce the size of text characters, do the following: ■ Select the System menu and choose the Small Font command. In the System menu, the Small Font command, once it is chosen, is replaced by the Large Font command. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To restore the text characters to their original size, do the following: ■ Select the System menu and choose the Large Font command. Scrolling a Window When you are running a full-screen OS/2 application in a window, you may not be able to see all of the information at one time. You can scroll the contents of the window to see more information by using either the scroll bars or the Scroll command on the System menu. To scroll a window by using a mouse, do the following: Mouse ■ Click the scroll bars at the side or bottom of the window. (This figure may be found in the printed book). If you are using the keyboard, you can use the Scroll command on the System menu to scroll the contents of the window. Do the following: Keyboard 1. Select the System menu and choose the Scroll command. The title bar of the window changes to show that the Scroll command is in effect (a check mark also appears next to the Scroll command on the System menu). (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. Press the DIRECTION keys to scroll the window. 3. After you complete the scrolling, select the System menu and choose the Scroll command again. Sizing a Window You change the size of the window for a full-screen OS/2 application running in a window in much the same way you change the size of Presentation Manager application windows: by using a mouse or by choosing the Size, Minimize, Maximize, or Restore commands on the System menu. These commands work a little differently, however, in full-screen OS/2 application windows. To size a full-screen OS/2 application window by using a mouse, follow these steps: .ET Mouse 1. Point to the border or corner that you want to move (the mouse pointer becomes a two-headed arrow). 2. Drag the corner or border until the window is the size you want. .RT To size a full-screen OS/2 application window by using the keyboard, follow these steps: Keyboard 1. Select the System menu and choose the Size command. 2. Press one DIRECTION key to select the border you want to move. 3. Press the DIRECTION keys to move the border until the window is the size you want. 4. Press ENTER. If you choose the Small Font command, the window becomes smaller. The same amount of information is displayed but the character size is reduced. You can enlarge a full-screen OS/2 application window to fill most of your screen. However, the icon area remains visible on your screen. If you choose the Small Font command, the maximum size of the window is reduced. When you enlarge a full-screen OS/2 application window, the scroll bars disappear. To enlarge a full-screen OS/2 application window to its maximum size, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click the Maximize box. Select the System menu and choose the Maximize command. To reduce a full-screen OS/2 application window to an icon, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click the Minimize box. Select the System menu and choose the Minimize command. When you reduce a full-screen OS/2 application to an icon, the OS/2 Window icon appears at the bottom of your screen. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Running Utility Programs MS OS/2 utilities are programs you can use to accomplish common tasks such as formatting floppy disks, making backup copies of floppy disks, and checking available storage space on disks. How you start a utility depends on the task you want to accomplish. For example, if you want to provide additional information, such as a filename, when you start a utility, you should start the MS OS/2 command interpreter, cmd, and start the utility from the MS OS/2 command line. On the other hand, if MS OS/2 does not need any additional information in order to run the utility correctly, you should start it from File Manager. If you use a utility frequently, you may want to add it to a program group. Some MS OS/2 utilities have already been added to the Utilities group. The following list briefly describes each utility: Utility Description ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Copy Diskette Copies the contents of one floppy disk to another. Compare Diskettes Compares the contents of two floppy disks, track by track. Label Diskettes Assigns a volume label to a disk. Format Diskette Prepares a floppy disk for storing files. Disk Information─CHKDSK Checks a disk for errors and displays a summary of how disk space is used. Fixed Disk Utility Sets up partitions on a hard disk. Utility Description ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Print Picture Prints graphic document files that have picture-interchange format or metafile format. Display Picture Displays the contents of graphic document files on your screen. Convert Picture Converts files from picture-interchange format to metafile format (the format used in Presentation Manager). MS OS/2 includes additional utilities. For more information on using all MS OS/2 utilities, see Chapter 9, "Using MS OS/2 Utilities." For more information on using picture utilities, see Appendix C, "Using Picture Utilities." Saving Program Information Some applications allow you to save information about the size and location of the application windows and icons on your screen. You save program information by using the Save command in Desktop Manager. The next time you start the application, the application appears on your screen in exactly the same state it was in when you used the Save command. To save program information, do the following: 1. Switch to Desktop Manager. 2. Select the Desktop menu and choose the Save command. .ET A message appears, asking you to confirm your decision. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. Choose the OK button. .RT Quitting an Application and Closing a Window You can close any window or quit any application running in the Presentation Manager session. Make sure you save any changes that you've made to an application file before quitting the application. To quit an application or close a program-group window by using a mouse, do the following: Mouse ■ Double-click the System-menu box in the window you want to close. To quit an application or close a group window by using the Close command, do the following: ■ Select the System menu and choose the Close command. To use the Task List to quit an application or close a group window, follow these steps: 1. Display the Task List. 2. Select the application you want to quit or the group you want to close. 3. Choose the End Task button. Quitting All Running Applications at Once Instead of quitting each running application one by one, you can quit all applications at once by using the Close All command in Desktop Manager. To close all your applications at once, follow these steps: 1. Switch to Desktop Manager. 2. Select the Desktop menu and choose the Close All command. The Close All dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. If you want to save program information (the size and location of the application windows and icons on your screen), turn on the Save check box. 4. Choose the Close All button. Chapter 3 Using File Manager ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Introduction This chapter explains File Manager, a Presentation Manager application that you can use to quickly look at and organize your directories and files. From the Directory Tree window you can see the overall directory structure, as well as the contents of individual directories. You use File Manager commands to copy, delete, or rename files. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note All examples of filenames and directory names in this chapter use the file allocation table (FAT) file system, which is the file system used by DOS and MS OS/2 versions 1.1 and earlier. For information on using high-performance file system (HPFS) filenames and directory names, see Chapter 16, "Using the High-Performance File System." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Starting File Manager File Manager is a Presentation Manager application and is started from the Main group in Desktop Manager. To start File Manager, do the following: 1. Switch to the Main-group window. 2. Choose File Manager. File Manager appears on your screen with the Directory Tree win- dow displayed in the work area. The Directory Tree window is used to see the layout of your directories and subdirectories on any disk drive. From this window, you can open windows to look at files and subdirectories in individual directories. You can select different drives in order to look at their directory structure. You can open as many directory windows as you like; however, there is only one Directory Tree window. The following example shows the Directory Tree window. (This figure may be found in the printed book). The MS OS/2 multilevel file system resembles a tree. The tree begins with the root directory─the name of the first directory on the disk drive. The root directory is created when you format a disk. It appears as a backslash (\e). (This figure may be found in the printed book). The branches of the tree are the directories you create from the root directory. Each directory can contain additional directories. The Directory Tree window contains the following parts: ■ The System-menu box in the upper-left corner of the Directory Tree window contains commands you use to move and size the window and to move to other windows in File Manager. ■ The disk-drive icons represent disk drives on your computer. The current disk drive is highlighted. A drive letter and a colon (:) represent a disk drive. The current drive is listed at the top of the Directory Tree window. ■ The directory icons represent each directory on a disk. Directories are listed in alphabetical order beneath the root directory (\e). All directories are joined to the root directory by a vertical line. If a directory contains subdirectories, there is a minus sign inside the directory icon. Subdirectories appear beneath directories, connected by a vertical line. ■ The current directory is the directory marked by the selection cursor in the Directory Tree window. File Manager commands affect this directory. ■ The path appears in the status line underneath the drive icons and shows the current directory in the Directory Tree window. ■ The volume label is a name that identifies your disk; it appears in the status line underneath the drive icons. You see this information only if you give your disk a volume label. ■ Scroll bars appear if there are more directories and subdirectories than will fit in one Directory Tree window. The Directory Tree window resembles an application window in Presentation Manager. You can size and move this window in the File Manager work area. You can enlarge it to fill the entire File Manager work area, or you can reduce it to an icon. Changing Disk Drives When you start File Manager, the Directory Tree window shows the directory structure on the current disk drive─the disk drive on which you are working. The selected disk-drive icon represents the current disk drive. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To look at directories on another disk drive, you must select the disk drive, which then becomes the current disk drive. To select a disk drive, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Double-click the disk-drive icon. Press and hold down CTRL, and then press the letter of the disk drive you want. Changing Directories in the Directory Tree Window In the Directory Tree window, shown in the following example, the selection cursor shows the current directory. (This figure may be found in the printed book). You can select only one directory at a time in this window. To change to a different directory, you move the selection cursor. To move the selection cursor by using a mouse, do the following: Mouse ■ Click the directory name. To select a directory by using the keyboard, do the following: Keyboard ■ Press the UP or DOWN key. The following list describes several additional keys or key combinations you can use to move and select in the Directory Tree window. To select Press ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Root directory CTRL+HOME Last directory listed CTRL+END First subdirectory of a selected RIGHT directory, if one exists Next directory level up from a LEFT selected directory, if one exists Directory one window up from a PAGE UP selected directory Directory one window down from a PAGE DOWN selected directory Directory name or filename Initial letter Opening a Directory Window The Directory Tree window shows you the overall structure of your directories. To see the contents of a directory, you must open a directory window. Directory windows open in front of the Directory Tree window. All the files and any subdirectories are displayed. The disk drive and path appear at the top of the window in the title bar. The directory path shows the location of the directory in relation to the root directory; directory names are separated by backslashes (\e). From the directory window, you can open additional windows on any of the directories displayed. To open a directory window, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── In the Directory Tree window or 1 In the Directory Tree window or the the directory window, directory window, press the UP or DOWN double-click the directory name. key to move to and select the directory you want to open. 2 Press ENTER. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Files and directories are distinguished by the following icons in File Manager windows: Icon Description ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── A program-file icon. Files that contain programs, such as applications or batch files, are called program files. A data-file icon. Other files, such as text files, are called data files. A directory icon. Directories appear at the top of lists of files. A parent-directory icon. The first directory icon contains an arrow. This represents the directory one level up─the parent directory─from the current directory. The name of the parent directory appears inside brackets (< >). All directories have a parent directory except the root directory. Other icons may appear in a directory window. Some applications create customized icons to represent program files or different types of data files created by the application. For example, a program that includes both spreadsheet and graphics features may have a special icon to identify the program file, a different icon to identify charts created with the application, and another icon to identify worksheets. You can change the way directory and file information is displayed in directory windows by using the commands on the View menu. These commands are described in the section "Changing Information in the Directory Window," later in this chapter. Selecting in a Directory Window In directory windows, you must select directories and files before you can use most File Manager commands. Selecting a Directory or File To select a directory or file by using a mouse, do the following: Mouse ■ Click the directory name or filename. The following list explains how to select directories or files by using the keyboard: To select Press ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Directory name or filename UP or DOWN Last directory or file listed END First directory or file listed HOME File or directory one directory PAGE UP window up File or directory one directory PAGE DOWN window down Directory name or filename Initial letter ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note The PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys scroll the directory window up or down one window. The selection cursor remains in the same relative position in the window; for example, if the first file in the window is selected before you press the key, the first file in the new directory listing is selected. If you size the directory window so that it displays all files and directories, the selection cursor does not move when you press PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Extending a Selection In directory windows, you can select more than one item at a time. This is called extending a selection. For example, you can select several files and copy them to another directory. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To extend a selection by using a mouse, follow these steps: Mouse 1. Select the first item you want in the group by clicking the filename or directory name. 2. Press and hold down SHIFT and click the last item you want in the group. Or ■ Click the first item in the group that you want to select, press and hold down the left mouse button, and drag the mouse pointer to the last item you want in the group. To extend a selection by using the keyboard, follow these steps: Keyboard 1. Press the DIRECTION keys to move to the first item you want to select. 2. While holding down SHIFT, press the DIRECTION keys to move to and select the remaining items you want in the group. Selecting Scattered Items You can also extend a selection to include scattered files or directories. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To select scattered items, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Press and hold down CTRL and 1 Press SHIFT+F8. .LP The selection click each item. cursor begins to blink. 2 Press the DIRECTION keys to move to each item. 3 Press the SPACEBAR to select each item. You can select scattered groups of items by combining selection techniques. To select more than one group of items by using the mouse, follow these steps: Mouse 1. Select the first group of items (by dragging the mouse pointer or by clicking the first item and then pressing SHIFT and clicking the last item in the group). 2. To select the second group of items, press CTRL and drag the mouse pointer from the first item to the last item in the group (or press CTRL and click the first item in the group and press SHIFT+CTRL and click the last item in the group). To select more than one group of files by using the keyboard, follow these steps: Keyboard 1. Select the first group of items (by pressing SHIFT while pressing the DIRECTION keys to move to and select the items). 2. Press SHIFT+F8. The selection cursor begins to blink. 3. Press the DIRECTION keys to move to the first item in the next group of items. 4. Press the SPACEBAR to select the first item. 5. Press the SHIFT+DIRECTION keys to move to and select the remaining items in the group. Selecting All Files To select all items in a directory window, follow these steps: 1. Select the File menu. 2. Choose the Select All command. Canceling a Selection To cancel a selection, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Press and hold down CTRL and 1 Press SHIFT+F8 (if you already click the item. pressed SHIFT+F8 to select items, ignore this step). .LP The selection cursor begins to blink. 2 Press the DIRECTION keys to move to the item. 3 Press the SPACEBAR. You can also use two File Manager commands on the File menu to cancel selections in directory windows: Deselect All and Undo Selection. When you use these commands, the selection cursor does not move. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To cancel all selections, do the following: 1. Select the File menu. 2. Choose the Deselect All command. You can cancel your most recent selection in a directory window by using the Undo Selection command. To undo your last selection, follow these steps: 1. Select the File menu. 2. Choose the Undo Selection command. Using the System Menu in a File Manager Window Each window in File Manager has a System menu. It is located in the upper-left corner of the window. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To select the System menu, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click the System-menu box. Press SHIFT+ESC and then press the RIGHT key, or press CTRL+ - (hyphen key). . The following list describes the commands on the System menu in File Manager windows: Command Action ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Restore Restores a window to its former size after it has been enlarged (by using the Maximize command) or reduced to an icon (by using the Minimize command). Switch Window Selects the next window in the work area. Move Moves the active window in the work area. Size Changes the size of the active window. Command Action ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Minimize Reduces a window to an icon. Maximize Enlarges a window to its maximum size. Close Closes the active window. Split Moves the vertical split bar that divides the directory window when the file-details option is selected. Selecting a Window If more than one window is open in File Manager, you must select the window you want to work in. There are several ways to do this by using a mouse or the keyboard. To select a window, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click the window. 1 In the active window, press CTRL+ - (hyphen key) to select the System menu. 2 Press W to choose the Switch Window command. 3 Repeat this process until the window you want becomes the active window. .ET You can also use the Window menu to select windows. The Window menu lists all windows, including the Directory Tree window and any open directory windows (listed by directory name). As you open directory windows, each directory name is added to the Window menu. (This figure may be found in the printed book). .RT To select a window by using the Window menu, do the following: 1. Select the Window menu. 2. Choose the window you want. Using File Manager Commands Before you start working with File Manager commands, you should become familiar with MS OS/2 naming conventions for files, directories, and disk drives. Although with File Manager you can use the selection cursor to select files, directories, or disk drives, you may occasionally need to type the names for these items─for example, in a dialog box or while you are working with the MS OS/2 command interpreter (cmd). Naming a File or Directory The rules you follow to name your files and directories depend on which file system you are using. The file system is the part of the operating system that controls how files and directories are orga- nized, stored, and retrieved on your computer. Two file systems are provided with MS OS/2: the high-performance file system (HPFS) and the file allocation table (FAT) file system. HPFS is a new file system that can be set up only on your hard disk; the FAT file system was used in DOS and earlier versions of MS OS/2. You can format both hard disks and floppy disks to use the FAT file system. If you formatted your hard disk when you set up MS OS/2 on your computer, you were given a choice of which file system you wanted to install on your hard disk. To change the file system you are currently using or for more details on how to set up HPFS, see Chapter 16, "Using the High-Performance File System." One of the main differences between the FAT file system and HPFS is in how you name files and directories. If you are using HPFS, you should be familiar with both FAT and HPFS naming rules because floppy disks cannot be formatted for HPFS. If you are familiar with DOS or previous versions of MS OS/2, you have used the FAT file system. Filenames and directory names can be up to eight characters long. You can add an extension, three additional characters, to a filename or directory name, but these must be separated from the name by a period (.). Often, applications automatically add extensions when you create files. (This figure may be found in the printed book). In HPFS, filenames can be up to 254 characters long. The period (.) is a valid filename character, and you can use as many as you like in a filename. The following characters can also be used in HPFS: , + = [ ] ; Blank spaces can also be used anywhere in a filename or directory name. There is no requirement that filenames have extensions; however, many applications still create and use them. The case you give to HPFS filenames will be preserved for directory listings; you can have a file that is all uppercase, all lowercase, or mixed case, and it will be listed as you typed it. However, case is ignored in file searches and all system operations other than directory listings. Therefore, in a given directory, you cannot have more than one file with the same name where the only difference is case. For example, you cannot have files in the same directory named "my.taxfile.txt" and "MY.TAXFILE.TXT". For more information on HPFS file-naming rules, see Chapter 16, "Using the High-Performance File System." All FAT filenames are valid in HPFS. Floppy disks use the FAT file system only, so long filenames created in HPFS must be shortened when you move or copy these files to floppy disks. The Move and Copy commands in File Manager detect the file-system format of a disk and provide short names for your files (for more information on this process, see "Transferring Files Between File Systems," later in this chapter). HPFS filenames that contain characters or blank spaces not allowed in the FAT file system cannot be moved or copied to floppy disks. If you attempt to do so, you will see a message stating that the filename contains an incorrect character. You must change the filename before moving or copying the file. In the DOS session, the FAT naming rules apply: Filenames are limited to eight characters with three-character extensions. You cannot use files with long HPFS filenames with your DOS applications. These long filenames do not appear in directory listings in the DOS session. The following characters cannot be used in directory names or filenames regardless of the file system you have set up because they are reserved for MS OS/2: < > : " / \e | Wildcard characters\, the question mark (?) and asterisk (*), have special meaning. These characters can take the place of other characters when you are specifying filenames in File Manager─for example, when copying files from one directory to another. The question mark (?) replaces any single character─for example, AUG? matches the files AUGU, AUG, and AUG1. The asterisk (*) replaces zero or more characters in a filename and matches any character; for example, AUG* matches any filename that begins with AUG, as well as filenames such as AUGUST.DOC, AUGUSTFIRST, or simply AUG. If you are using MS OS/2 commands such as copy or dir, the wildcard characters can function differently depending on the command. For more information, see Chapter 8, "Running Cmd." Specifying a File Location When you are using commands in File Manager, you can specify the exact location of a file or directory. This is called giving the path. The path includes all of the directory information MS OS/2 needs to find a particular file. A path has the following form: [\edirectory...][\edirectory...]\edirectory The information inside the square brackets ([ ]) is optional, indicating that you could have more than one directory in a path. Each directory name is separated by a backslash (\e). The first backslash represents the root directory. You specify a path with a filename only if the file is not in the current directory. A path is shown in the following example. (This figure may be found in the printed book). You add a disk-drive designation to a path if you are working with files and directories on different disk drives. The disk-drive designation has the following form: drive: The following example shows the drive designation, path, and filename of a file─the PASTDUE.DOC file in the ACCOUNTS directory on drive A will be copied to the COLLECTION directory on drive C. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Changing Information in the Directory Tree Window You can control the amount of directory information shown in the Directory Tree window by using the Tree menu commands. (This figure may be found in the printed book). When you first start File Manager, the entire directory structure is shown. All directories and subdirectories are listed in the Directory Tree window. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Collapsing a Directory Level A minus sign (-) appears next to any directory that contains a subdirectory. You use the minus signs to "collapse," or hide, individual subdirectories. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Once a directory is collapsed, only the directory name is displayed; the minus sign changes to a plus sign (+) to indicate the hidden subdirectories. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To collapse a directory level by using a mouse, do the following: Mouse ■ Click the minus sign (-) to the left of the name of the directory you want to collapse. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To collapse a directory level by using the keyboard, do the following: Keyboard 1. Press the DIRECTION keys to move to and select the directory you want to collapse. 2. Select the Tree menu and choose the Collapse Branch command, or press - (minus key or hyphen key). Expanding a Directory You can expand a directory to see its subdirectories. To expand a directory, follow this step: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click the plus sign (+) next to 1 Press the DIRECTION keys to move to the directory you want to expand. and select the directory you want to expand. 2 Select the Tree menu and choose the Expand One Level command, or press + (plus key). Another command on the Tree menu, Expand Branch, is used to show all directory levels beneath a selected directory. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Follow these steps to use the Expand Branch command: 1. Select the directory you want to expand. 2. Select the Tree menu and choose the Expand Branch command. To display all the directory levels in the Directory Tree window at once, do the following: ■ Select the Tree menu and choose the Expand All command. Changing Information in a Directory Window When you first start File Manager and open a directory window, files are listed by filename and are sorted in alphabetical order. The commands on the View menu, shown in the following example, are used to change and control how the files and directories appear in directory windows. You can choose to display just the filenames, or just file and directory icons, or complete file information. You can also sort files and can include or omit different types of files from the directory listings. (This figure may be found in the printed book). If the Directory Tree window is the active File Manager window when you use a command on the View menu, all directory windows you open afterward will be affected (directory windows already open remain unchanged). If a directory window is active, the command usually affects only that window. However, three commands on the View menu─Other, Sort By, and Include─have an option called Set System Default. If you select this option when using one of these commands, any choices you make in the dialog box become default settings and any directory windows you open afterward will be affected. Changing the File Listing You can change how file information appears in directory windows by using the Name, File Details, Icon, or Other commands on the View menu. A check mark appears next to the command when it is in effect. These commands are grouped together on the View menu because one must be in effect at all times. When you first start File Manager, the Name command is checked. This means that only filenames and directory names appear in a directory window. The following list summarizes the effect of each command on the directory window: Command Displays ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Name Filenames and directory names File Details Complete file and directory information Icon Files and directories as icons (names appear underneath) Other Selected file information The icon view of a directory window is a graphic presentation of file information. Icons that usually appear next to a filename or directory name are enlarged, and the name appears underneath, as shown in the following example. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To display directory information as icons, do the following: 1. Select the directory window you want to change (to change all the directory windows, select the Directory Tree window). 2. Select the View menu and choose the Icon command. The File Details command on the View menu lets you see file information such as file size, the date and time the file was last changed, and the file flags (for example, Read-only and Archive) for all files in a particular directory. To view all file information in a directory window, do the following: 1. Select the directory window you want to change (to change all the directory windows, select the Directory Tree window). 2. Select the View menu and choose the File Details command. Once you choose the File Details command, the window splits vertically. The filename appears on the left; file details appear on the right─for example, size, last modification date, and the file flags. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Splitting a directory window makes it possible to view long filenames. (If you set up the high-performance file system on the disk drive, file- names can be up to 254 characters long.) You can use the scroll bars at the bottom of the window to look at information not visible, or you can reposition the split bar. To move the split bar, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Drag the split bar to the 1 Select the directory window System position you want. menu by pressing CTRL+ - (hyphen key) and choose the Split command (the Split command is added to the System menu when you choose File Details). 2 Press the RIGHT or LEFT key to move the border to the position you want and press ENTER. The procedure for selecting files in a split window is the same as in any other window; however, you can also select either side of the window. The selection cursor moves from one side to the other, depending on the side you select. To move the selection cursor, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click the side of the window you Press F6. want to select. You can select which file details appear in the directory listing by using the Other command on the View menu. The directory window splits, as with the File Details command, and the file details you select appear in columns in the right side of the window. If the Directory Tree window is active when you choose the Other command, the settings you create with the command become the system default settings. If a directory window is active, then the settings affect only the active window. An option is provided, Set System Default, so that you can create new system default settings from a directory window as well as from the Directory Tree window. If you use this option, only the active window and any new windows you open will display default settings. Directory windows that are already open remain unchanged. To control which file details appear in a directory listing, follow these steps: 1. Select the window you want to change. 2. Select the View menu and choose the Other command. The View Other dialog box appears. 3. Select the file details you want in your directory listing. For more information on completing this dialog box, see the information following this procedure. 4. Turn on the Set System Default check box if you want the settings to become the default settings and affect other directory windows you open (directory windows that are already open remain unchanged). 5. Choose the View Now button (if the Directory Tree window is active, choose the Set View button). You can choose to display one or all of the following file details: Option Displays ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Size File or directory size (in bytes) Last Modification Date Date the file or directory was last changed Last Access Date Date the file was last opened Creation Date Date the file was created File Flags Information on the file flags set for the file (R for Read-only, A for Archive, H for Hidden) ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note The creation date and last access date information is available only in the high-performance file system (HPFS). If your disk drive is formatted with the file allocation table (FAT) file system, this information is not displayed. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Sorting a File Listing You can control how file information in a directory window is sorted by using three commands on the View menu: By Name, By Type, and Sort By. (This figure may be found in the printed book). A check mark appears next to the command that is in effect. These commands are grouped together because one of them must be in effect at all times. When you first start File Manager, the By Name command is checked. This means that files and directories appear in alphabetical order. Directories always appear first in the listing─the first directory is the parent directory (the directory one level up). The root directory does not have a parent directory. If the Directory Tree window is active when you choose a sort command, the settings you create with the command become the system default settings. If a directory window is active, then the settings affect only the active window. The Sort By command includes an option, Set System Default, so that you can create new system default settings from a directory window as well as from the Directory Tree window. If you use this option, only the active window and new windows you open will display default settings. Directory windows that are already open remain unchanged. You can sort files according to file type. This means that files are sorted alphabetically according to their extension─the last three characters of the filename (for example, filenames ending with .CMD, would appear before filenames ending with .EXE). You can also sort files based on other file information, such as the date a file was created. Using the Sort By command, you can sort files in the following ways: Option Sorts files ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Name Alphabetically by name Type Alphabetically by extension Size By size (largest file first) Last Modification Date By date and time each file was last changed Last Access Date By date and time each file was last accessed Creation Date By the date and time each file was created The file information about creation date and last access date is available only if you installed the high-performance file system (HPFS) on your disk. If the disk is formatted with the file allocation table (FAT) file system and you specify Last Access Date or Creation Date, then files are sorted by name. To change how files are sorted, follow these steps: 1. Select the directory window that contains the files you want to sort. If you select the Directory Tree window, the sorting order becomes the default order for the windows you open afterward. 2. Select the View menu and choose the Sort By command. The Sort By dialog box appears. 3. In the Sort box, select the sorting order you want. 4. Turn on the Set System Default check box if you want the settings to become the default settings and affect other directory windows you open (directory windows that are already opened remain unchanged). 5. Choose the View Now button (if the Directory Tree window is active, choose the Set View button). You can use the By Name and By Type commands as shortcuts to sorting files alphabetically by name (the default setting) or alphabetically by the filename extension. To quickly sort files by name or type, do the following: 1. Select the directory window. 2. Select the View menu and choose the By Name command to sort files by name; choose the By Type command to sort files alphabetically by filename extension. Including a File in a File Listing You can control which files and directories appear in a directory window by using the Include command on the View menu. By default, all files and directories are included when you open a window. You can include or omit files from the directory window according to type (directory, program, or data file). The Include command allows you to display the following files: ■ Directories ■ Program files (identified by a extension) ■ Data files (files other than program files and directories) You can also include or omit files according to their file flags (file flags are part of the directory information that identifies a file to MS OS/2). Because files often have more than one file flag set, the Include command lets you select a group of files with matching flags, and within that group of files, omit or keep files with other file flags. You can display files according to the following file flags: Flag Description ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Read-only Files that cannot be edited or changed Archive Files that have been backed up or copied using MS OS/2 utilities such as backup and xcopy Hidden Files that do not appear in directory listings Other Directories or files with no flags set If the Directory Tree window is active when you choose the Include command, the settings you create with the command become the system default settings. If a directory window is active, then the settings affect only the active window. An option, Set System Default, is provided so that you can create new system default settings from a directory window, as well as from the Directory Tree window. If you use this option, only the active window and new windows you open will display default settings. Directory windows that are already open remain unchanged. To change the files that appear in a directory window, following these steps: 1. Select the View menu and choose the Include command. The Include dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. You can view files according to filename. The default is *, indicating that all files will appear. To specify a different filename, type the new name in the Name box. You can use the wildcard characters, * and ?, to specify portions of filenames. 3. Move to the File Type section and turn on the check boxes for the types of files you want to appear in the directory window: directories, programs, or data files. You can choose more than one. 4. Move to the File Flags section. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 5. For each file flag, select the option you want. You have three options: Show, But Omit, But Keep. The Show option creates a group of files with the file flags you select. The But Omit option checks the group of files and removes any files with that particular flag set. The But Keep option checks the group of files and keeps any files with that particular flag set. 6. Select the Set System Default option if you want the settings to become the default settings and affect any other directory win- dows you open (directory windows that are already open remain unchanged). 7. Choose the View Now button (if the Directory Tree window is active, choose the Set View button). Updating a File Manager Window As you use File Manager commands to organize and manage your files, the information in directory windows may become out-of-date or inaccurate. You can use the Refresh command on the Window menu to update your directory windows or the icons representing your programs. You can choose to refresh only directory windows or only the icons that represent your programs, or you can choose to refresh both at the same time. To use the Refresh command, do the following: .ET 1. Select the Window menu and choose the Refresh command. The Refresh dialog box appears. 2. Turn on the Refresh Contents check box to update your directory windows; turn on the Refresh Icons check box to update your program icons. 3. Choose the Refresh button. .RT Changing the Font in File Manager Windows You can change the text size and font in File Manager windows using the Fonts command on the Options menu. To change the text size and font in File Manager windows, follow these steps: 1. Select the Options menu and choose the Fonts command. The Fonts dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. In the Font box, select the font you want. 3. Move to the Size box and select the text size you want. 4. Move to the Typestyle section and turn on the Bold check box for boldface text; turn on the Italic check box for italic text. A sample of how the text will look appears in the Font Sample box. 5. Choose the Set button. Reducing a File Manager Window to an Icon You can reduce a File Manager window to an icon when you have finished working with it but want it available for later use. The directory is still open (represented by an icon at the bottom of the File Manager work area). You can select and move icons on your screen the same way you select and move windows. You can also move or copy files or directories by using the mouse, just as if the window were open. When you want to see the contents of the window, you can use the Maximize or Restore command to enlarge it. To reduce a File Manager window to an icon by using a mouse, do the following: Mouse 1. Select the window you want to reduce by clicking it. 2. Click the Minimize box. (This figure may be found in the printed book). If you are using the keyboard, follow these steps to reduce a window to an icon: Keyboard 1. Select the window you want to reduce by selecting the Window menu and choosing the window. 2. Select the System menu by pressing CTRL+ - (hyphen key). 3. Press N to choose the Minimize command. Enlarging a File Manager Window or Icon You can enlarge a File Manager window so it fills the File Manager work area. To enlarge a File Manager window using the mouse, do the following: Mouse 1. Select the window you want to enlarge by clicking it. 2. Click the Maximize box, as shown in the following example. (This figure may be found in the printed book). The Maximize box disappears, and the Restore box takes its place. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To enlarge an icon by using a mouse, follow these steps: Mouse 1. Click the icon you want to enlarge. The System menu appears. 2. Click the Maximize command. To enlarge a window or an icon by using the keyboard, do the following: Keyboard 1. Select the window or icon you want to enlarge by selecting the Window menu and choosing the window. 2. Select the System menu by pressing CTRL+ - (hyphen key). 3. Press X to choose the Maximize command. Restoring a File Manager Window or Icon You can restore a File Manager window or icon to its previous size after it has been reduced or enlarged with the Restore command. If you are using a mouse, you can use the Restore box to return a window to its previous size by doing the following: Mouse 1. Select the window that you want to restore by clicking it. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. Click the Restore box. If you are using the keyboard, follow these steps to restore a window to its previous size: Keyboard 1. Select the window that you want to restore by selecting the Window menu and choosing the window. 2. Select the System menu by pressing CTRL+ - (hyphen key). (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. Press R to choose the Restore command. To restore an icon to its previous size, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Double-click the icon. Select the Window menu and choose the window. .ET Arranging Windows in File Manager File Manager has two commands on the Window menu you can use to organize windows on your screen: Tile and Cascade. These commands arrange File Manager windows the same way the Tile All and Cascade All commands in Desktop Manager arrange application windows. The Tile command arranges windows side by side so that each window is visible. None of the windows overlap. .RT The Cascade command arranges windows so that they overlap, starting in the upper-left corner of the File Manager work area. The title bar of each window remains visible. To use the Cascade or Tile command, do the following: ■ Select the Window menu and choose either the Cascade or Tile command. Creating a Directory You can create new directories by using the Create Directory command: Create a subdirectory of the current directory (if the Directory Tree window is active, the current directory is the selected directory), or create a directory in a different location by typing the path of the new directory in a dialog box. To use the Create Directory command, follow these steps: 1. Select the File menu and choose the Create Directory command. The Create Directory dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). The current directory is shown in the dialog box. 2. To create a subdirectory of the current directory, type the name in the New Directory Name box; to create a directory in a different location, type the complete path (for example, \e1990\ebooks). 3. Choose the Create button. You can copy files into a directory by using the Move or Copy commands on the File menu, or you can create files by using your applications. For more information on these commands, see the sections later in this chapter. Deleting a File or Directory You can delete a file or directory by using the Delete command on the File menu. Deleting a directory also deletes any files or directories in the directory. To delete a file or directory, do the following: 1. Select the file or directory you want to delete in the File Manager window (in the Directory Tree window, you can delete only directories). 2. Select the File menu and choose the Delete command. The Delete dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). The selected file or directory is displayed. 3. Choose the Delete button. A dialog box appears, confirming that you want to delete the directory or file. 4. Choose the Yes button to complete the command; choose the No button to cancel the command. Two check boxes in the Delete dialog box are used to turn off the warning messages that appear when you delete files or directories. The default setting is to display warning messages. The Confirm on Delete message confirms the name of each file you delete. The Confirm on Subtree Delete message confirms that you want to delete a directory and its contents. The message settings you make when using the Delete command affect only the particular files or directories you are deleting. To change whether these messages are displayed by default, use the Confirma- tion command on the Options menu. For more information on the Confirmation command, see "Turning Off a Confirmation Message," later in this chapter. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note You cannot delete some MS OS/2 files. If you attempt to delete an MS OS/2 system file or a file that an application is using, you receive a message that the file cannot be deleted at the present time. Because MS OS/2 is a multitasking system, it protects you from deleting files that other programs are using and from deleting important system files, such as the OS2.INI file or the program files that are part of the operating system. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Moving a File or Directory You can move a file or directory by dragging it with a mouse or by using the Move command on the File menu. You can move the file or directory to a directory in the Directory Tree window, to another directory window, to a directory icon, or to a disk-drive icon. If you are moving directories or files by using a mouse, both the items you move and the destination (the window or icon) must be visible. For more information on moving files from one file system to another (for example, from HPFS to the FAT file system), see "Transferring Files Between File Systems," later in this chapter. To move a file or directory to a location on the same disk drive by using a mouse, follow these steps: 1. Select the File Manager window that contains the file or directory you want to move. If you are moving a directory, you can select the Directory Tree window. 2. Select the file or directory in the window. 3. Using the right mouse button, drag the file or directory icon to the destination directory. A dialog box appears, displaying the file or directory that is being moved and the destination directory. 4. If you are moving a directory, a dialog box appears, asking you to confirm the move. Choose the Yes button. To move a file or directory to a different disk drive by using a mouse, do the following: Mouse 1. Select the File Manager window that contains the file or directory you want to move. If you are moving a directory, you can select the Directory Tree window. 2. Select the file or directory in the window. 3. Press and hold down ALT and, using the right mouse button, drag the file or directory to the appropriate disk drive (the disk-drive icon at the top of the Directory Tree window or any open window on a disk drive). (This figure may be found in the printed book). A dialog box appears, confirming the move. 4. If you are moving a directory, a dialog box appears, asking you if you want to move the directory and any files in it. Choose the Yes button. To move a file or directory by using the keyboard, follow these steps: Keyboard 1. Open a window on the directory that contains the file or directory you want to move. If you are moving a directory, you can select the Directory Tree window. 2. Select the file or directory you want to move. 3. Select the File menu and choose the Move command. The Move dialog box, shown in the following example, appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). The file or directory appears in the From box. 4. Type the destination directory in the To box. 5. Choose the Move button. You can move more than one file or directory at a time by extending your selection in the directory window; however, in the Directory Tree window, you can select only one directory at a time. For more information on extending a selection in a directory window, see "Selecting in a Directory Window," earlier in this chapter. If you are moving more than one file or directory, the destination should be a directory rather than a file. If you move more than one item to a file, File Manager attempts to replace the file with each item you are moving. If you are moving multiple files or directories using the Move dialog box, start each filename or directory name on a new line in the From box (press ENTER to start each new line). The Confirm on Replace check box in the Move dialog box is used to turn off the warning message that appears before you overwrite an existing file or directory. Turning off this check box affects only that particular move operation. To change whether the Confirm on Replace message is displayed by default, use the Confirmation command on the Options menu. For more information on the Confirmation command, see "Turning Off a Confirmation Message," later in this chapter. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note In the high-performance file system (HPFS), you can use the Move command to change the case of a filename or directory name. For example, to change the file "my.taxfile.txt" to "MY.TAXFILE.TXT", type the new name in the To box. For more information on HPFS, see Chapter 16, "Using the High-Performance File System." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Copying a File or Directory You can copy a file or directory by using either a mouse or the Copy command on the File menu. You can copy a file or directory to a directory in the Directory Tree window, to another directory window, or to a directory icon. For more information on copying files from one file system to another (for example, from HPFS to the FAT file system), see "Transferring Files Between File Systems," later in this chapter. To copy a file or directory to another directory on the same disk drive by using a mouse, follow these steps: Mouse 1. Select the File Manager window that contains the file or directory you want to copy. If you are copying a directory, you can select the Directory Tree window. If you are copying files or directories between windows, both windows must be visible. 2. Select the file or directory in the window. 3. Press and hold down CTRL and, using the right mouse button, drag the file or directory icon to the destination directory. A dialog box appears, confirming the copy. 4. If you are copying a directory, a dialog box appears, asking if you want to copy the directory and any files in it. Choose the Yes button. To copy a file or directory to a different disk drive by using a mouse, follow these steps: Mouse 1. Select the File Manager window that contains the file or directory you want to copy. If you are copying a directory, you can select the Directory Tree window. If you are copying a file or a directory between windows, both windows must be visible in File Manager. 2. Select the file or directory in the window. 3. Using the right mouse button, drag the file or directory icon to the destination directory. A dialog box appears, confirming the copy. 4. If you are copying a directory, a dialog box appears, asking you if you want to copy the directory and any files in it. Choose the Yes button. Follow these steps to copy a file or directory by using the keyboard: Keyboard 1. Open a window on the directory that contains the file or directory you want to copy. If you are copying a directory, you can select the Directory Tree window. 2. Select the file or directory you want to copy. 3. Select the File menu and choose the Copy command. The Copy dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). The file or directory you selected appears in the From box. 4. Type the destination file or directory in the To box. 5. Choose the Copy button. You can copy more than one file or directory at a time to a destination directory by extending your selection in the directory window; however, in the Directory Tree window, you can select only one directory at a time. For more information on extending a selection in a directory window, see "Selecting in a Directory Window," earlier in this chapter. If you are copying multiple files or directories using the Copy dialog box, start each filename on a new line in the From box (press ENTER to start each new line). .ET Transferring Files Between File Systems If you installed the high-performance file system (HPFS) on a disk drive on your hard disk, you may need to move some of your files to a disk drive formatted with the file allocation table (FAT) file system. Because the FAT file system supports only eight-character filenames .RT with three-character file extensions, filenames longer than this must be shortened when transferred to a FAT-formatted disk. (Filenames that contain characters or blank spaces not allowed in the FAT file system are invisible to the FAT file system. You cannot copy or move these files to a FAT-formatted disk without changing their names.) When you transfer files using File Manager, either by using a mouse or by using the Copy and Move commands, long filenames are automatically shortened as follows: ■ The base of the name is the first eight characters or the characters up to the last period, whichever limit is encountered first. ■ Any periods in the base of the name are converted to underscores (_). ■ The first three characters after the last period become the filename extension. (If there is no period in the long filename, the proposed filename has no extension.) When you transfer the file back to HPFS using File Manager, the original long filename is restored. Using the Confirmation command on the Options menu, you can turn on confirmation messages that allow you to edit a proposed short filename or change a restored long filename. If the confirmation message is turned on, a dialog box appears, proposing a short filename each time you use File Manager to transfer files from HPFS to the FAT file system. You can edit the proposed name. (This figure may be found in the printed book). When you use File Manager to transfer a file back to HPFS, a dialog box appears, asking if you want to restore the original long filename. You can accept the proposed name, or choose to keep the shortened name. To turn on the confirmation messages, follow these steps: 1. Select the Options menu and choose the Confirmation command. The Confirmations dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. Turn on the Confirm New Name of All Transferred Files check box. A dialog box will be displayed each time you transfer a file from HPFS to the FAT file system. 3. Turn on the Confirm Restored Name of All Transferred Files check box. A dialog box will be displayed each time you move a file with a long filename from the FAT file system to HPFS. 4. Choose the Set button. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note Earlier versions of MS OS/2 (1.1 or earlier) and DOS (ver- sions 4.1 or earlier) do not support the extended attribute feature of MS OS/2. If you copy or move a file with extended attributes to a file system that does not support extended attributes, a message will appear telling you that the extended attributes will be discarded. If the file requires the extended attributes, MS OS/2 will not copy the file, and will display a message telling you that the extended attributes cannot be copied. If you are transferring files to the FAT file system for use on a computer running DOS or an earlier version of MS OS/2, you can use the MS OS/2 eautil utility to ensure that extended-attribute information for your files is saved. See the eautil entry in the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference for more information. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Renaming a File or Directory You can rename a file or directory by using the Rename command on the File menu. To rename a file or directory, do the following: 1. Select the File Manager window that contains the file or directory you want to rename. If you are renaming a directory, you can select the Directory Tree window. 2. Select the file or directory you want to rename (you should rename only one file or directory at a time). 3. Select the File menu and choose the Rename command. The Rename dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). The file or directory you selected appears in the From box. 4. Type the new name in the To box. 5. Choose the Rename button. The Confirm on Replace check box in the Rename dialog box is used to turn off the warning message that appears before you overwrite an existing file or directory with the Rename command. Turning off the check box affects only that particular rename operation. To change whether the Confirm on Replace message is displayed by default, use the Confirmation command on the Options menu. For more information on the Confirmation command, see "Turning Off a Confirmation Message," later in this chapter. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note In the high-performance file system (HPFS), you can use the Rename command to change the case of a filename or directory name. For example, to change the file "my.taxfile.txt" to "MY.TAXFILE.TXT", type the new name in the To box. For more information on HPFS, see Chapter 16, "Using the High-Performance File System." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Printing a File You print text files by using a mouse or by using the Print command on the File menu. Most MS OS/2 applications have a print command you can use to print files that were created with the application. You should use that command, rather than printing from File Manager, whenever possible. Before you print from File Manager, you should set up your printer. When you installed MS OS/2, a default printer, PRINTER1, was set up; however, you may need to change printer settings in Print Manager for use with your printer. For more information, see Chapter 4, "Printing Files." To print files by using a mouse, follow these steps: Mouse 1. Open a window on the directory that contains the file you want to print. 2. Select the file you want to print. 3. Using the right mouse button, drag the file onto the Print Manager icon. If Print Manager has been enlarged to a window, drag the file into the Print Manager window. A dialog box appears, listing the print queues and printers set up on your system. 4. Select the print queue or printer you want to send the file to for printing. 5. Choose the OK button. To print files by using the keyboard, follow these steps: Keyboard 1. Open a window on the directory that contains the file you want to print. 2. Select the file you want to print. 3. Select the File menu and choose the Print command. A dialog box appears, listing the print queues and printers set up on your system. 4. Select the print queue or printer you want to send the file to for printing. 5. Choose the OK button. Searching for a File or Directory You can search for a file or directory by using the Search command on the File menu. You can base the search on the filename or directory name; for files, you can base the search on other file information, such as the file size, the date files were changed, or extended-attribute information. Extended attributes are created by applications designed to run in MS OS/2 and can include information such as the subject of the file or key phrases in the file. For more information on viewing and creating extended attributes, see "Viewing and Setting File Attributes," later in this chapter. If files or directories are found matching the pattern or information you specified, the results are displayed in a special File Manager window. You can select items in this window and use File Manager commands just as you would in any directory window. To search for a file or a directory, follow these steps: 1. Select the File menu and choose the Search command. The Search dialog box, as shown in the following example, appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. If you are basing the search on name, type the filename or directory name you want to find in the Search For box. You can use wildcard characters, * and ?, to specify a range of files matching a pattern. 3. The Search on Property box contains the different file and directory properties on which you can base your search. The default setting is Name. To see the list of other properties, click the Down arrow or, if you are using the keyboard, move to the Search on Property box and press ALT+DOWN. 4. If you are basing your search on a property other than name, select the property from the Search on Property box. For details on each of the file properties available, see the information following this procedure list. 5. The Search From Directory box specifies the root directory of the current drive. This is where a search begins, continuing through all the directories on your current drive. You can change this, for example, to specify a particular directory or a different drive. To change this information, type the path for the directory where you want the search to begin. 6. Choose the Search button. 7. If you are basing your search on a property other than filename or directory name, a dialog box appears for the particular property. Complete the dialog box and choose the Search button. You can base your search for files and directories on the following properties: Property Searches for ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Subject Descriptive text about the subject of a file or directory. This information is stored as an extended attribute. You can specify the Subject text to be searched for and whether the search is case-sensitive. Date The date the file or directory was last changed. You can search for files and directories that changed before, on, or after a specific date. Size The size of a file, in bytes, or the number of files in a directory. You can search for files and directories that are larger than or equal to a particular size or that are smaller than or equal to the size. Flags The file flags set for the file or directory. You can search for files and directories with the Archive, Read-only, and Hidden file flags set. Type The file or directory type. This information is stored as an extended attribute. You select a type, such as Plain Text or Command File, from a list of types. Comments Descriptive text stored as an extended attribute. You can specify the Comment text to be searched for and whether the search is case-sensitive. Key Phrases Descriptive text stored as an extended attribute. You can specify the Key Phrases text to be searched for and whether the search is case-sensitive. History Descriptive text stored as an extended attribute. You can specify the History text to be searched for and whether the search is case-sensitive. Some files and directories may not have extended-attribute information associated with them, so searches based on that information will miss those files. After a search is completed, the files and directories that are found appear in a File Manager window called Search Results. For example, if you search your C drive for files matching MEMO*, the Search Results window might contain the following files: (This figure may be found in the printed book). The Search Results window resembles a directory window except that the full path for each file and directory always appears. You cannot use the Name or Icon commands on the View menu to change the way this information is displayed. However, you can select files or directories in the window and use File menu commands to perform tasks such as printing or copying and moving. The Search Results window is also listed in the Window menu, along with the other open windows. (This figure may be found in the printed book). You can also reduce the Search Results window to an icon. (This figure may be found in the printed book). The Search Results window remains open until you close it or reduce it to an icon. The contents of the Search Results window are replaced when you use the Search command again. Starting an Application You can start an MS OS/2 application from File Manager by opening the program file. Program files end with the characters or .BAT. If the application can run in a window, the window appears in front of File Manager when you start it. If the application is a full-screen application, the application screen replaces the Presentation Manager screen. If the application is a DOS application, you can start it from File Manager; however, you can run only one DOS application at a time. If you already have an application running in the DOS session, a message appears, asking you to quit the program. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note If you plan to use an application frequently, you should add it to a Desktop Manager group window rather than starting it from File Manager. For more information on adding applications to group windows, see Chapter 2, "Running Applications with MS OS/2." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── To start an application by using a mouse, do the following: Mouse 1. Open a window on the directory that contains the application file. 2. Double-click the application filename. To start an application by using the keyboard, do the following: Keyboard 1. Open a window on the directory that contains the application file. 2. Select the application filename. 3. Select the File menu and choose the Open command. Or ■ Select the filename in the directory window and press ENTER. You can also start an application from a data file by using a mouse or the Run command on the File menu. When you start an application this way, the application opens the data file. For example, you might start a text-editing application by using the file you want to edit. To start an application from a data file by using a mouse, follow these steps: 1. Open a window on the directory that contains the data file (the window containing the application file must be visible as well). 2. Select the data file and, using the right mouse button, drag the data-file icon onto the application file. You can extend the selection in the directory window to select more than one file. If you select more than one file and drag them onto a program file, File Manager starts a separate program for each data file. To start one application and open several selected files by using a mouse, do the following: 1. In the directory window, select each file you want to open. 2. Press and hold down ALT and, using the right mouse button, drag the multiple-file icon onto the application file. Some applications do not allow multiple files to be opened at once. In this case, only the first file is opened and the others are ignored. To start an application from a data file by using the keyboard, follow these steps: 1. Open a window on the directory that contains the data file. 2. Select the data file you want to run with the application. 3. Select the File menu and choose the Run command. The Run dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 4. Type the program filename in the Program box. If the program is not in the current directory, type the path and filename of the program file. 5. If you selected more than one file in the directory window, select one of the following options: Run a Separate Program for Each File or Run a Single Program for All Files. 6. Choose the Run button. You can use the Minimize On Run command on the Options menu to automatically reduce File Manager to an icon whenever you start an application. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To use the Minimize On Run command, do the following: ■ Select the Options menu and choose the Minimize On Run command. Associating Application Files The Associate command on the File menu allows you to associate an application file with other files. For example, you can associate data files with the application you used to create them. Once you create the association, you can start the application by opening the data file in File Manager. Often, data files created with an application have a particular filename format; for example, files created with a text-editing application might end with the characters .TXT. You also can create associations based on combinations of filenames and wildcard characters, or based on file type; for example, you could associate an application with all files that have the Plain Text file type. You can associate files in two ways: ■ By selecting a specific program file and providing the file type or filename information ■ By selecting a specific data-file name and providing program-file information Follow these steps to use the Associate command: 1. Open a window on the directory that contains the file you want to associate. The file can be either a program file or a data file. 2. Select the file you want to associate. 3. Select the File menu and choose the Associate command. The Add Association dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 4. Type the requested information in the dialog box. For details on completing the Add Association dialog box, see the information following this procedure list. 5. Choose the Add button. The Associate dialog box appears, displaying the file association you created. 6. Choose the OK button. The following list describes each section of the Add Association dialog box: ■ In the Program section, the Filename box contains the name of the program file you selected in the File Manager window. If you selected a data file, this box is empty. You can type the name of the program file you want to associate in the Filename box. You can also specify the path of the program file. If you do not include the path, File Manager searches for the program file in the path specified in your CONFIG.SYS file. ■ In the Parameters box, you type any command arguments─for example, an option or filename. Type these arguments just as you would if you were typing the command at the MS OS/2 command prompt. This information is optional. To display a dialog box asking for command arguments each time you start the program, you can type the message text, enclosed in square brackets ([ ]) in the Parameters box. By default, the data-file name is the last command argument on a command line. If you want the data-file name to be placed at another location in relation to the command arguments you specified in the Parameters section, type %* at the correct location. ■ The File Type box lists the file types that can be associated. If you selected a data file, the data-file type is listed─for example, Plain Text or Data. If you selected a program file, all available file types are listed. You can select a type of file from the File Type box to associate with the program file. ■ The Name Filter box specifies which filenames are associated with the program file. If you selected a data file in the File Manager window, this box contains an asterisk and the filename extension─for example, *.TXT. If you selected a program file, you can type the filename filter, a combination of wildcard and filename characters that match the filenames you want to be associated with the program file. You can associate a filename filter with more than one application. Then, when you open a file with an associated filename filter, a dialog box appears, asking you to select the application you want to start. You can change command-argument information associated with a file. Follow these steps: 1. Open a window on the directory that contains the application file or filename extension you want to change. 2. Select the file for which you want to change the associated file information. 3. Select the File menu and choose the Associate command. The Associate dialog box appears. 4. Choose the Change button. The Change Association dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 5. To change or add command-argument information, edit the contents of the Parameters box. 6. Choose the Change button. The Associate dialog box is displayed again. 7. Choose the OK button. You can remove a file or a filename extension from the list of associated files. Follow these steps: 1. Open a window on the directory that contains the application file or filename extension you want to delete. 2. Select the file you want to delete from the list of associated files. 3. Select the File menu and choose the Associate command. If you choose an application file, a list of files associated with it is displayed. If you choose a file with an associated extension, a list of associated program files is displayed. 4. To delete an association, select the item─either the program file or the filename extension─you want to delete. 5. Choose the Delete button. 6. If you are deleting a program file from the list of associations with a filename extension, a dialog box appears, confirming that you want to delete the association. Choose the Yes button. Changing File Flags File flags are part of the directory information for a file. This infor- mation is used to identify a file to MS OS/2 and controls the kinds of operations you perform on the file. You can see the file flags in a directory window by using the File Details command on the View menu. This displays all file information, including the file flags. (This figure may be found in the printed book). File flags can be turned on and off by using the Change Flags command on the File menu. There are four MS OS/2 file flags: ■ The Read-only flag prevents a file from being changed. When it is turned on, the letter "R" appears in the flag-information column in the directory listing. ■ The Archive flag is turned on by MS OS/2 utilities such as backup and xcopy. When it is turned on, the letter "A" appears in the flag-information column in the directory listing. Other applications such as text-editing programs then turn off this flag to indicate to MS OS/2 that the file has been changed. ■ The Hidden flag prevents a file from appearing in most directory listings. When this flag is turned on, the letter "H" appears in the directory listing. ■ The System flag identifies a file as an MS OS/2 system file. When this flag is turned on, the letter "S" appears in the directory listing. You cannot delete a file when this flag is set. This flag, like the Hidden flag, prevents a file from appearing in directory listings. To turn file flags on or off, do the following: 1. Open a window on the directory that contains the file for which you want to set flags. 2. Select the file. 3. Select the File menu and choose the Change Flags command. The Change Flags dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 4. Turn on or off the file flags you want. 5. Choose the Change button. You can change file flags for more than one file at a time by extending your selection in the directory window. Viewing and Setting File Attributes In MS OS/2, applications can create additional pieces of informa- tion about files in the form of extended attributes. This information is stored separately from the file itself and is used to identify the file to MS OS/2, File Manager, and to other applications. For example, extended attributes could contain the following kinds of information: ■ The file type, such as program file, data file, or command file ■ The icon that appears in File Manager ■ Other information specific to the application Extended attributes are created and supported by applications designed to run in MS OS/2. The information contained in extended attributes may vary from application to application. There are some standard kinds of extended attributes. The Properties command on the File menu is used to view and modify some of the extended attributes, as well as to view other file information such as file flags and size. You also can use the Properties command to create some kinds of extended attributes for files that do not already have them. You can base file searches on the extended-attribute information by using the Search command on the File menu. See "Searching for a File or Directory," earlier in this chapter, for more information. To view the extended attributes, follow these steps: 1. Select the file in the directory window. 2. Select the File menu and choose the Properties command. When the Properties dialog box is first displayed, the bottom half of the dialog box does not appear. To expand the dialog box, choose the More button. (This figure may be found in the printed book). For details about each of the areas in the Properties dialog box, see the information following this procedure list. 3. To add a file type to the list of types, choose the Type button. A dialog box appears, showing the available file types. 4. Select the file type you want to add and choose the Add button. A dialog box appears, showing the types for the file. 5. You can choose to add or delete more file types by using the Add and Delete buttons. 6. When you finish adding or deleting file types, choose the OK button. The Properties dialog box appears again. 7. If you have an icon editor (an application that creates icons), you can customize the icon that is used by the file. Choose the Icon button to specify a new icon file. A dialog box appears. 8. Type the path and filename of the new icon file. 9. Choose the OK button. The Properties dialog box appears again. 10. If you want the Properties dialog box to be expanded each time you use the Properties command, turn on the Unfold check box. 11. When you finish viewing or changing the information in the Properties dialog box, choose the OK button. The following list explains each section of the Properties dialog box: Dialog-box area Contains ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Name Selected filename in File Manager. Path Path for the selected file. Subject Subject of the file. This information is stored in an extended attribute. You can change the subject or create one if none exists. Flags Settings for the Read-only, Archive, and Hidden flags. You can turn these flags on or off. (For more information on file flags, see "Changing File Flags," earlier in this chapter.) Created The date the file was created. This information appears only if you are using the high-performance file system. Last Modification The date the file was last changed. Last Access The date the file was last opened by an application. This information appears only if you are using the high-performance file system. Default Type The file type─for example, Data or Program. A file can be associated with more than one type. The default file type appears in this section. You can change the default type using the Type button. Dialog-box area Contains ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Size The file size, in bytes, or the number of files in a directory. Comments Any comments that are associated with the file. Comments are stored in an extended attribute. You can edit existing comments in the Comments box or create new comments for a file. An application can also create comments that include graphics information. Key Phrases Any key phrases associated with the file. Some applications may use key phrases to search for files. Key phrases are stored in an extended attribute. You can edit existing key phrases in the Key Phrases box or create new key phrases for the file. History Information on changes made to the file. This information is stored in an extended attribute. This information, if it exists, can only be viewed, not edited. Turning Off a Confirmation Message The Confirmation command on the Options menu is used to turn confirmation messages on and off. These messages usually appear in File Manager and ask you to confirm that you want to carry out a particular action, such as deleting a file. The settings you make with the Confirmation command can be saved when you quit File Manager if you turn on the Save Settings check box. Dialog boxes in File Manager often have check boxes that let you turn on or off the message for an individual command; the settings you make with the Confirmation command become the default settings. The following list explains each message you can set using the Confirmation command: Message Confirms ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Confirm on Delete Deleting files using the Delete command Confirm on Subtree Delete Deleting directories using the Delete command Message Confirms ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Confirm on Replace Overwriting existing files or directories using the Move, Rename, or Copy commands Confirm on Subtree Direct Moving and copying directories and files Manipulation using a mouse Confirm New Name of All Moving and copying directories and files Transferred Files from the high-performance file system (HPFS) to new short names in the file allocation table (FAT) file system Confirm Restored Name of All Moving and copying directories and files Transferred Files from the FAT file system to original long names in HPFS. To turn warning messages on and off, follow these steps: 1. Select the Options menu and choose the Confirmation command. The Confirmations dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. Select the messages you want to turn on or off. 3. Choose the Set button. Closing a Directory Window You can close any window in File Manager except the Directory Tree window. You can close a directory window by using the Close command on the System menu or by using a mouse. To close a directory window, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Double-click the System-menu box 1 Press CTRL+ - (hyphen key) to select in the directory window. the System menu in the directory window. 2 Press C to choose the Close command. You can close all directory windows at once by using the Close All Directories command on the Window menu. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To close all directories, do the following: ■ Select the Window menu and choose the Close All Directories command. Quitting File Manager You can quit File Manager by using the Exit command on the File menu. File Manager asks if you want to save your settings. If you choose to save settings, settings created with the following commands are saved: ■ Settings made using commands on the View menu ■ Confirmation-command settings (Options menu) ■ Settings made using the Minimize On Run command (Options menu) To quit File Manager, do the following: 1. Select the File menu and choose the Exit command. The Exit File Manager dialog box appears. 2. To save your settings, turn on the Save Settings check box. 3. Choose the Yes button. Chapter 4 Printing Files ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Introduction This chapter explains how to set up printers and print files on your system. Printer Installer, a Presentation Manager application, lets you quickly set up a printer with your computer. For more complicated printer setups (for example, if you want print jobs to be shared between several printers), you can use Print Manager. However, Printer Installer is the recommended application to use for installing printers. Both methods for setting up printers are described in this chapter. After you have set up your printer, you can also use Print Manager to control the way files print after you send them to the printer. Print Manager is the Presentation Manager application that organizes and controls printing for MS OS/2. Print Manager starts each time you start your system; it appears as an icon at the bottom of your screen. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note All examples of filenames and directory names in this chapter use the file allocation table (FAT) file system, which is the file system used by DOS and MS OS/2 versions 1.1 and earlier. For information on using high-performance file system (HPFS) filenames and directory names, see Chapter 16, "Using the High-Performance File System." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Setting Up a Printer by Using Printer Installer Printer Installer, a Presentation Manager application, lets you quickly set up a printer on your system. Before you set up a printer by using Printer Installer, you need to know the following information about your printer: ■ The name and model of your printer. ■ That the necessary physical connections have been made to use your printer. See your printer manual for more information on installing your printer. ■ Which port your printer is connected to. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note If you are adding a serial printer that is connected to a communications port (COM1, COM2, or COM3), you must first use the Communications Port command in Control Panel to create communications-port settings. The COM ports are not listed as ports in the Printer Installer dialog box until you create a setting for them by using Control Panel. For information on using the Communications Port command, see Chapter 5, "Changing System Settings with Control Panel." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── To set up a printer by using Printer Installer, follow these steps: 1. Switch to Desktop Manager and choose the Utilities Group. 2. Choose Printer Installer. A message appears while any installed printer drivers are being located on your disk drive. After the search is completed, the Printer Installer dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. The Model list box contains the names and models of printers currently available for installation on your computer. If your printer model appears in the list box, select your printer. 4. If your printer does not appear in the list box, choose the New command button. A dialog box appears, asking you to insert in drive A the disk that contains the printer-driver files. Insert your printer-driver disk in drive A or type the path of the directory containing the printer-driver files and choose the OK button. A dialog box appears, listing the printer models and their corresponding printer-driver files. Select the appropriate printer model and choose OK to return to the Printer Installer dialog box. 5. In the Connect To list box, select the port your printer is connected to. 6. The Default check box is turned on, indicating that the printer will be the default printer for your computer. If you want to change the setting, turn off the check box. 7. Choose the OK button. 8. Depending upon which printer you selected, an additional dialog box may appear, asking you to confirm or change the settings for your printer. Change any settings, if necessary, and choose the OK button. If, after you set up a printer, you need to change the printer settings or delete the printer, use Print Manager. If you make a mistake when you set up your printer by using Printer Installer (for example, if you select the wrong printer model or port), you can delete the printer by using Print Manager and then re-install it by using Printer Installer. Printer Installer makes all the necessary print and print queue settings. If you use Print Manager to re-install your printer, you will need to create these settings by using several commands from Print Manager and Control Panel. For more information, see "Setting Up a Printer by Using Print Manager" later in this chapter. Printing a File If you have a printer connected to your computer, you can print text files from Presentation Manager, from the MS OS/2 command interpreter (cmd), from the DOS session, or by using your application's print command. To print a text file from Presentation Manager by using a mouse, follow these steps: Mouse 1. Switch to the Main-group window and start File Manager. 2. In File Manager, click the directory that contains the file you want to print. 3. In the directory window, select the file you want to print. 4. Using the right mouse button, drag the file icon into the Print Manager window or onto the Print Manager icon. A dialog box appears, showing the printers and print queues set up on your system. 5. Select the print queue or printer you want. 6. Choose the OK button. To print a text file from Presentation Manager by using the keyboard, follow these steps: Keyboard 1. Switch to the Main-group window and start File Manager. 2. In File Manager, open a directory window that contains the file you want to print. 3. In the directory window, select the file you want to print. 4. Select the File menu and choose the Print command. (This figure may be found in the printed book). A dialog box appears, showing the printers and print queues set up on your system. 5. Select the print queue or printer you want. 6. Choose the OK button. You use the print utility to print files from the MS OS/2 command interpreter, cmd, or from the DOS session by doing the following: 1. Switch to the Main-group window and start OS/2 Window. To print from the DOS session, use the Task List to switch to the DOS session. 2. At the prompt, type print, the path (if necessary), and the filename of the file you want to print. For example, to print the file PROPOSAL.TXT in the PROJECT directory on drive C, type the following: print c:\eproject\eproposal.txt 3. Press ENTER. The file is sent to the default print queue on your system. For more information on the print utility, see Chapter 9, "Using MS OS/2 Utilities," and the print entry in the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. To print from your application, see your application manual for information on its print command. Setting Up a Printer by Using Print Manager You can use Print Manager to change how printers are set up, to add and remove printers, and to change print-queue settings. With Print Manager, you can set up several printers and print queues on your system. Then, when you are printing multiple files, you can use Print Manager to prioritize and distribute print jobs so that they are processed as quickly as possible. Print Manager commands also let you control the kinds of jobs printed on a particular printer. Setting up a printer by using Print Manager involves several steps. You should be familiar with all the steps before you use this method to set up a printer. Printer Installer provides a more streamlined approach to setting up a printer and is recommended for most users, particularly if you do not plan to have multiple printers set up for a print queue. You can also use Printer Installer to initially set up a printer and print queue and then use Print Manager to install additional printers that will use the queue. Before you use the printer commands in Print Manager, you should be familiar with the following terms: ■ The printer name is a name you assign to your printer. When you set up MS OS/2, the printer name PRINTER1 (the default setting) was created, even if you do not have an actual printer on your system. You can use Print Manager to change the settings for PRINTER1 or to create new printers. ■ The default printer is the printer your files are printed on unless your application specifies a different printer. The default printer is PRINTER1 when you first set up MS OS/2 on your system. You can change the default printer by using Print Manager. ■ The port is a slot in your computer where you connect your printer. There are three printer ports (LPT1, LPT2, and LPT3) and three communications ports (COM1, COM2, and COM3). You connect parallel printers to printer ports and serial printers to communications ports. You connect a printer to a particular port by plugging it in or, if you are sharing a printer over a network, by assigning it to a port by using a network command. In order to use communications ports with your system, you need to set up the communications-port device drivers on your system. You can set up these device drivers by selecting the Add Serial Device Support option while running the MS OS/2 installation program or by editing your CONFIG.SYS file to add this support after installation. For more information on adding a communications-port line to your CONFIG.SYS file, see Chapter 17, "Using MS OS/2 Device Drivers." ■ A printer driver, sometimes called a "device driver," is a program that controls printing and lets you set options such as paper size, the printer model, and the amount of printer memory for your printer. Some printer drivers are included with your MS OS/2 installation disks. You use Control Panel to install printer drivers on your system. Using Print Manager, you associate printer drivers with a particular printer by specifying the name of the printer. You can also use Print Manager to change printer-driver settings for a printer. ■ A print queue is a list of files or print jobs waiting to be printed. Print Manager maintains print queues. Printers must be connected to a print queue for printing to take place. When you print files from Presentation Manager, the files are first sent to the print queue and then sent to the printer that uses the queue. You make this connection by using Print Manager. More than one printer can be connected to a queue; Print Manager prioritizes and organizes printing so that print jobs in a queue are sent to the first available printer. A printer can be shared by more than one queue. By default setting, each queue uses one printer driver. (An application can also specify a different printer driver.) You can change print-queue settings or create a new queue by using Print Manager commands. Setting up a printer and a print queue involves several steps. The following is an overview of the process and the commands you use to set up a printer: ■ Install the appropriate printer driver by using the Add Printer Driver command in Control Panel. Check your printer manual for the correct printer driver to use. For more information, see the next section, "Adding and Deleting a Printer Driver." ■ Add the printer and set the printer options by using the Printers command in Print Manager. For more information, see "Adding a Printer" later in this chapter. ■ Add the print queue and set the options for the print jobs by using the Queues command in Print Manager. For more information, see "Setting Up a Print Queue" later in this chapter. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note Some applications, such as full-screen OS/2 applications, are not designed to use the print-spooling capabilities of Print Manager. These applications may print directly to printer ports rather than to print queues. See your application manual for information on setting up printing from these applications. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Adding and Deleting a Printer Driver Printer drivers, sometimes called device drivers, are programs that control how your printer prints. Some printer drivers are included with your MS OS/2 installation disks; others may be supplied by the printer manufacturer. Printer-driver files have a .DRV filename extension; the files often support more than one printer model. Check your printer manual for information on which printer driver to use with your printer. Printer Installer also lets you set up new printer drivers on your system as part of the printer installation process. For more information, see "Setting Up a Printer by Using Printer Installer" earlier in this chapter. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note One printer-driver file, IBMNULL.DRV, sends the printer only data and printer control characters created by an application. If there is no printer driver available for your printer, you can use this printer driver to print from an application. Check the application manual to see whether the application uses this printer driver to support your printer. Your application must provide all printer support if you are using the IBMNULL driver; MS OS/2 print functions are not supported for this printer driver. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── In addition, you should create a separate print queue for printing from your application. This print queue should not be the default print queue for your computer. For information on setting up print queues, see "Adding a Print Queue" later in this chapter. You can use the Add Printer Driver command in Control Panel to install printer drivers for use by Print Manager. To add a printer driver, follow these steps: 1. Switch to Desktop Manager and choose the Utilities group. 2. Choose Control Panel. 3. Select the Installation menu and choose the Add Printer Driver command. The Add Printer Driver dialog box appears, asking you to insert in drive A the disk that contains the printer-driver files. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 4. Insert your printer-driver disk or type the path for the printer-driver files. If printer-driver files are already copied to your hard disk, they are located in the \eOS2\eDLL directory. 5. Choose the Add button. The Add Printer Driver dialog box appears, displaying the printer-driver files. 6. Select the printer driver you want in the Printer Drivers box. You can select more than one printer driver. Click each printer driver you want; if you are using the keyboard, press the DIRECTION keys to move to each printer driver and press the SPACEBAR to select it. 7. Choose the Add button. To delete a printer driver by using the Delete Printer Driver command in Control Panel, follow these steps: 1. In Control Panel, select the Installation menu and choose the Delete Printer Driver command. The Delete Printer Driver dialog box appears, displaying the printer drivers installed on your system. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. In the Printer Drivers box, select the printer driver you want to delete. 3. Choose the Delete button. A dialog box appears, asking you to confirm deleting the printer driver. 4. To delete the printer driver, choose the Yes button. The Delete Printer Driver dialog box appears, displaying the path where the printer-driver file is located. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 5. Choose the Yes button. Adding a Printer You can add a printer to your system by using Print Manager. Before you start this procedure, you should know the following information about your printer: ■ That the necessary physical connections have been made to use your printer. See your printer manual for more information on installing your printer. ■ Which port your printer is connected to. ■ Which printer driver you want to use and that it has been installed by using Control Panel. You can also add a printer to your system by using Printer Installer. For more information, see "Setting Up a Printer by Using Printer Installer" earlier in this chapter. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note If you are adding a serial printer that is connected to a communications port (COM1, COM2, or COM3), you must first use the Communications Port command in Control Panel to create communications-port settings. The COM ports are not listed as ports in Printer Manager until you create a setting for them by using Control Panel. For information on using the Communications Port command, see Chapter 5, "Changing System Settings with Control Panel." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If you want to print to a serial printer from a full-screen OS/2 application, you may need to use the spool command to redirect printer output from a printer port (for example, LPT1) to a communications port. For more information on using this command, see the spool entry in the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. To add a printer, follow these steps: 1. In Print Manager, select the Setup menu and choose the Printers command. The Printers dialog box appears, displaying the printers that are set up on your system. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. To add a new printer, choose the Add button. The Add Printer dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. In the Name box, type the new printer name. 4. In the Description box, type a description of the printer (for example, the type of printer and its location). 5. In the Device section, select the port the printer is connected to. To see a list of available ports by using a mouse, click the Down arrow; to see the list by using the keyboard, press ALT+DOWN. 6. In the Printer Drivers section, select the printer driver to be used with the printer. You can select more than one printer driver; the last printer driver selected is listed as the default driver in the dialog box. Check your printer manual for the appropriate driver. (If you need to add a new printer-driver file, see "Adding and Deleting a Printer Driver" earlier in this chapter.) 7. To create printer settings, choose the Printer Properties button. A dialog box appears, displaying the options specific to the printer driver you selected. The options may include the printer model, number of paper bins, the types of forms (for example, Legal), or how much memory the printer has. You may also be able to create new settings if you are using nonstandard paper sizes in your printing. The Printer Properties dialog box may also allow you to set the properties of a particular print job (for example, to specify landscape instead of portrait paper orientation). Set the options you want and choose the OK button to return to the Add Printer dialog box. 8. Choose the Add button. The Printers dialog box appears again. 9. Choose the OK button. After you set up a printer, you must create a print queue for it or specify an existing print queue. For more information, see "Adding a Print Queue" later in this chapter. Deleting a Printer You can delete a printer by using Print Manager. The print-queue name remains in the Print Manager window until you delete the print queue. For more information on deleting print queues, see "Deleting a Print Queue" later in this chapter. To delete a printer, do the following: 1. Select the Setup menu and choose the Printers command. The Printers dialog box appears, listing your printers. 2. Select the name of the printer you want to remove. 3. Choose the Delete button. A dialog box appears, asking you to confirm deleting the printer. 4. To remove the printer, choose the Yes button. The Printers dialog box appears again. 5. Choose the OK button. .ET Changing Printer Settings You can change any of the information or settings associated with a printer by using the Printers command in Print Manager. To change printer settings, follow these steps: 1. Select the Setup menu and choose the Printers command. The Printers dialog box appears, listing the names of the printers on your system and their descriptions. 2. Select the printer you want. 3. Choose the Change button. The Change Printer dialog box appears. .RT (This figure may be found in the printed book). For a complete description of this dialog box, see the information following this procedure list. 4. Change any of the settings you want to change. 5. To change printer-driver settings for a printer, select the printer driver in the Printer Driver box and choose the Printer Properties button. A dialog box appears, displaying the options for a particular printer driver. These options vary, depending on the printer driver you selected. The options can include the printer model, paper bins, and the paper size in each bin. You may be able to set properties for print jobs (for example, selecting the paper orientation or the print quality) by using the Printer Properties dialog box. Set the options you want and choose the OK button to return to the Change Printer dialog box. 6. Choose the Change button. The Printers dialog box appears again. 7. Choose the OK button. The Change Printer dialog box contains the following sections: ■ The Name box contains the printer name. You cannot edit the information in this box. ■ The Description box contains a description you assign to your printer─for example, the type of printer and its location. ■ The Device section contains the printer port for a particular printer. To see the available ports on your system by using a mouse, click the Down arrow; to see the ports by using the keyboard, press ALT+DOWN. ■ The Printer Drivers section contains the printer drivers set up on your system. You can select more than one printer driver; the last printer driver you select becomes the default printer driver. Check your printer manual for the appropriate printer drivers to use with the printer. To add a new printer-driver file, see "Adding and Deleting a Printer Driver" earlier in this chapter. If you are connecting a serial printer to one of the communications ports (COM1, COM2, or COM3), you must set the options for the port, such as baud rate and parity (see your printer manual for information on the correct settings to use). You can do this using the Communications Port command in Control Panel. For information on changing communications-port settings, see Chapter 5, "Changing System Settings with Control Panel." Setting Up a Print Queue You can set up new print queues and make adjustments to existing queues by using the commands on the Setup menu in Print Manager. Printers you set up must be connected to a print queue. If you set up a printer by using Printer Installer, the print queue is created automatically and named according to your printer model. For more information, see "Adding a Printer by Using Printer Installer" earlier in this chapter. Adding a Print Queue To add a print queue, you use the Queues command on the Setup menu in Print Manager. Before you set up a print queue, you should become familiar with the following information: ■ Which printers the queue will use. You should set up the printers to be used with the queue before you set up the queue. ■ Which printer driver will be used with the print queue. A print queue can be shared by more than one printer, but the printers and the print queue must have a printer driver in common. You may want to organize print queues by the kind of print jobs you will be printing. For example, draft-quality documents that are printed by using landscape mode are sent to one queue, and letter-quality documents that are printed in portrait mode are sent to another. Both queues can send print jobs to the same printers, but the print-job settings determine the kind of printing to be done. ■ Which queue driver will be used with a particular queue. A queue driver is the program that prepares a file for printing. Queue drivers are installed on your system when you install MS OS/2. You use one queue driver for printers and another for other printing devices, such as plotters. To add a print queue, follow these steps: 1. In Print Manager, select the Setup menu and choose the Queues command. The Queues dialog box appears, displaying the existing queue names and descriptions. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. Choose the Add button. The Add Queue dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. To add a new queue, type the new queue name in the Name box. 4. Move to the Description box and type a description of the queue; for example, you may want to describe the type of print jobs that will be printed on the queue, such as "Draft-Quality Printing." 5. Move to the Queue Driver box. If you are using a mouse to view a list of the queue drivers set up on your system, click the Down arrow; to view the list by using the keyboard, press ALT+DOWN. Select the queue driver you want. 6. Move to the Separator box. Type the name of the separator-page file, if any. The separator-page file contains instructions for printing a separating page between each print job. This box can be empty. 7. Move to the Priority box. Type the priority of the print queue. This is represented by a number from 1 through 9; the default priority is 5. If more than one queue needs to print on the same printers, the queue priority determines which queue can access the printers first. 8. Move to the Scheduling section. This section controls the hours the print jobs will be printed. The default is to print jobs on a 24-hour basis; the From and To boxes are empty. If you want to limit the hours that print jobs will be printed, type the times in the From and To boxes. The time format depends on the country settings for your computer (for example, if you are using the US country settings, type the time as 12:00A). 9. Move to the box showing the available printers. Select the printer you want to use this queue. You can select more than one printer, but the printers must use the same printer driver as the print queue. To select a printer, click the printer name; if you are using the keyboard, press the DIRECTION keys to move the selection cursor and press the SPACEBAR to select a printer. 10. Move to the Printer Driver box. To see a list of the printer drivers available, click the Down arrow; to see the list by using the keyboard, press ALT+DOWN. Select the printer driver you want. If you selected more than one printer, only the printer drivers that can be used with the printers you selected appear in the list box. 11. To set the default print-job properties for the queue, choose the Job Properties button. A dialog box appears, displaying the print-job options for the selected printer driver─for example, the paper size and orientation. 12. Change any settings you want to change and choose the OK button. The Add Queue dialog box reappears. 13. Choose the Setup button to change the default queue-driver settings. A dialog box appears, displaying the options (for example, error-message options) for the queue driver you selected. Some queue drivers do not have settings that can be changed. 14. Change any of the default settings and choose the Select button. The Add Queue dialog box appears again. 15. Choose the Add button. The Queues dialog box appears again. 16. Choose the OK button. Deleting a Print Queue You can delete a print queue by using the Queues command in Print Manager. Before you delete a print queue, check to make sure that all of your printer selections for the queue have been removed. For information on how to cancel printer selections, see the next section, "Changing Print-Queue Options." To delete a print queue, do the following: 1. Select the Setup menu and choose the Queues command. A dialog box appears, showing the queues set up on your system. 2. To delete a queue name, select the queue name and choose the Delete button. A dialog box appears, warning you that the queue will be deleted. 3. Choose the Yes button to delete the queue. 4. Choose the OK button. Changing Print-Queue Options You can change print-queue options, such as which printers a particular queue will use, by using the Queues command in Print Manager. To change print-queue options, do the following: 1. Select the Setup menu and choose the Queues command. The Queues dialog box appears, displaying the print-queue names and descriptions. 2. Select the print queue. 3. Choose the Change button. The Change Queue dialog box appears, displaying information about the selected queue. (This figure may be found in the printed book). For a complete description of each section in this dialog box, see the information following this procedure list. 4. To change print-job options for a particular printer driver, choose the Job Properties button. A dialog box appears, displaying available options for the selected printer driver. 5. Change the options you want to change and choose the OK button. The Change Queue dialog box appears again. 6. To change the options for the queue driver, choose the Setup button. A dialog box appears, displaying the available options for the selected queue driver. Some queue drivers do not have options that can be changed. 7. Change the options you want to change and choose the Select button. The Change Queue dialog box appears again. 8. Choose the Change button. The Queues dialog box appears again. 9. Choose the OK button. The Change Queue dialog box has the following sections: ■ The Name box contains the selected print-queue name. You cannot edit the information in this box. ■ The Description box contains a short description of the print queue (you create this description). ■ The Queue Driver box contains the queue drivers installed on your system. To see all queue drivers available on your system, click the Down arrow; to see the list by using the keyboard, press ALT+DOWN. You can select only one queue driver from the list. Queue drivers are copied to your system when you install MS OS/2. You can add and delete queue drivers by using Control Panel (for more information, see "Adding and Deleting a Queue Driver" later in this chapter). ■ The Separator box contains the name of the separator-page file, if any. The separator-page file contains instructions for printing a separating page between each print job. This box can be empty. ■ The Priority box contains the priority of the print queue. This is represented by a number from 1 through 9; the default priority is 5. If more than one queue needs to print on the same printers, the queue priority determines which queue can access the printers first. ■ The Scheduling section controls the hours that print jobs are printed. The default is to print jobs on a 24-hour basis; the From and To boxes are empty. If you want to limit the hours print jobs will be accepted, type the times in the From and To boxes. The time format depends on the country settings for your computer (for example, if you are using the US country settings, type the time as 12:00A). ■ The list of printers and their descriptions shows the printers that are set up on your system. You can select which printer the queue will send print jobs to. You can also select more than one printer. To cancel a printer selection, click the printer selection; to cancel a printer selection by using the keyboard, press the DIRECTION keys to move to the selected item and press the SPACEBAR. ■ The Printer Driver box shows the printer driver that is set up for the printers associated with the queue. You can change printer drivers. To see a list of available printer drivers, click the Down arrow; to see the list by using the keyboard, press ALT+DOWN. Only printer drivers that can be used with all the selected printers appear in the box. Adding and Deleting a Queue Driver When you install MS OS/2, a program called a queue driver is copied to your hard disk for use by Print Manager. Queue drivers control the way files are sent to your printer or other devices. If you need to add or change a queue driver, you can use the Add Queue Driver command in Control Panel. To add a queue driver, follow these steps: 1. In Control Panel, select the Installation menu and choose the Add Queue Driver command. The Add Queue Driver dialog box appears, requesting you to insert in drive A the disk that contains the queue-driver file. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. Insert the disk or type the path for the queue-driver file and choose the Add button. The Add Queue Driver dialog box appears, showing you the queue drivers available on your system or on disk. 3. Select the queue driver you want to add and choose the Add button. A dialog box appears, asking you to confirm the directory to which the queue-driver file will be copied. 4. Choose the Yes button. You can change the directory that contains your queue-driver files, but you may need to edit your CONFIG.SYS file so that Print Manager can find the files. For information on changing your CONFIG.SYS file, see Chapter 15, "Using MS OS/2 Configuration Commands." You can delete queue-driver files by using the Delete Queue Driver command in Control Panel. To delete a queue driver, follow these steps: 1. In Control Panel, select the Installation menu and choose the Delete Queue Driver command. The Delete Queue Driver dialog box appears, displaying the queue drivers installed on your system. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. Select the queue driver you want to delete. A dialog box appears, asking you to confirm that you want to delete the queue driver. 3. Choose the Yes button to delete the queue driver. A dialog box containing the path of the queue-driver file appears, asking you to confirm that you want to delete the file. 4. Choose the Yes button. Changing the Default Print Queue and Printer When you install MS OS/2, a default print queue, LPT1Q, is set up on your system. It is the default print queue for your Presentation Manager applications. Some applications, such as File Manager, display a dialog box when you use the Print command that allows you to choose the print queue or printer you want to send the file to. Many applications send print jobs to the default print queue, however, which you specify by using the Application Defaults command on the Setup menu in Print Manager. If you set up more than one print queue or printer, you may want to change the default settings for your system. Some applications, such as Presentation Manager applications designed for MS OS/2 version 1.1, may send files to the default printer. If you have more than one printer, you can change a default printer by using the Application Defaults command. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note The Application Defaults command establishes the default print queue and printer for Presentation Manager applications only. Applications that do not use Print Manager, such as full-screen OS/2 applications, are not affected by these settings. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── To change the default print queue or printer, follow these steps: 1. In Print Manager, select the Setup menu and choose the Application Defaults command. The Application Defaults dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. Move to the list of print queues available on your system and select the new default print queue. 3. Move to the list of printers and select the new default direct printer. 4. Choose the Set button. Controlling a Print Job by Using Print Manager Print Manager helps you control printing. Before you use Print Manager, you should be familiar with the following terms: ■ A print queue is a list of files waiting to be printed. From the print queue, files are sent to the first available printer. A print queue can send files to more than one printer. ■ A print job is a file that has been sent for printing. ■ Spooling is the process of sending print jobs to printers and managing print queues. Spooling is one of the tasks that Print Manager performs. ■ A job identifier is a number that identifies a particular print job. With Print Manager, you can see status information on an entire print queue or on an individual print job. To check on the status of a print job, do the following: ■ Switch to Print Manager. (This figure may be found in the printed book). In the Print Manager work area, you see each print queue listed with the number of print jobs (files) in the queue. Each print job is identified by its job identifier, document name, and the date and time it was sent to the print queue. For some print jobs, the name of the application you are printing from also appears. Before you can use the commands on the Queue or Job menus, you must select a print job or queue. You can select more than one item at a time. To select a print queue or print job by using the mouse, do the following: Mouse ■ Click the item or items you want to select. To select a print queue or print job by using the keyboard, do the following: Keyboard 1. Press the DIRECTION keys to move the cursor to each item. 2. Press the SPACEBAR to select the item. To cancel your selection by using the mouse, click the item again. If you are using the keyboard, press the SPACEBAR again to cancel a selection. If you select a print job, you can use the commands on the Queue and Job menus; if you select a print queue, you can only use the commands on the Queue menu. Controlling Print Queues You can stop, restart, or cancel printing by controlling the print queue; for example, you may need to stop printing to change paper or fix a problem with your printer. You use the commands on the Queue menu to control print queues. You can stop all printing from a queue by using the Hold Queue command on the Queue menu. If a file is printing when you choose this command, it finishes printing. To use the Hold Queue command, follow these steps: 1. Select the print queue in the Print Manager work area. 2. Select the Queue menu and choose the Hold Queue command. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To resume printing, do the following: 1. Select the print queue in the Print Manager work area. 2. Select the Queue menu and choose the Release Queue command. Controlling Print Jobs You can control print jobs─files that you are printing on a printer─by using Print Manager commands. Looking at Print-Job Information You can find out information on a particular print job by using the Job Details command on the Job menu. You can also use this command to change the number of copies you are printing. To see print-job information, do the following: 1. In the Print Manager work area, select the print jobs you want. 2. Select the Job menu and choose the Job Details command. The Job Details dialog box appears (for details on each area of the dialog box, see the information following this procedure list). A separate Job Details dialog box appears for each print job you selected. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. When you finish looking at the print-job information, choose the Cancel button. The following list explains each area of the Job Details dialog box. Dialog-box area Contains ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Comment String The name of the application you used to send the print job to a printer. This section may be blank. If you print a file from the MS OS/2 command interpreter (cmd) or from the DOS session, "System" appears in this section. You can type a comment in the text box. Document Name The name of the file you are printing. Job Identifier The identification number of your print job in the queue. Date/Time The date and time you sent your file to the print queue. Size The size of the print job in bytes. User If you are connected to a network that uses the appropriate network software, your network name appears. Notify The network name of the person to be notified when the print job is completed. You can use this feature only if you are connected to a network that uses the appropriate network software. Job Priority The priority of your print job. This is represented by a number from 1 through 99; the default priority is 50 (the higher the number, the higher the priority). You can change this number to increase or decrease the priority of a print job. Copies The number of copies you are printing. You can change this number. The default is one. Form The print-job paper size. Queue Name The name of the print queue. Queue Description A description of the print queue. You can provide this information when you set up the print queue. Queue Options Additional options supplied by the application for the print queue. Queue Processor The name of the queue driver. Printer Name The name of the printer on which the job is printing. Printer Description A description of your printer. You can provide this information when you set up the printer. Device The name of the device driver (the program that controls your printer). The name of the printer port appears in this area when your job is printing. Status The current status of the print job (for example, if the print job is printing, "Printing" appears). Canceling a Print Job You can stop a file from printing by canceling the print job. When you cancel a print job, it is removed from the print queue. To cancel a print job, use the Cancel Job command on the Job menu. Follow these steps: 1. In the Print Manager work area, select the print job you want to cancel. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. Select the Job menu and choose the Cancel Job command. A dialog box appears, asking you to confirm the cancellation. 3. Choose the Yes button. You can cancel all print jobs in a print queue by doing the following: 1. In the Print Manager work area, select the queue name. 2. Select the Queue menu and choose the Cancel All Jobs command. A dialog box appears, asking you to confirm that you want all jobs removed from the queue. 3. Choose the Yes button. .ET Moving a Print Job in the Print Queue You can prioritize a particular print job so that it prints ahead of other jobs in the queue by using the Print Job Next command on the Job menu. The file prints when a printer becomes available. If you prioritize a print job that has been held, it becomes the first job in the queue but it is still held until you release it. For more information on holding and releasing a print job, see "Holding a Print Job" later in this chapter. .RT To move a print job to the top of the queue, follow these steps: 1. In the Print Manager work area, select the print job. 2. Select the Job menu and choose the Print Job Next command. The priority of the print job is set to 99─the highest priority. You also can change the priority of a print job by using the Job Details command on the Job menu. The priority of a print job is represented by a number from 1 through 99; the default is 50 (the higher the number, the sooner the job is printed). To change the priority of a print ob, do the following: 1. In the Print Manager work area, select the print job. 2. Select the Job menu and choose the Job Details command. The Job Details dialog box appears, displaying information on the job. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. Move to the Job Priority box and select the current priority; type a new priority─a number from 1 through 99. 4. Choose the Set button. Files are printed in the order of their priority. If print jobs share the same priority, they are printed in the order they appear in the Print Manager work area. Restarting a Print Job You may want to stop and completely restart a print job that is currently printing─for example, when you have problems with your printer. When you use the Start Job Again command on the Job menu, Print Manager stops the print job and restarts it from the beginning. To restart a print job, follow these steps: 1. In the Print Manager work area, select the print job you want to start over. The status information for the print job must be "Printing." 2. Select the Job menu and choose the Start Job Again command. Holding a Print Job You can temporarily prevent a print job from printing by using the Hold Job command on the Job menu. The print job is held until you release it by using the Release Job command. To use the Hold Job command, do the following: 1. In the Print Manager work area, select the print job you want held. 2. Select the Job menu and choose the Hold Job command. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To release a print job, follow these steps: 1. In the Print Manager work area, select the print job you want released. 2. Select the Job menu and choose the Release Job command. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Updating Print Manager Information Information in the Print Manager work area is always changing as print jobs finish and new print jobs are submitted. The Refresh Now command can be used to keep this information current. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To update the information in the Print Manager work area, do the following: ■ Select the Refresh menu and choose the Refresh Now command. Changing the Spooler Path As part of the process of organizing and prioritizing print jobs, Print Manager creates temporary files waiting to be printed. You can change the directory where these temporary files are stored by using the Spooler Path command on the Setup menu. By default setting, the files are stored in the SPOOL directory. To change the directory where Print Manager files are stored, follow these steps: 1. In Print Manager, select the Setup menu and choose the Spooler Path command. The Spooler Path dialog box appears, listing the path where spooler files are stored. 2. To change the directory where Print Manager files are stored, type a new path in the Spooler Path box. 3. Choose the Set button. Chapter 5 Changing System Settings with Control Panel ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Introduction You can adjust system settings, such as the date and time or screen colors in Presentation Manager windows, by using Control Panel. Some settings, such as the time or date, can be adjusted directly in the main Control Panel window. Other settings, such as screen colors or baud rates for a modem or serial printer, are set using Control Panel menus and commands. You can also use Control Panel to install printing software such as printer drivers and print-queue drivers. For more information, see Chapter 4, "Printing Files." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note All examples of filenames and directory names in this chapter use the file allocation table (FAT) file system, which is the file system used by DOS and MS OS/2 versions 1.1 and earlier. For information on using high-performance file system (HPFS) filenames and directory names, see Chapter 16, "Using the High-Performance File System." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Starting Control Panel To start Control Panel, do the following: 1. Switch to Desktop Manager. 2. Choose the Utilities group. 3. Choose Control Panel. When you start Control Panel, it creates a window that contains the following sections: ■ Time ■ Date ■ Cursor Blink ■ Double-Click The following example shows the Control Panel window. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Changing the Time You can use Control Panel to change the system time. The time you set is reflected in any applications that use the system time. You change the time by directly adjusting settings in the Time section in the Control Panel work area. Follow these steps to change the time by using a mouse: Mouse 1. Click the hours, minutes, or seconds you want to change. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. Click the Up arrow to increase the number; click the Down arrow to decrease the number. You can also type a new number. To change the time by using the keyboard, do the following: Keyboard 1. Press TAB to move to the Time section. 2. Press the RIGHT or LEFT key to select the part of the time (hours, minutes, or seconds) that you want to change. 3. Press the UP key to increase the number; press the DOWN key to decrease the number. You can also type a new number. The system time changes when you move to another section or when you quit Control Panel. Changing the Date Some applications record the date when files are created or edited. You change the system date the same way you change the system time. If you are using a mouse, follow these steps to change the date: Mouse 1. Click the month, day, or year you want to change. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. Click the Up arrow to increase the number; click the Down arrow to decrease the number. If you are using the keyboard, follow these steps to change the date: Keyboard 1. Press TAB to move to the Date section. 2. Press the RIGHT or LEFT key to select the part of the date (month, day, or year) that you want to change. 3. Press the UP key to increase the number; press the DOWN key to decrease the number. You can also type a new number. Changing the Cursor-Blink Rate Some applications have a cursor or insertion point that blinks. The blink rate is the frequency at which the cursor flashes. The vertical cursor in the Cursor-Blink section reflects the current setting. To change the cursor-blink rate by using a mouse, do the following: Mouse ■ Click the Right arrow to increase the rate; click the Left arrow to decrease the rate. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Or ■ Drag the scroll box to change the cursor-blink rate. Follow these steps to change the cursor-blink rate by using the keyboard: Keyboard 1. Press TAB to move to the Cursor-Blink section. 2. Press the RIGHT key to increase the rate; press the LEFT key to decrease the rate. Changing the Mouse Double-Click Rate When you double-click the mouse button, Presentation Manager interprets your action by the speed with which one click follows another. You can change this speed by adjusting the setting in the Double-Click section. Do the following to change the mouse double-click rate: Mouse ■ Click the Right arrow to increase the rate; click the Left arrow to decrease the rate. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Or ■ Drag the scroll box in the scroll bar. To test the new double-click setting, do the following: ■ Double-click the Test button. The button color changes according to the new double-click rate. Selecting Screen Colors You use the Screen Colors command on the Options menu to adjust the text and background colors on your screen. You can specify color, shade, and amount of color for each screen area. You change colors by first selecting a part of the screen in the Screen Colors list box and then using the Color, Shade, and Amount scroll bars to change the color. The Color scroll bar controls the color; the shade and the intensity of the color are controlled by the other two scroll bars. After you pick a color, experiment to find the combination that you want. You can see your changes in the Sample Window box. The numbers in the Sample Window box represent the red, green, blue (RGB) settings, from 0 through 255. The setting 0 0 0 represents no color (black); the setting 255 255 255 represents fully saturated color (white). To change screen colors, follow these steps: 1. Select the Options menu and choose the Screen Colors command. The Screen Colors dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. In the Screen Colors list box, select the part of the screen or window you want to adjust. 3. To change the color, move to the Color scroll bar. Available colors are shown in the color palette above the scroll bar. Scroll to the right or left to choose a color. 4. To change the brightness, move to the Shade scroll bar and scroll to the right to brighten the color (increase the amount of white); scroll to the left to darken the color. If the Shade scroll box is at the extreme left of the scroll bar, the color is black. If the scroll box is at the extreme right, the color is white. 5. To change the amount of color, move to the Amount scroll bar and scroll to the right for a more vibrant, intense color; scroll to the left for less intensity. If the Amount scroll box is at the extreme left of the scroll bar, adjustments to the Color and Shade scroll bars result in black, white, and shades of gray. 6. To return to the previous color settings, choose the Reset button. The Screen Colors dialog box remains open. 7. To restore the Presentation Manager default color settings, choose the Defaults button. The Screen Colors dialog box remains open. 8. When you finish adjusting your screen colors, choose the OK button. If you have an IBM Enhanced Color Display (ECD) or compatible monitor, you can adjust the screen contrast by using the Screen Colors command. To adjust the contrast, follow these steps: 1. Select the Options menu and choose the Screen Colors command. 2. Choose the Contrast button. The Adjust Screen Contrast dialog box appears. 3. Turn the contrast button on your monitor until the dark and light bands of color appear equally bright. 4. When you finish adjusting the contrast, choose the Cancel button. Changing the Window-Border Width You can adjust the width of window borders by using the Border Width command on the Options menu. However, you cannot change the border width of a fixed-size window, such as the Control Panel window. To change the border width, follow these steps: 1. Select the Options menu and choose the Border Width command. The Border Width dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. The Border Width dialog box displays the current width. To change the width, type a new number from 1 through 50. The larger the number, the wider the border. 3. Choose the Set button. Turning Off the Warning Beep When you use MS OS/2, your computer may make a beeping sound─for example, when you press the wrong key. You can turn off the beep by using the Warning Beep command on the Options menu. You can tell if the warning-beep feature is turned on by looking at the Options menu. A check mark appears next to the Warning Beep command. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To turn the beep on or off, do the following: ■ Select the Options menu and choose the Warning Beep command. Changing Mouse Options The Mouse command on the Options menu lets you change which mouse button you press to perform various Presentation Manager tasks. You can switch usage from the left mouse button to the right mouse button (and vice versa) for the following tasks: ■ Selecting and dragging objects (the default setting is to use the left button to select objects and the right button to drag objects such as files). ■ Accessing the Task List (the default setting is to double-click the right button). Follow these steps to switch mouse buttons: 1. Select the Options menu and choose the Mouse command. The Mouse dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. Select the mouse type you want to use: Right Handed (the default setting) uses the left mouse button for selecting and the right button for dragging objects; Left Handed reverses the button usage. 3. To change the button you use to display the Task List, select either the Selection Button or the Manipulation Button (the button you use to drag objects). 4. To change the number of clicks required to see the Task List, select Single-Click or Double-Click. 5. Choose the Set button. If you switch mouse buttons, applications that normally use the right button to carry out tasks will use the left button instead. Adjusting the Logo Display Time When you start some Presentation Manager applications, a logo appears before the application screen appears. You can control how long a logo is displayed by using the Logo Display command. The choices are to display the logo until you press ENTER, to display the logo for a specified number of milliseconds, or not to display the logo. To change the logo display time, do the following: 1. Select the Options menu and choose the Logo Display command. The Logo Display dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. Select the logo display option you want: Indefinite displays the logo until you press ENTER; None eliminates the logo display; Timed displays the logo for the number of milliseconds you type in the Milliseconds box. You can type a number from 1 through 32,767. 3. To save your changes, choose the Set button. Changing Country Settings You can set variables (such as date, number, and time formats) for a particular country by using the Country command on the Options menu. You can use the predefined settings for each country, modify the existing country settings, or create a special set of settings. To change the country-settings information, follow these steps: 1. Select the Options menu and choose the Country command. The Country dialog box, shown in the following example, appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. In the Country Settings box, select the appropriate country name. To create a new setting, select Other Country. The country settings automatically change to correspond to the country you select. 3. Make changes to any of the settings you want. For details on completing the Country dialog box, see the information following this procedure list. 4. If you want to return to the original settings, choose the Reset button (the Country dialog box remains open). 5. To save your new country settings, choose the OK button. The following list explains the sections in the Country dialog box: ■ The Country Settings section contains a list of country names. The Other Country entry is used to create your own set of country settings. ■ The Date Format section controls how dates are displayed. (This figure may be found in the printed book). You can choose one of three options: month-day-year (MDY); day-month-year (DMY); or year-month-day (YMD). The Separator box contains the symbol used to separate the day, month, and year─for example, a slash (/) or a period (.). ■ The Time Format section contains two options: a 12-hour-clock option and a 24-hour-clock option. (This figure may be found in the printed book). If the country you choose uses a 12-hour clock, "AM" and "PM" appear in the box. The Separator box contains the symbol used to separate hours and minutes─for example, a colon (:). ■ The Number Format section controls how numbers are displayed. (This figure may be found in the printed book). The 1000 box shows the symbol used to separate the "1" from the "000"─for example, a comma (,). The Decimal box contains the symbol used to separate integers from decimals─for example, a period (.). The List box contains the symbol used to separate lists of numbers. The number of decimal digits displayed is indicated in the Decimal Digits box. If the Leading Zero check box is turned on, a zero is displayed for numbers less than 1─for example, 0.59. ■ The Currency Format section controls the currency symbol and its location in relation to a number (as a prefix or a suffix). (This figure may be found in the printed book). Setting Up a Communications Port You use the Communications Port command on the Options menu to set up a serial communications port for a communication device, such as a modem or a serial printer. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note If you are setting up a serial printer, check your printer manual to make sure that the port settings you select are correct. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── To set up a communications port, follow these steps: 1. Select the Options menu and choose the Communications Port command. The Communications Port dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. Select a port. The settings for that port appear. 3. Select the options you want. For details on the Communications Port dialog box, see the information following this procedure list. 4. Choose the Set button. The following list explains the various sections of the Communications Port dialog box: ■ The Port section connects a communication device to one of three ports: COM1, COM2, or COM3. ■ The Baud Rate section controls the speed at which information is sent and received. Examples of baud rates include 1200, 1800, 2400, and 7200. ■ The Word Length section controls the number of bits used in sending individual characters. ■ The Parity section sets how your communication device checks for errors in sending and receiving information. If your device checks for parity, select the Even or Odd option where appropriate; if it does not check for parity, select the None option. ■ The Stop Bits section controls end-character signals. ■ The Handshake section controls how a communication device signals the beginning and end of a transmission. For information on the settings for your particular communication device, see your owner's manual. Adding a Font File Applications use fonts for displaying text on your screen and for printing. These fonts are contained in font files; one font file may contain several fonts. For example, the font file TIMESfor Times Roman, Times Roman Bold, and Times Roman Italic, among others. Font files were copied to your hard disk when you installed MS OS/2 and are located in the \eOS2\eDLL directory. To add a font, follow these steps: 1. Select the Installation menu and choose the Add Font command. The Add Font dialog box, shown in the following example, appears, asking you to insert in drive A the disk that contains the font file. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. Insert the font-file disk in the disk drive or type the path of the directory that contains the font files. 3. Choose the Add button. The Add New Font dialog box appears, displaying the font files and font names on the disk. Each font file contains several fonts. 4. In the Font Files box, select the font file that contains the font you want to add. You can select more than one file by clicking each filename or, if you are using the keyboard, by pressing the DIRECTION keys to move the selection cursor to each file and then pressing the SPACEBAR to select each font file. Fonts contained in the selected font file appear in the Font Names box. 5. To change the directory to which the font files will be copied, edit the path shown in the Drive/Directory box. 6. Choose the Add button. If you change the directory to which the font files are copied, you may also have to edit your CONFIG.SYS file. See Chapter 15, "Using MS OS/2 Configuration Commands," for more information on changing this file. Deleting a Font File You can remove fonts by using the Delete Font command. Because font files contain several fonts, you must first delete all the fonts before you can delete the file itself. To delete a font, follow these steps: 1. Select the Installation menu and choose the Delete Font command. The Delete Font dialog box appears, displaying the font files and font names on your system. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. In the Font Files box, select the font file that contains the font you want to delete (font names appear in the Font Names box). 3. In the Font Names box, select the font you want to delete. 4. Choose the Delete button. A dialog box appears, asking you to confirm deleting the font. 5. Choose the Yes button to delete the font. A dialog box appears, asking you if you want to delete the font file. Choose the Yes button to delete the file; choose No to delete the font from the list of installed fonts (the font file remains in the directory). .ET Quitting Control Panel Once you finish adjusting your system settings, you can quit Control Panel. To quit Control Panel, do the following: ■ Select the Options menu and choose the Exit command. .RT Chapter 6 Using System Editor ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Introduction System Editor is a Presentation Manager application that you can use to edit data files, such as your CONFIG.SYS file or any of your own data files. This chapter describes how to use System Editor to perform the following tasks: ■ Formatting text ■ Moving and copying text ■ Searching for and replacing text ■ Changing text fonts ■ Changing display colors ■ Working with text files ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note All examples of filenames and directory names in this chapter use the file allocation table (FAT) file system, which is the file system used by DOS and MS OS/2 versions 1.1 and earlier. For information on using high-performance file system (HPFS) filenames and directory names, see Chapter 16, "Using the High-Performance File System." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Starting System Editor During installation, MS OS/2 adds System Editor to the Main group in Desktop Manager. To start System Editor from the Main group, follow these steps: ■ Switch to the Main-group window and choose System Editor. When you start System Editor, it appears in a window on your screen, as shown in the following example. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Entering Text You can start entering or editing text as soon as you start System Editor. The insertion point moves to the right as you type. Wrapping Text System Editor includes a word-wrap option. As you type, the text is automatically "wrapped" to the next line in the work area and remains within the borders of the window. If you want text to remain within the borders of the window, you can turn on the word-wrap option. If you do not want text to wrap onto the next line, you can turn off the word-wrap option. When the word-wrap option is turned off, text you type extends beyond the borders of the window and System Editor automatically scrolls the text to the left so that the insertion point remains visible. To turn the word-wrap option on or off, do the following: ■ Select the Options menu and choose the Word Wrap command. If the word-wrap option is turned on, you will see a check mark next to the Word Wrap command. If the word-wrap option is turned off, the check mark disappears. Moving the Insertion Point When you start System Editor, the insertion point appears in the upper-left corner of the work area. You can move the insertion point to wherever you want to insert or edit text. To move the insertion point by using a mouse, do the following: Mouse ■ Click the place where you want the insertion point to appear. The following list describes how to move the insertion point by using the keyboard: To move Press ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Up one line UP Down one line DOWN Left one character LEFT Right one character RIGHT To the beginning of the current CTRL+LEFT or previous word To the beginning of the next CTRL+RIGHT word To the beginning of the current HOME line To the end of the current line END To the beginning of the file CTRL+HOME To the end of the file CTRL+END Selecting Text Some editing activities in System Editor require you to select the text you want to affect. For example, if you want to replace existing text with new text, you must first select the text you want to replace. To select text by using a mouse, do the following: ■ Drag the pointer across the text you want to select. (This figure may be found in the printed book). ■ Double-click a word to quickly select it. To select text by using the keyboard, do the following: Keyboard 1. Press the DIRECTION keys to move the insertion point to the beginning of the text you want to select. 2. Press and hold down SHIFT and press the DIRECTION keys to move the insertion point to the end of the text you want to select. The following list describes other methods of selecting text by using the keyboard. All selections described in the following list begin at the insertion point. To select text Press ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── To the beginning of the current CTRL+SHIFT+LEFT or previous word To the beginning of the next CTRL+SHIFT+RIGHT word To the beginning of the current SHIFT+HOME line To the end of the current line SHIFT+END To the beginning of a file CTRL+SHIFT+HOME To the end of a file CTRL+SHIFT+END To cancel a selection, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click the mouse button. Press any DIRECTION key. Extending a Selection If you want to include additional text in an existing selection, you can extend the selection by using a mouse or the keyboard. To extend a selection of text, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Press and hold down SHIFT and Press and hold down SHIFT, then press drag the pointer across the the DIRECTION keys to select the additional text you want to additional text. select. Selecting an Entire File You may want to select all of the text in your file; for example, you may want to copy the contents of an entire file and paste them into another file. To select an entire file, do the following: ■ Select the Edit menu and choose the Select All command. Inserting and Replacing Text With System Editor, you can insert new text between existing text or replace existing text by typing over it. To insert new text, do the following: ■ Move the insertion point to the location where you want to insert text and start typing. As you insert new text, existing text moves to the right of the insertion point. You can type text exactly as you want it to appear. The following keys can be used to insert and replace text: To Press ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Insert one space SPACEBAR Delete a character to the left BACKSPACE of the insertion point Delete a character to the right DEL of the insertion point End a line of text ENTER Insert a tab stop (six character TAB spaces). To insert a blank line in a line of text, do the following: ■ Move the insertion point to the beginning of the text that you want to move to a new line and press ENTER. To join two lines of text, do the following: ■ Move the insertion point to the end of the line and press DEL. Or ■ Move the insertion point to the beginning of the next line and press BACKSPACE. To replace existing text, do the following: 1. Select the text you want to replace. 2. Type new text. Scrolling Text in a Window If the text in a file is longer or wider than can be displayed in one window, you can scroll through the file to view the text. The following list explains how to scroll text using a mouse: To scroll Click ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Up one line Up scroll arrow Down one line Down scroll arrow Right Right scroll arrow Left Left scroll arrow Up one window Area above the scroll box in the vertical scroll bar Down one window Area below the scroll box in the vertical scroll bar Right one window Area to the right of the scroll box in the horizontal scroll bar Left one window Area to the left of the scroll box in the horizontal scroll bar You can quickly scroll through a file by dragging either the vertical or horizontal scroll box. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note You do not see a horizontal scroll bar when the word-wrap option is turned on because the text does not extend past the right window border. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── To scroll through a file by using the keyboard, do the following (actions involving DIRECTION keys are based on the insertion point being at a window border): To scroll Press ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Up one line UP Down one line DOWN Right RIGHT Left LEFT Up one window PAGE UP Down one window PAGE DOWN To the beginning of the current HOME line To the end of the current line END ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note You do not see a horizontal scroll bar when the word-wrap option is turned on because the text does not extend past the right window border. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Editing Text You edit a file with System Editor by using commands from the Edit and Options menus. You can delete text, change fonts, move or copy text, and search for specific text. You can also undo your last edit. Moving Text In System Editor, you can move text from one location in a file to another by using the Cut and Paste commands on the Edit menu. If you are working with another text-editing application that also supports cut and paste operations, you can move text between applications. Follow these steps to move text: 1. Select the text you want to move. 2. Select the Edit menu and choose the Cut command. 3. Move the insertion point to the location in your file where you want the text to appear. 4. Select the Edit menu and choose the Paste command. Copying Text If you want text to appear in more than one location in a file, you can copy and paste it by using the Copy and Paste commands on the Edit menu. Follow these steps to copy text: 1. Select the text you want to copy. 2. Select the Edit menu and choose the Copy command. 3. Move the insertion point to the location in your file where you want the copied text to appear. 4. Select the Edit menu and choose the Paste command. Changing the Text Font With System Editor, you can change the typeface, size, and type style of your text to any typeface, size, or style that is installed on your system. Typefaces, for example, include Courier, Helvetica, and System Proportional. The type size is the height of the type measured in points; for example, Courier may be available in 10-, 12-, 14-, and 16-point sizes. Examples of type styles include bold, italic, and underscore. You change the typeface, size, and type style by using the Set Font command on the Options menu. To change the text font, follow these steps: 1. Select the Options menu and choose the Set Font command. The Set Font dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. Select the typeface you want from the Font box. 3. Select the text size you want from the Size box. 4. Select the type style you want from the Typestyle box. .ET As you select different typefaces, sizes, and type styles, the Font Sample box displays an example of how the text will appear. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 5. If you decide to keep your selections, choose the Set button. .RT ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note Choosing the Apply button changes the text font based on the selections you made in the Set Font dialog box. The dialog box remains open so that you can make additional changes. Choosing the Cancel button after choosing the Apply button does not cancel your selections. Instead, it closes the dialog box. The selections you made are applied to the text in the window. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Deleting Text To delete selected text, do the following: ■ Press BACKSPACE or DEL. Or ■ Select the Edit menu and choose the Clear command. Undoing an Edit You can use the Undo command on the Edit menu to cancel your last edit. For example, you may have deleted text that you want to keep, or you may have copied text to the wrong location in your file. Choosing the Undo command immediately after your last edit restores the text to the way it was before you changed it. The Undo command name on the Edit menu changes to reflect the last edit you made. For example, if you deleted text, the Undo command appears on the Edit menu as "Undo Clear." If you typed new text, the Undo command appears as "Undo Typing." To undo your last edit, follow this step: ■ Select the Edit menu and choose the Undo command. Searching for and Replacing Text With System Editor, you can search for specific text by using the Find command on the Edit menu. You can also replace one or more occurrences of existing text with new text that you specify. When you use the Find command, you can start your search at any point in a file. You can also specify whether System Editor should match all upperand lowercase characters in the search text. Follow these steps to search for text: 1. 1 Move the insertion point to where you want the search to begin. 2. 2 Select the Edit menu and choose the Find command. The Find dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. 3 In the Find box, type the characters or words you want System Editor to find. 4. 4 You can customize your search by selecting one or more of the following options: ■ If you want System Editor to replace the text it finds with new text, type the new text in the Change To box. ■ If you want System Editor to ignore capitalization when it searches for text, turn off the Case Sensitive check box. System Editor is preset to find only those occurrences with the same arrangement of upper- and lowercase letters. ■ If you want System Editor to go to the beginning of your file and continue searching, turn on the Wrap check box. System Editor is preset to end the search at the end of a file. 1. 5 Choose one of the following buttons to carry out the action you want: To Choose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Search for specified text Find To change the text that was Change, Then Find found to new text, then search for another occurrence of the text To change the found text to new Change text To change all occurrences of the Change All specified text to new text Cancel the search Cancel System Editor searches for the text starting from the insertion point to the end of your file and selects the first occurrence of the specified text. If the Wrap check box is turned on when System Editor reaches the end of the file, it continues the search from the beginning of the file until it reaches the insertion point. If System Editor does not find any occurrences of the specified text, a message appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). To close the message, do the following: ■ Choose the OK button. The Find dialog box remains open so that you can search for other occurrences of the text or correct any typing mistakes you made in the Find box. To continue searching for the text, do the following: ■ Choose the Find button. If you have finished your search, you can close the Find dialog box by doing the following: ■ Choose the Cancel button. Changing the Display Colors You can use the Set Colors command on the Options menu to change the text and background colors of your work area. To change text and background colors, follow these steps: 1. Select the Options menu and choose the Set Colors command. The Set Colors dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. Select the text color you want from the list of colors in the Foreground box. 3. Select the background color you want from the list of colors in the Background box. As you select colors, each selection is reflected in the Color Sample box. 4. If you decide to keep your color selections, choose the Set button. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note Choosing the Apply button changes the colors based on your selections in the Set Colors dialog box. The dialog box remains open so that you can make additional changes. Choosing the Cancel button after choosing the Apply button does not cancel your selections. Instead, it closes the dialog box. The selections you made are applied to the window. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Working with Files The text you enter or edit using System Editor is stored in its own unique text file when you save it. Text files are represented by data-file icons in directory windows in File Manager. You can create, open, and save text files by using commands on the File menu in System Editor. Opening a File You can open a new or existing file in the System Editor window. If you open a file when another file is open, System Editor closes the current file. Creating a New File To create a new file in System Editor, do the following: ■ Select the File menu and choose the New command. The word "Untitled" appears in the title bar of the file. Opening an Existing File With System Editor, you can edit an existing file on any drive or in any directory. To open a file, you use the Open command on the File menu. To open a file, do the following: 1. Select the File menu and choose the Open command. The Open dialog box appears, listing the subdirectories and files located in the current directory. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. To open a file located on a different drive or in a different directory, select the drive or directory you want from the Directories box, then choose the OK button. You can also type the path for the file in the File Name box, then press ENTER. For example, if you want to open a file on drive A in the MEMOS directory, type a:\ememos\e, then press ENTER. If the file you want to open is in the parent directory of the directory shown in the Directory Is line, type .., then press ENTER. .ET Files located on the drive or in the directory you specified appear in the Files box. (This figure may be found in the printed book). .RT 3. Select the file you want to open. 4. Choose the OK button. 5. If you have a file currently open when you use the Open command, System Editor automatically closes that file. If you made changes to the file, System Editor displays a message, asking if you want to save the changes. You can close the file in one of several ways. The following options are offered before the current file is closed and the new file is opened: To Choose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Save changes Save Save changes using a new Save As filename Discard changes Discard Continue working in the current Cancel file Display Help information Help Saving a File When you create a new file, or when you finish working in a file, you can save your changes using two System Editor commands: Save As and Save. Saving a New File You use the Save As command to name and save a new file. You can use this command to save a file in the current directory, or you can save the file on another drive or in another directory. Follow these steps to save a new file: 1. Select the File menu and choose the Save As command. The Save As dialog box appears, listing the subdirectories contained in the current directory. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. If you want to save the file in the current directory, type a name for the file. If you want to save the file on another drive or in another directory, type the path followed by the filename; for example, if you want to name your file MYMEMO and save it in the MEMOS directory on drive A, type A:\ememos\emymemo. 3. Choose the Type button. The Type dialog box appears, displaying a list of type attributes for the file. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 4. If the file is a text file, select Plain Text; if the file is an MS OS/2 command file (a file with a .CMD filename extension), select OS/2 Command File; if the file is a DOS command file (a file with a .BAT filename extension), select DOS Command File. 5. Choose the Set button. The Save As dialog box appears again. 6. Choose the OK button. If you type a filename that already exists, a message appears, asking if you want to replace the existing file with the file you are saving. To replace the existing file, do the following: ■ Choose the Yes button. If you do not want to replace the existing file, do the following: ■ Choose the No button. Saving Your Changes The Save command saves your changes. To save changes to the current file, do the following: ■ Select the File menu and choose the Save command. Using the Autosave Command You can use the Autosave command to save the current file automatically after a specified number of changes have been made. To use the Autosave command, the file you are working on must already have a name. You cannot use the Autosave command on an unnamed file. To use the Autosave command, follow these steps: 1. Select the File menu and choose the Autosave command. The Autosave dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 2. Turn on the Autosave On check box. 3. Move to the Number of Changes Between Saves box and type the number you want. If you are using a mouse, clicking the arrows changes the number; clicking the Down arrow decreases the number by one, clicking the Up arrow increases the number by one. 4. Choose the Set button. Even if you use the Autosave command, remember to save your file before quitting System Editor─this saves any last-minute changes. Printing a File There are two ways you can print a file: ■ By using the Print command in File Manager ■ By dragging the file icon from a directory window in File Manager onto the Print Manager icon or into the Print Manager window. For more information on printing files by using File Manager, see Chapter 3, "Using File Manager." Deleting a File To delete a file, you can use the Delete command in File Manager, or you can use the del command in the MS OS/2 command interpreter, cmd. For more information on deleting files in File Manager, see Chapter 3, "Using File Manager." For more information on using the del command in cmd, see Chapter 8, "Running Cmd." Quitting System Editor You quit System Editor by using the Exit command on the File menu. To quit System Editor, do the following: 1. 1 Select the File menu and choose the Exit command. If you have unsaved changes in your file, a dialog box appears. 2. Choose one of the following options: To Choose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Quit System Editor and save your Save changes Quit System Editor and save your Save As changes using a new filename Quit System Editor and discard Discard your changes Cancel the dialog box and Cancel continue working in the current file Display Help Information Help Keyboard Reference The following list describes the different keys that you can use in System Editor to select, scroll, and edit text. Use this list as a reference when using your keyboard to work with System Editor. To Press ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Insert a space SPACEBAR Insert a blank line ENTER Insert a tab stop TAB Delete the character to the DEL right of the insertion point Delete the character to the left BACKSPACE of the insertion point Move the insertion point up one UP line To Press ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Move the insertion point down DOWN one line Move the insertion point right RIGHT one character Move the insertion point left LEFT one character Move the insertion point to the CTRL+RIGHT beginning of the next word Move the insertion point to the CTRL+LEFT beginning of the current or previous word Move the insertion point to the HOME beginning of the line Move the insertion point to the END end of the line Move the insertion point to the CTRL+HOME beginning of a file Move the insertion point to the CTRL+END end of a file Scroll down one window PAGE DOWN Scroll up one window PAGE UP Select text to the right of the SHIFT+RIGHT insertion point Select text to the left of the SHIFT+LEFT insertion point Select text below the insertion SHIFT+DOWN point Select text above the insertion SHIFT+UP point Select text from the insertion SHIFT+HOME point to the beginning of the current line Select text from the insertion SHIFT+END point to the end of the current line Select text from the insertion CTRL+SHIFT+RIGHT point to the beginning of the next word Select text from the insertion CTRL+SHIFT+LEFT point to the beginning of the current or previous word Chapter 7 Using MS OS/2 Command Reference ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Introduction MS OS/2 Command Reference is a Presentation Manager application that you can use to view the contents of the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference on your computer. When you start MS OS/2 Command Reference, the table of contents for the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference appears in a window. From the table of contents, you can view information about specific topics and commands, and you can search and print topic information and use the Bookmark feature to keep track of topics you view most often. MS OS/2 Command Reference is similar to Help. The menus and commands are almost identical, and the way you use them is exactly the same. The tasks presented in this chapter can also be accomplished by using the commands in Help. The difference is that, with MS OS/2 Command Reference, you are viewing and working with the information in the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. With Help, you are viewing and working with Help information for the application you are using. This chapter explains how to perform the following tasks by using MS OS/2 Command Reference: ■ Viewing topic information ■ Using the table of contents window ■ Searching, printing, and copying topic information ■ Using the Bookmark feature to mark topics Starting MS OS/2 Command Reference MS OS/2 Command Reference appears in the Main-group window when you start MS OS/2. To start MS OS/2 Command Reference, do the following: 1. Switch to the Main-group window. 2. Choose OS/2 Command Reference. When you start MS OS/2 Command Reference, it appears in a window with the table of contents for the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference displayed in the Contents window. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Viewing a Topic You can view information for any topic in the Contents window by using either a mouse or the keyboard. To view topic information, do the following: .ET Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Double-click the topic you want. 1 Press the UP or DOWN key to move to and select the topic you want. 2 Press ENTER. The topic information appears in a window with the heading of the topic displayed in the title bar, as shown in the following example. .RT (This figure may be found in the printed book). Often the information for a topic does not fit in one window. As with other Presentation Manager applications, you can use scroll bars to scroll topic information. If you are using the keyboard, you can use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys to scroll topic information. For information on scrolling in a window, see Chapter 1, "Learning Basic Presentation Manager Skills." Viewing a Related Topic Some topics include related terms, concepts, or topics that you can view directly from the topic window. These terms, concepts, and topics appear in a different color in the text. To display information for a related term, concept, or topic, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Double-click the term, concept, 1 Press TAB to select the term, concept, or topic you want. or topic you want. 2 Press ENTER. If the information for the related topic is short, it appears in a small window inside the current topic window. If there is a lot of information on the topic, it appears in a separate topic window. Returning to the Contents Window You can return to the Contents window from a topic window at any time by using the Contents command on the Options menu. To return to the Contents window, do the following: ■ Select the Options menu and choose the Contents command. The Contents window appears inside the topic window. When the Contents window is displayed, you can choose another topic to view. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Reviewing a Topic Each time you choose a new topic, the new information appears in a topic window without replacing previous information. This allows you to review previous topic information at any time. To review previous topic information, do the following: ■ Select the Options menu and choose the Previous command. The topic information immediately preceding the current topic information appears. Repeatedly choosing the Previous command displays each previous topic. If there is no previous topic available, then choosing the Previous command returns you to the Contents window. Another way to review a topic is by using the Viewed Pages command. The Viewed Pages command displays a list of all previously viewed topics so that you can quickly look at the topic you want without choosing the Previous command. To display a list of viewed topics, do the following: ■ Select the Options menu and choose the Viewed Pages command. The Viewed Pages window appears inside the current window. (This figure may be found in the printed book). You can use either a mouse or the keyboard to review topic information from the Viewed Pages window. To review topic information, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Double-click the topic you want. 1 Press the UP or DOWN key to move to and select the topic you want. 2 Press ENTER. Viewing a Subtopic When the Contents window first appears, only main topics are listed. Subtopics are "collapsed," or hidden, from view. A plus sign (+) next to a main topic indicates that it includes subtopics. (This figure may be found in the printed book). You can display subtopics in the Contents window by using a mouse or the keyboard. To "expand" a main topic, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click the plus sign next to the 1 Press the UP or DOWN key to move to main topic you want. and select the topic you want. 2 Select the Options menu and choose the Expand One Level command. When you expand a main topic, the subtopics appear beneath it and the plus sign changes to a minus sign (-). (This figure may be found in the printed book). To collapse a main topic, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Click the minus sign next to the 1 Press the UP or DOWN key to move to topic. and select the topic you want. 2 Select the Options menu and choose the Collapse Branch command. The Options menu includes additional commands that you can use to expand or collapse main topics in the Contents window. The commands and their functions are described in the following list: Command Action ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Expand One Level Lists the first level of subtopics below the selected main topic. Expand Branch Lists all levels of subtopics below the selected main topic. Expand All Lists all levels of subtopics below all main topics. Collapse Branch Hides all levels of subtopics below the selected main topic. Collapse All Hides all levels of subtopics below all main topics. Using the Index With MS OS/2 Command Reference, you can display the index for the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. Once the index is displayed, you can use it the same way you use an index in a book: First you find the topic you want, then you display the topic information. Displaying the Index You display the MS OS/2 Command Reference index by doing the following: ■ Select the Options menu and choose the Index command. The Index window appears inside the current window, as shown in the following example. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Viewing a Topic from the Index Once the index is displayed, you can use it to display topic information by choosing the entry you want. To choose an index entry, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Double-click the entry you want. 1 Press the UP or DOWN key to move to and select the entry you want. 2 Press ENTER. Using the Bookmark Command Using bookmarks in MS OS/2 Command Reference, you can keep track of the topics and commands you view most often. You can place a bookmark on each entry that contains information you will need again. You might also write a quick note on your bookmark to help you remember why a particular page is important to you. Similarly, by using the Bookmark command, you can mark specific topics and type a description of your bookmark. Adding a Bookmark To add a bookmark to a topic, its information must be displayed in a topic window. To add a bookmark, do the following: 1. From the Contents window, select and view the topic you want to mark. 2. Select the Services menu and choose the Bookmark command. The Bookmark dialog box appears with the Place option selected and the heading for the topic displayed. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. If you want to use a different heading or a one-line description for your Bookmark, select the text box and type the heading or description. 4. Choose the OK button. Viewing a Marked Topic Once you assign bookmarks to topics, you can use the Bookmark command to refer to specific topics. To view a marked topic, do the following: 1. Select the Services menu and choose the Bookmark command. 2. Select the View option. 3. Move to the list box and select the topic you want to view. 4. Choose the OK button. Deleting a Bookmark If you no longer want a bookmark for a particular topic, you can delete it. You can delete a single bookmark, or you can delete all bookmarks at one time. To delete a bookmark, do the following: 1. Select the Services menu and choose the Bookmark command. 2. If you want to delete one bookmark, select the Remove option. If you want to delete all bookmarks, select the Remove All option. 3. If you are deleting one bookmark, move to the list box and select the Bookmark you want to delete. 4. Choose the OK button. If you selected the Remove All option, a message appears, asking you to confirm your decision to delete all bookmarks. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 5. Choose the OK button. Copying Topic Information With the commands on the Services menu, you can copy topic information to another program or to a file. By using the Copy To File and Append To File commands, you can copy or append current topic information to a file called TEXT.TMP. You can then use a textediting program to edit information in the TEXT.TMP file. If you are using other applications that support the use of the clipboard, a temporary storage area in memory, you can use the Copy command to copy topic information to the clipboard and paste it into other files. To copy or append topic information, do the following: 1. In the Contents window, select and view the topic information you want to copy or append. 2. Select the Services menu and choose the appropriate command. The commands and their functions are described in the following list: Command Action ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Copy Copies the current topic information to the clipboard for use with another program. Copy To File Creates the file TEXT.TMP and copies the current topic information to it, or replaces information in the existing TEXT.TMP file. Append To File Appends the current topic information to the TEXT.TMP file. Searching Topic Information With the Search command on the Services menu, you can search topic information for specific text. You can search the index, the topic information currently displayed, topics you select, or the entire Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. Selecting a Topic If you want to search specific topics, you must first select them in the Contents window. You can use either a mouse or the keyboard to select topics. To select a topic, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── 1 Display the Contents window. 2 Display the Contents window. 3 Press and hold down CTRL and 4 Press the UP or DOWN key to move to click the topic you want. and select the topic you want. 5 To cancel a selection, press 6 Press the SPACEBAR. and hold down CTRL and click the topic again. 7 To cancel a selection, press the SPACEBAR again. Searching a Topic To search topic information for specific text, do the following: 1. Display the Contents window and select the topic you want. 2. Select the Services menu and choose the Search command. The Search dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. Select the option that matches the topic information you want to search. The options are described following this procedure list. 4. Type the text you want to search for in the Search String box. 5. Choose the Search button. The following options are available in the Search dialog box: Option Searches ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This Section Currently displayed topic information Marked Sections Information on selected topics in the Contents window (this option is grayed unless the Contents window is displayed and topics are selected) All Sections The entire Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference Index The index for the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference If you search the current topic, the text you are searching for changes color when located. If you search selected topics, all topics, or the index, a Search window appears, listing the topics that contain the text you specified. The specified text appears in the title bar. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Viewing Topic Information from a Search Window You can view topic information from the Search window by using either a mouse or the keyboard. To view topic information from the Search window, do the following: Mouse Keyboard ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Double-click the topic you want. 1 Press the UP or DOWN key to move to and select the topic you want. 2 Press ENTER. Printing Topic Information You can print the table of contents, selected topics, the index, the topic information currently displayed, or the entire Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. To print topic information, do the following: 1. If you want to print a selected topic, display the Contents window and select the topic you want to print. (For information on selecting topics in the Contents window, see "Selecting a Topic," earlier in this chapter.) 2. Select the Services menu and choose the Print command. The Print dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. Select the option that matches the topic information you want to print. The options are described following this procedure list. 4. Choose the Print button. The following options are available in the Print dialog box: Option Prints ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This Section Currently displayed topic information Marked Sections Information on selected topics in the Contents window (this option is grayed unless the Contents window is displayed and topics are selected) All Sections The entire Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference Index The index for the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference Contents The table of contents for the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference Quitting MS OS/2 Command Reference When you are finished viewing information in the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference, you can quit MS OS/2 Command Reference. To quit MS OS/2 Command Reference, do the following: ■ Select the Services menu and choose the Exit command. Part 2: Using Cmd and the DOS Session ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This part of the Microsoft Operating System/2 User's Guide describes how to work with MS OS/2 if you prefer to use a nongraphical, command-line user interface. You will learn how to use the MS OS/2 command interpreter, cmd, including how to start and stop the program, as well as how to run cmd commands and start other programs. MS OS/2 utilities are also explained. You can use utilities to carry out maintenance tasks with files, directories, and devices. You'll learn how to run programs in the DOS session and how to use the DOS command interpreter, command. Instructions are also provided for running DOS programs and MS OS/2 utilities in the DOS session. Finally, you'll learn how to create and use MS OS/2 batch programs to simplify repetitive tasks and create custom commands. Chapter 8 Running Cmd ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Introduction The MS OS/2 command interpreter, cmd, is a program that translates what you type at a prompt into commands that your computer can use. When you install MS OS/2, the cmd prompt looks like the following: [C:\e] You can run cmd in a full-screen session or in a window. Instead of the Presentation Manager graphical environment, cmd provides a command-line interface. This means that cmd displays a prompt where you type commands to start other programs. Cmd contains a set of built-in commands that help you to manage files and directories, create and run batch programs, and set system features. You can start other programs by using cmd, so it provides an alternative to Desktop Manager if you are working in a full-screen session or if you are running cmd in a window. This chapter describes how to start and quit the cmd program, and how to use cmd commands. It also describes the keys command, which can be used to edit the cmd command line. For more information about utilities that can be run from the cmd program, see Chapter 9, "Using MS OS/2 Utilities." This chapter also contains information about how the cmd program and cmd commands work in the file allocation table (FAT) file system. Some commands may work differently when you use them in the high-performance file system (HPFS). All examples of file and directory names in this chapter are for the FAT file system. For more information about using commands in HPFS, see Chapter 16, "Using the High-Performance File System." Starting and Quitting Cmd You can start the MS OS/2 command interpreter, cmd, either in a full-screen session or in a window in the Presentation Manager session. From the Main group in Desktop Manager, do one of the following: ■ To start cmd in a full-screen session, choose OS/2 Full Screen from the Main group in Desktop Manager. Or ■ To start cmd in a window, choose OS/2 Window from the Main group in Desktop Manager. If you start cmd in a full-screen session, the screen clears and the cmd prompt appears in the full screen. If you start cmd in a window, a new window appears in the Presentation Manager session and the cmd prompt appears in the window. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note You can also start cmd in a window from File Manager by double-clicking the CMD.EXE file. For more information about File Manager, see Chapter 3, "Using File Manager." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── To quit cmd, type exit at the prompt. If cmd is running in a full-screen session, Desktop Manager appears. If cmd is running in a window, the window closes and then Desktop Manager appears. If you want to switch from a full-screen session to the Task List without quitting cmd, press CTRL+ESC. The full-screen session will then appear as an entry in the Task List. Using Commands To use a command in cmd, you type the command on the command line and press ENTER. This section explains how to use the command line to start commands, and also how you can use the features of the keys command to edit the command line. Starting Commands After you have started cmd, you are ready to use commands. At the cmd command prompt, do the following: ■ Type the name of the command, followed by any arguments, and press ENTER. In addition to commands built into cmd, you can also start MS OS/2 utilities and other full-screen programs. To start other MS OS/2 programs, see the manual that accompanies your program and "Running Programs," later in this chapter. Editing the Command Line When you are running cmd you can perform editing functions on the command line by using the keys command. These editing functions will save you time when entering commands, by allowing you to call up commands you have already typed and use them again without retyping them. You start these functions by typing the following on the command line: keys on Once you have typed the keys command, every command you enter on the command line is temporarily saved in a list in memory. To see the list of the commands that are currently in memory, type the following on the command line: keys list You can use any of the following keys and key combinations to perform the special editing functions that the keys command provides: Key Editing function ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── ESC Clears the current command line and returns the cursor to the position immediately following the command prompt. HOME Returns the cursor to the position immediately following the command prompt. END Places the cursor in the position immediately following the last character you typed (even if the last character you typed is a space). Key Editing function ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── INS Turns the insert mode on and off. The cursor appears as a half box when you are in insert mode. As you insert characters, existing characters move to the right. At the beginning of each new command line, insert mode is turned off. DEL Deletes the character marked by the cursor. As you delete characters, any existing characters to the right of the cursor move to the left. LEFT Moves the cursor left one character. RIGHT Moves the cursor right one character. UP Finds the previous command listed in memory and displays that command on the command line. When you reach the first command in the list, pressing UP displays the last command. DOWN Finds the next command listed in memory and displays that command on the command line. When you reach the last command in the list, pressing DOWN displays the first command. BACKSPACE Moves the cursor back (left) one character and deletes that character. Any characters to the right of the cursor move left to fill the deleted character's position. CTRL+LEFT Moves the cursor left to the first character of a word. If the cursor is already positioned on the first character of a word or in the space between words, the cursor moves to the first character of the word to the left. .ET CTRL+RIGHT Moves the cursor right to the first character of the next word. CTRL+END Deletes any characters from the current cursor position to the end of the command line. CTRL+HOME Deletes any characters from the beginning of the command line up to (but not including) the current cursor position. ENTER Sends the information on the command line to the command interpreter and adds it to the list of commands in memory. Pressing ENTER also turns off insert mode. .RT For example, suppose the keys command is running and when you type keys list to see the list of commands in memory, the following list is displayed: 1: cd accounts 2: dir sales.feb 3: copy a:\sales.feb 4: cd .. 5: path 6: type sales.feb 7: keys list Now suppose you want to use any of the keys editing functions. Press the UP key to bring the last command in the list to the command line. Press UP again to display the previous command. As you continue to press UP, the keys command takes you through the entire list and returns to the last command after reaching the beginning of the list. The keys command continues to add commands to the list until you type keys off on the command line or exit the OS/2 session in which it was started. To find out whether the keys command is on or off, type keys and press ENTER. You can also have MS OS/2 start the keys command every time you start or restart your system by placing the following line in your CONFIG.SYS file: set keys=on Getting Help Information When you use cmd commands, error messages may appear on your screen. You can use the Help program to get an explanation of any error message. Each message consists of a number (for example, SYS1002) and a brief description of the error condition. For a more detailed explanation of the error condition, you type help followed by the message number. For example, suppose that when you try to get a directory list in wide format, you accidentally type dir /z instead of dir /w. You receive the following error message, "SYS1003: The syntax of the command is incorrect." To see a detailed explanation of this error message, type the following: help sys1003 The following explanation is provided: SYS1003: The syntax of the command is incorrect. EXPLANATION: One of the following occurred: 1. An incorrect parameter was specified. 2. A required parameter is missing. 3. Too many parameters were entered. 4. The parameters were entered in the wrong order. ACTION: Check the syntax of the command. Then retry the command. Setting Up the System When you first set up your system, you may want to do such things as customize the MS OS/2 command prompt or set and display the date and the time of day. The cmd program contains several built-in commands that help you perform these types of tasks. This section describes the commands you might use when setting up your system. The commands are as follows: Command Purpose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── cls Clears your screen. date Displays and sets the system date. time Displays and sets the system time. ver Displays the MS OS/2 version number. prompt Changes the cmd prompt. chcp Changes the current code page. These commands are described in the following sections. Clearing the Screen The cls command clears your computer screen. Once you clear the screen, you cannot retrieve the information. To use this command, type the following: cls Your screen clears, and the MS OS/2 command prompt appears in the upper-left corner of the screen. Setting and Displaying the Date You can set and display the system date by using the date command. MS OS/2 uses this date to update the directory list whenever you create or change a file or directory. The date that you set applies to all sessions. To use the date command, type the following: date You'll see a message similar to this: The current date is Fri 3-24-1989 Enter the new date: (mm-dd-yy) _ To keep the current date, press ENTER. To change the date, type the new date at the cursor, separating the month, day, and year with hyphens (-), slashes (/), or periods (.). For example, the dates 6-1-89, 6/1/89, and 6.1.89 are equivalent. You can also specify the date directly after the date command, as follows: date 3-1-89 ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note If your system is set up for a country other than the United States, the date and time formats you use may differ from what is shown here. The country command in the CONFIG.SYS file sets this format. For more information about the country command, see Chapter 15, "Using MS OS/2 Configuration Commands." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Setting and Displaying the Time You can set and display the system time with the time command. This command sets the internal clock in your computer. MS OS/2 uses this time to update the directory list whenever you create or change a file or directory. The time that you set applies to all sessions. To use the time command, type the following: time You'll see a message similar to this: The current time is: 10:21:39.03 Enter the new time: _ To keep the current time, press ENTER. To change the time, you type the new time at the cursor, separating hours, minutes, seconds, and hundredths of a second with colons (:) or periods (.). The separator between seconds and hundredths of a second must be a period. The hour is based upon a 24-hour clock. Seconds and hundredths of a second are optional. You can also specify the time directly after the time command, as follows: time 13:30 Displaying the Version Number To display the MS OS/2 version number, use the ver command. To use this command, type the following: ver Changing the Cmd Prompt You can change the way your prompt looks by using the prompt command. Prompt recognizes several character combinations, all of which begin with a dollar sign ($). Each character combination displays a different prompt. The prompt command affects only the current session. To change the prompt, you type prompt followed by one or more character combinations. For example, to change the prompt to an equal sign followed by a greater-than sign, type the following: prompt $q$g Now your prompt looks like this: => You can use any of the following character combinations to create your prompt: Characters Prompt ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── $$ Dollar sign ($) $t Current time $d Current date $p Current directory on the current drive $v Version number $n Current drive letter $g Greater-than sign (>) $l Less-than sign (<) $b Pipe symbol ( | ) $_ New line (the equivalent of pressing ENTER) $e ANSI escape character $q Equal sign (=) $h Backspace (to erase a character in the prompt) $i Help line $c Left parenthesis [ ( ] (in cmd only) $f Right parenthesis [ ) ] (in cmd only) $a Ampersand (&) (in cmd only) You can also change your prompt to any string of characters or combination of characters and symbols. For more information on how to change your prompt to a string of characters, see the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. If you type prompt by itself, the prompt changes to the default system prompt. Changing the Code Page To display or switch the current code page, use the chcp command. The code page defines a character correspondence table that is used to set up foreign-language versions of MS OS/2. Four code pages are supported: Multilingual (850), United States (437), Portuguese (860), and Canadian French (863). Before you can switch to a different code page, you must set up your system for code-page switching. This can be done during installation of MS OS/2. Or, you can modify your CONFIG.SYS file by following the instructions found in Chapter 15, "Using MS OS/2 Configuration Commands." To find out which code page is currently active and which code pages are prepared for your system, you type chcp by itself. You can switch to any code page that is prepared for your system. To switch to a different code page, type chcp and the number of the code page. For example, to switch to the Canadian French code page, type the following: chcp 863 For a list of countries and their supported code pages, see Chapter 15, "Using MS OS/2 Configuration Commands." Managing Files, Directories, and Drives MS OS/2 provides several commands that help you manage files, directories, and drives. These commands, with their alternative forms shown in parentheses, are as follows: Command Purpose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── dir Displays the contents of a directory. mkdir (md) Makes a new directory. chdir (cd) Switches to a different directory. Command Purpose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── rmdir (rd) Removes a directory. type Displays the contents of a file. copy Copies a file. move Moves a file or directory. del (erase) Deletes a file. rename (ren) Renames a file or directory. vol Displays the volume identification of the current drive. Unless you specify otherwise, all commands that you type at the cmd prompt work with the contents of the current directory. Many of these commands accept options, which are letters preceded by a slash (/) and that modify how a command works. While most command options are described in this chapter, see the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference for a complete list and description of the options for each command. Displaying Directory Information To display a list of the contents of a directory, use the dir command. A directory list consists of individual directory entries, each of which describes one file or subdirectory (a directory created within another directory). You can display the directory list for your current directory, for a specific directory or file, for more than one directory, or for a group of files. In addition, the dir command can display the list in a multiple-column format or a page-by-page format. You can also choose the order in which the directory information is displayed. The various options are described in the following sections. Displaying the Contents of the Current Directory To display the contents of the current directory, you type the dir command without any arguments. For example, suppose you are working in a directory called FINANCE. To display the directory entries, type the following: dir The cmd command interpreter displays a list similar to the following: The volume label in drive C is RALPH. The Volume Serial Number is E392:1C15 Directory of C:\eFINANCE . <DIR> 1-30-89 9:10p .. <DIR> 1-30-89 9:10p BUSINESS <DIR> 1-30-89 9:11a PERSONAL <DIR> 1-30-89 9:12a TAXES <DIR> 10-15-89 8:47a 1QUARTER SUM 452 4-20-89 10:31a 2QUARTER SUM 590 7-27-89 9:05a 3QUARTER SUM 524 10-08-89 3:54p REPORT TXT 1168 11-08-89 2:15p 9 File(s) 1880064 bytes free Here is what each directory entry contains: ■ The volume label and serial number of your current drive ■ The name of the current drive and directory ■ The filename and filename extension (if any) or the directory name ■ The size of the file (in bytes) ■ The date that the file or directory was created or last modified ■ The time that the file or directory was created or last modified Directories have <DIR> listed after their names. At the end of the list, dir displays the number of files in the directory and the number of bytes that are free on the disk. It is a good idea to check your available disk space regularly, especially if your disk space is limited. If you are viewing a directory list for a directory other than the root directory by using the file allocation table (FAT) file system, you'll see periods (. and ..) listed as directory entries. These characters are a shorthand notation for the current (.) and parent (..) directories. The current directory is the one you are now working in, and the parent directory is one level above the current directory in the directory structure. In the high-performance file system (HPFS), you'll see these entries in the root directory as well; because the root directory has no parent directory, the parent (..) notation listed there has no meaning. You can use this notation in any cmd command or utility to specify the current or parent directory. For example, to see the directory list for a parent directory, type the following: dir .. You can also display directory entries for the current directory on a different drive. For example, to see what is in the current directory on drive A, type the following: dir a: A list of the files and directories for drive A appears on your screen. You may want to see only a directory list of filenames, instead of the complete directory entries described previously. For a list of the filenames on drive A, type the following: dir a: /f When you use the /f option, the dir command also displays the complete directory path of the files. Viewing a Directory List for a Specific File or Directory The dir command lets you view any directory list without changing your current directory. To do this, you must tell cmd the path of the directory you want to view. You can specify the directory's full path from the root directory, or you can specify a relative path from your current directory. Although you can always type the full path of a directory, it is not required. For example, suppose you have your business-travel schedules stored in the TRAVEL subdirectory of the \FINANCE\BUSINESS directory. To view the files in your TRAVEL subdirectory from the root directory, type the following: dir \finance\business\travel However, if you are in the FINANCE directory, you only need to type the path from the current directory to the TRAVEL subdirectory: dir business\travel If you prefer to see your personal-travel schedules that are stored in the TRAVEL subdirectory of the \eFINANCE\ePERSONAL directory on drive A, type the following: dir a:\finance\personal\travel ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note If you will be doing much work in another directory, you can also use the chdir command to move to that directory before using the dir command. The chdir command is described in detail in "Changing to Another Directory," later in this chapter. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Displaying the Contents of Multiple Directories You can display directory lists for more than one directory by typing the name of each directory after the dir command. For example, suppose that you are planning to purchase new desks and lamps for your employees. Although you have price lists for many items in your current directory, you would like to see the lists that pertain only to desks and lamps. To see the directory lists for the DESKS directory, which is on your current drive, and the directory list for the LAMPS directory, which is on drive A, type the following: dir desks a:\lamps You will first see the list for DESKS, followed by the list for LAMPS: The volume label in drive C is RALPH. The Volume Serial Number is 2520:9C15 Directory of C:\DESKS . <DIR> 6-23-89 2:58p .. <DIR> 6-23-89 2:58p STUDY DSK 899 6-09-89 12:35p TOOLS DSK 3821 2-02-89 1:41p WORK DSK 16 3-16-89 8:40a 5 File(s) 1646592 bytes free The volume label in drive A is INVENTORY. The Volume Serial Number is 0A73:331B Directory of A:\LAMPS . <DIR> 4-28-89 6:30p .. <DIR> 4-28-89 6:30p DESK LMP 240 1-09-89 1:02p TABLE LMP 1234 4-16-89 3:54p SPOT LMP 80 2-10-89 8:59a 5 File(s) 512 bytes free If the dir command cannot find one of the specified directories, it displays an error message telling you which directory could not be found and then displays the other directory. Displaying a Directory List for a Group of Files You might find that you want to view a directory list for a specific group of files. For example, to view a directory list in your current directory for all of the files that have the filename extension .DOC, type the following: dir *.doc The asterisk (*) is a wildcard character, which has a special meaning to cmd. The cmd program replaces the asterisk with any alphanumeric character or string of characters. In the previous example, the files REPORT.DOC, REPLY.DOC, and LETTER.DOC are all displayed. Wildcard characters can be used with the dir command to specify other groups of files. For example, to view all of the files that begin with the letter "R," type the following: dir r* This displays the files REPORT.DOC and REPLY.DOC, but not LETTER.DOC. To view all files beginning with the characters FIN, regardless of their filename extensions, type the following: dir fin* The files FINANCE.TXT, FIND.TXT, and FIN024.DAT are all included in the list. In addition to the asterisk, the question mark (?) can also be used as a wildcard character. A question mark in a filename or filename extension means that any one character or no character at all may occupy that position. For example, to display a directory list for trade shows that you have attended, you could type the following: dir show?.* You would see a list that contains SHOW.PDX, SHOW1.SEA, SHOWNSHOW3.LAX; it would, however, not include SHOW23.SEA (since the question mark stands for only one character). Displaying a Directory List in Wide Format If you have a large directory with many files, you might not be able to see all of the directory lists on one screen. One way to condense this list is to display it in wide (/w) format. Suppose that your ACCOUNTS directory contains files for every account you have. You want to see the names of all the accounts, but you know that it is a long list of names. To display the directory list in wide format, type the /w option on the command line: dir accounts /w You see a multiple-column list of the filenames in the directory, and they appear without the file size or date/time information. Viewing a Directory List in Page Format Just as you read a book one page at a time, you can view a directory list one screenful at a time. To do this, use the /p option: .ET dir accounts /p The first part of the directory list is displayed, then the message "Press any key when ready . . ." appears at the bottom of the screen when the screen is full. After you press a key, the second screenful of the list appears. This continues until all of the directory entries are displayed or until you press CTRL+C to stop the operation. You can also use the /w and /p options together. This option combination displays directory lists in wide format, one screenful at a time. .RT Creating a Directory You can create a directory by using the mkdir (md) command. You can create a directory under your current directory, or you can create a directory in a specified drive or location. MS OS/2 always creates the root directory (\) for you. But most users will require additional directories to store system and user files. You can create additional directories that branch out from the root directory into a multilevel directory structure. Directories created within other directories are sometimes referred to as subdirectories. Creating a Directory in the Current Directory To make a subdirectory in your current directory, type mkdir or md followed by the name of the new directory. For example, to create a new directory named INVOICE under the FINANCE directory, go to the FINANCE directory and type the following: md invoice If you now type dir, you'll see INVOICE listed as a directory: INVOICE <DIR> 6-1-89 4:44p Creating a Directory in a Specified Location You can also make a new directory anywhere you choose. This means that even if you are in the INVOICE directory on drive C, you can make a new directory named LETTERS on drive A. Just specify the drive and path of the new directory after the mkdir command, as follows: md a:\letters This creates a new directory on drive A named LETTERS. Creating Multiple Directories To save time, you can create more than one directory at once. For example, to create the SUPPLIES directory within your current directory and the EXPENSES directory within the root directory on drive A, type the following: md supplies a:\eexpenses This creates two directories: one on your current drive and one on drive A. If the mkdir command cannot create both directories, it displays an error message telling you which directory cannot be created, but continues to create the other directory. Changing to Another Directory If you want to work in a different directory, you can use the chdir (cd) command to change directories. To change to a subdirectory within the current directory, you type chdir or cd followed by the name of the subdirectory. For example, to change from the FINANCE directory to the INVOICE subdirectory, type the following: cd invoice To change to a directory somewhere else on the directory tree, you must specify the path of the directory. Moving to the Parent or Root Directory You have seen how the dir command uses periods to list the current (.) and parent (..) directories in a directory list. You can easily change to the current directory's parent directory by typing the following: cd .. Each time you type this command, you move one level closer to the root directory. For example, suppose you are in the MEMOS directory, the full path of which is \FINANCE\LETTERS\MEMOS. To return to the \FINANCE directory, type the following: cd ..\.. This takes you out of the MEMOS subdirectory and moves you to the FINANCE directory. You can also combine the periods (..) with directory names to specify a directory. For example, suppose you are in the \LETTERS\WORK directory and you want to change to the \LETTERS\FAMILY directory. You could move up one level by typing cd .. and then type cd family to move down to the right directory. However, an easier way is to combine the two operations in one step, as follows: cd ..\family To quickly change to the root directory, regardless of where you are in the directory structure, type the following: cd \ Removing a Directory The rmdir (rd) command removes a directory. Before you can remove a directory, you must delete all the files in the directory. You must also change to a directory other than the one you want to delete, since the cmd program will not let you delete a directory that you are currently in. For information on deleting, see "Deleting a File," later in this chapter. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note You cannot remove the root directory, and you cannot remove directories that are being used in other sessions. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Removing One Directory To remove one directory, you must be sure that the directory is empty and that you are in a different directory before you type rmdir or rd followed by the name of the directory you want to delete. For example, to delete the directory LETTERS, do the following: 1. If you are in the LETTERS directory, type cd .. to switch to the parent directory. 2. Type del letters\e* to delete all of the files in the directory. A message will appear, asking whether you are sure that you want to delete all files. Type Y to delete all files in the directory. 3. Type rd letters to remove the directory. Removing Multiple Directories To remove more than one directory, type the rd command, then specify each directory you want to remove, as follows: rd letters travel Make sure that each directory you want to remove is empty. If the rd command cannot remove both directories, it displays an error message telling you which directory could not be removed and continues to remove the other directory. Displaying the Contents of a File To display the contents of a data file, use the type command. For example, suppose that you have saved a letter in a file called MEMOJAN type memojan The contents of the file scroll on your screen: TO: John Howard FROM: Elizabeth Johnson SUBJECT: Questionnaires DATE: January 12, 1989 The twenty questionnaires you sent to our department have been completed and are enclosed in the accompanying envelope. Thank you for encouraging us to participate in your survey. We look forward to learning the results! If the file is large, you may want to temporarily stop the text from scrolling on your screen. To do this, press CTRL+S. To resume scrolling, press CTRL+S again. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note If you have a large file that you want to view, you might want to use the more utility instead of the type command. The more utility displays the contents of a file one screenful at a time. For information about the more utility, see Chapter 9, "Using MS OS/2 Utilities." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── You can display more than one file at a time by adding additional filenames after the type command. For example, to display the files MEMOJANand MEMOFEB type memojan The contents of MEMOJANtents of MEMOFEBspecified files, it displays an error message telling you which file could not be found and continues to display the other file. You could also use wildcard characters to display several files. For example, to display the contents of all the files with the extension one after the other, type the following: type * You can also use redirection symbols with the type command. Redirection is a feature that lets you take the output from a command and send it to a file instead of to the screen. For information about redirection symbols, see "Redirecting Input, Output, and Error Messages," later in this chapter. Copying a File You can copy files from one location to another by using the copy command. In addition, copy can combine files and create files. Just specify a source file that will be copied and a destination file that will receive the copy. You can copy ASCII as well as binary files; the default setting is binary. Copying One File to Another To copy the contents of one file to another file, you type copy followed by the names of the source file and the destination file. For example, to copy the contents of the file OLD.TXT to the file NEW.TXT, type the following: copy old.txt new.txt If NEW.TXT does not currently exist, it is automatically created, then OLD.TXT is copied to it. If NEW.TXT does exist, it is replaced by the contents of OLD.TXT. Be careful when you copy the contents of a file to an existing file, since the contents of the existing file will become permanently lost. If you do not specify a directory path when using the copy command, MS OS/2 copies files in the current directory. If you want to specify files in other directories, make sure that you include their directory paths. For example, to copy the contents of OLD.TXT in the current directory to NEW.TXT in drive A, type the following: copy old.txt a:new.txt To copy the contents of a file on drive A called INVOICE.DOC to your current directory and use the same filename, type the following: copy a:invoice.doc Copying a Group of Files You can use wildcard characters to copy a group of files to another group of files. For example, to copy the contents of all of the files in the current directory that have the filename extension .EXE to an identical set of files in drive A, type the following: copy *.exe a: You can also copy a group of files to a specific directory. For example, to copy the contents of all the .TXT files to the LETTERS subdirectory in the FINANCE directory, type the following: copy *.txt \finance\letters There may be times when you will want to copy an entire directory into another directory. For example, to copy all of the files in the current directory into the REPORTS directory in drive A, type the following: copy * a:\reports Be sure the destination directory exists; if it does not, MS OS/2 will create a file called REPORTS in the root directory on drive A, then copy the contents of all the files into that one file. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note If you want to copy the contents of an entire floppy disk onto another floppy disk, use the diskcopy utility, which is described in Chapter 9, "Using MS OS/2 Utilities." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Appending a File to Another File In addition to copying files, the copy command can append one or more files to an existing file or combine them into a new file. To do this, list any number of files as arguments to the copy command. The files to be combined should be separated by plus signs (+), and you can specify a destination file that the combined files will be copied to. (The original files will still exist, unless you have made one of them the destination file.) For example, suppose that you want to combine two files named JANFEB copy jan When the operation is completed, cmd displays the following message: "1 file(s) copied." The plus sign (+) between the files means that the contents of the FEBwill still exist in its original form.) You can combine several files and copy them to another file. So, if you want to add the contents of the files JANcalled WINTER copy jan If you specify a destination file when you append files, the destination file is created and given the current date and time. If you omit a destination file, MS OS/2 combines the files and stores them under the name of the file specified first. You can also combine several files into one file by using wildcard characters. The following command takes all files with the .TXT extension and combines them into one file named COMBIN copy *.txt combin In the following example, each file that has the extension .TXT is combined with its corresponding .REF file. The result in each case is a file with the same filename, but with the extension combined with VIDEO.REF to form VIDEOAUDIO.REF to form AUDIO copy *.txt+*.ref * If .TXT files do not correspond exactly with .REF files, existing files are copied singly to the The following copy command combines all of the files with the extension .TXT and all of the files with the extension .REF into one file named COMBIN copy *.txt+*.ref combin Creating a File In the previous examples, you have seen how to copy files to other files. But the copy command can also copy to a file what you type on the keyboard. You need only to specify con (for console) after the copy command. In MS OS/2, the keyboard is referred to as CON. For example, to create the file MESSAGE.TXT, type the following: copy con message.txt Then press ENTER and type the text of the message. For example, you could type the following: I have just received your shipment of invoices. Thanks for your prompt response. K. P. Smith To end the note and save it in the file, press CTRL+Z followed by ENTER. You will see a message saying "1 file(s) copied," then the command prompt again. If you use the dir command to view the directory entries, you will see that the file MESSAGE.TXT now appears in your directory. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note The copy command has four additional options. The /v option verifies a copy operation, the /a option copies ASCII files, the /b option copies binary files, and the /f option indicates that extended attributes should not be discarded if the destination file system does not support them. For more information on how to use these options, see the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Preserving Extended Attributes In MS OS/2, some applications attach additional information, such as author, application type, and file history, to your files and directories. These pieces of information are called extended attributes and are used by other applications, the file system, or the operating system itself. For example, an application such as Microsoft Excel may look at a file's extended attributes to see if the file is a Microsoft Excel chart. Care must be taken when using the copy command to preserve any extended attributes. When you are simply making a copy of a file, the copy command preserves all extended attributes. However, when you are appending one or more files to an existing file or combining files into a new file, only the extended attributes of the first file specified are preserved. It is possible for a file to have zero length and yet still have extended attributes attached to the file. You can use the copy command to copy a file with zero length; the copy command copies and preserves these extended attributes. If you are copying a file that has extended attributes to a file system that does not support extended attributes, you may want to use the /f option with the copy command. For more information about using the copy command on files with extended attributes, see the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. You may want to use the eautil utility before copying files that have extended attributes. By using the eautil utility, you can split files and their extended attributes into separate files, copy the files, and then join the files together again. For information about the eautil utility, see the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. You can see whether your files have extended attributes by using the dir command with the /n option. If a file has extended attributes, the size of the attributes is displayed in the column before the filename. For example, to see if the files in the LIBRARY directory have extended attributes, type the following: dir /n You'll see a directory list similar to the one that follows. The number in the column before the filename tells you the size of its extended attributes (a zero tells you there are no extended attributes associated with that file or directory). The volume label in drive C is RALPH. The Volume Serial Number is E392:1C15 Directory of C:\LIBRARY 8-02-89 11:02a <DIR> 0 . 8-02-89 11:02a <DIR> 0 .. 8-22-89 2:41p 119202 4 CATALOG.TXT 8-22-89 3:36p 65288 4 BOOKS.TXT 4 File(s) 1646592 bytes free Moving Files and Directories You can move files and directories from one location to another on the same drive by using the move command. You may want to move files and directories when organizing them on your hard disk. Moving a File To move the file SCHEDULE.TXT from the MONTHLY directory on drive C to the HISTORY directory on that same drive, type the following: move c:\monthly\schedule.txt \history In this example, the file is simply moved; its name stays the same. You can, however, move a file to another directory and give it a new name at the same time. Just specify the new filename after the directory name. You can use wildcard characters with the move command to move multiple files or directories, just as you can use them with the copy command. Moving a Directory You can also move a directory and its entire contents to another location on the same drive. Suppose you want to move the UTILITY directory on drive C into the directory OS12. To do this, type the following: move c:\utility \os12 In this example, the UTILITY directory becomes a subdirectory of the OS12 directory. Deleting a File Just as you may want to make copies of files or move files around, you also may want to remove files. When you want to delete a file from a disk, you can use the del or erase command. Deleting One File You can delete one file from a directory by typing del or erase followed by the name of the file. For example, to delete the file OLD.TXT from the root directory in drive A, type the following: del a:\old.txt Use the dir command to verify that the file has been deleted. It is a good idea to go through your directories and delete unnecessary files periodically. Unnecessary files take up valuable disk space. Deleting Multiple Files You can delete more than one file at a time by typing more than one filename on the del command line. For example, to delete the file OLD.TXT from the root directory in drive A, the file OLD2.TXT from the root directory of drive B, and the file OLD3.TXT from the root directory of drive C, type the following: del a:\old.txt b:\old2.txt c:\old3.txt If the del command cannot find one of the specified files, it displays a message telling you which file could not be found and continues deleting the other files. You can also use wildcard characters to delete a group of files. For example, suppose you are closing out your accounts with a particular vendor named New Moon Supplies. Your current directory contains a variety of files that record business transactions with this vendor: budget.jan budget.feb newmoon.inv newmoon.acc newmoon.1 newmoon.2 newmoon report To delete all files starting with the filename NEWMOON, type the following: del newmoon.* Your directory now looks like this: budget.jan budget.feb report Or, to delete all of the files in your current directory, type the following: del * When you try to delete all of the files in a directory, the following message appears: "Are you sure (Y/N)?" If you type Y and then press ENTER, the files will be deleted. If you type N, the files will not be deleted, and you will be returned to the prompt. If you are not sure that you want to delete every file in the directory, you can use the del command with the /p option. With this option specified, cmd prompts you file by file, giving you the option of deleting the file or continuing with the next. Use wildcard characters with care─remember that deletions are permanent. Renaming a File or Directory Occasionally, you may want to change the name of a file or directory. You can use the rename (ren) command to do this. For example, to change the name of the file ADSSPONSORS ren c:\ads You can also rename a group of files. To rename all the files in the current directory that have the extension .TXT so that they have the extension type the following: ren *.txt * When you are renaming files and directories, keep these points in mind: ■ You cannot use rename to move a file to a different drive or directory. ■ You cannot rename a file or directory by using a name that already exists. Changing to Another Drive To change to another drive, you type the drive letter followed by a colon (:). For example, if the current drive is drive C and you want to switch to drive D, type the following: d: This switches to the current directory on drive D. Displaying the Volume Identification Each disk has a volume label, which is a name you assign to the disk during formatting. You might want to give a floppy disk a unique label to help you identify the disk later. Also, if you have set up logical drives, the volume label assigned to each of those drives can describe the contents of the drive (for example, drive D might be called SMITH and drive E be called JONES). If a disk has been formatted using MS OS/2 version 1.2, it also has a volume serial number. This number is a unique number assigned by MS OS/2, and it can be changed only by reformatting the disk. To view the volume identification for your current disk, type the following: vol You can also view the volume identification for a different disk, such as the one on drive A, by typing the drive letter after the vol command: vol a: You can view the volume identification for more than one drive at a time by typing more than one drive letter after the vol command: vol a: c: If the vol command cannot find one of the specified drives, it displays an error message telling you which drive could not be found and continues to display information for the other drive. You can set the volume label by using the label utility, which is described in Chapter 9, "Using MS OS/2 Utilities." Running Programs You can run programs such as applications and utilities from cmd. This section describes how to start a program, as well as how to set up the proper environment to run a program and how to modify standard input (input from the keyboard), standard output (output to the screen), and standard error (error messages). This section also describes what happens when you start different types of programs from cmd. Starting a Program from Cmd When you start a program from cmd, the program runs in a full screen or in a window, depending on the type of program. Use the following information to start a program from cmd and to determine the environment that the program will run in. To start a program from cmd, do the following: ■ At the prompt, type the command that starts the program, followed by any arguments, and press ENTER. For example, suppose that you want to prepare the payroll checks for your employees by using a spreadsheet program named SP. To start the program, type the program's start command, in this case sp, and then press ENTER. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note See your program's manual for the specific command that starts the program. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── After your program starts, the output you see on the screen depends upon the type of program you are running. Some full-screen programs, for instance, can run in a window as well as in a full screen. If you start them from cmd in a window, they run in a window; if you start them from cmd in a full-screen session, they run in a full screen. Presentation Manager applications, on the other hand, run in a window even if you start them from cmd in a full screen. The following list shows the various types of MS OS/2 programs you can run from cmd and what their output looks like depending on where you start them: Program type Started Started from cmd in a full from cmd screen in a window. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Full-screen only Full-scree Full-screen output n output Full-screen or window Window Full-screen output output Presentation Manager Window Window output output DOS Error Error message message In MS OS/2, DOS programs can be run only in the DOS session. Starting a Presentation Manager Application You can start a Presentation Manager application from cmd when it is running in a full screen or in a window. After you type the name of the command and press ENTER, your application starts to run in a new Presentation Manager window. While you are running the application, you will not be able to see the cmd prompt at all, even though cmd continues to run your application behind the scenes. When you quit your application, the application's window disappears and the cmd prompt reappears. Starting a Full-Screen Program That Can Run in a Window Some full-screen OS/2 programs can run either in a full screen or in a window. You can start these programs from cmd in a full-screen session or from cmd in a window. When the program is started from a full-screen session, it takes up the entire screen until you quit the program. When the program is started from cmd in a window, it runs in that same window (not in a new window). After you quit your program, the cmd prompt reappears. Starting a Full-Screen Program That Must Run in a Full Screen Some full-screen OS/2 programs are designed to be started from cmd when it is running in a full screen. If you start the program from cmd running in a window, the program's output appears on the full screen, then switches back to the window after the program is finished running. Many programs display output on the full screen for only a few moments before switching back to the window. If this happens, start cmd running in a full screen and then start your program. Setting the PATH and Other Environment Variables Starting a program from cmd is identical to using commands, except that you must be in the directory where the program is located or you must have set the PATH environment variable to include that directory. The PATH environment variable specifies which directories MS OS/2 will search for programs you start. If you add your program's directory to the search path, MS OS/2 can find and start your program regardless of which directory you are currently working in. You might also need to set other environment variables, such as DPATH, LIB, or TMP, depending on whether your program requires them. For information on setting environment variables, see "Setting Up the Environment," later in this chapter. Starting a Program with the Start Command The start command lets you start a program in a new full-screen session or in a new window (but not in the DOS session). Start provides an alternative to the Desktop Manager, and also lets you start programs from a batch file. Various options to start provide you with different ways to start programs. To start a new program, you type start followed by the name of the program. If you type start by itself, cmd starts running in a new window. You can also specify a program title and options. The start command's options are described in the following sections. If you do not supply options, start will determine the type of program you want to start (full-screen or Presentation Manager) and then start the program in the appropriate session. If you start a program with the start command from a full screen or in a window running cmd, a new window is created for your program (if the program can run in a window). If the program cannot run in a window, a new full-screen session is created to run your program. Once programs start running, you can stop them at any time by pressing CTRL+C. The new program starts in a background session, not in the one you are currently working in. You will need to switch to that session or window before you can view the program or work with it. (See "Starting a Foreground Program," later in this chapter, for an alternate way to make a new program appear on your screen.) Specifying a Program Title To specify a program title for the new program, type the title, enclosed in quotation marks, immediately after the start command. This title will be displayed in the title bar of the window where the program is running, as well as among the programs in the Task List. For example, suppose that you want to start a program called SP and you want to give it the program title "Harris Co. Spreadsheet." To specify the program title when you start the program, type the following: start "Harris Co. Spreadsheet" sp You will see SP start in a window. The title bar and the Task List entry for SP both will say "Harris Co. Spreadsheet." Using Start in Batch Programs The start command is used most often in batch programs for activities such as starting programs during system start-up. If you know that you want a particular program to run every time you start MS OS/2, you may want to use the start command in a start-up program. For more information about batch programs, see Chapter 11, "Using MS OS/2 Batch Programs." For information about start-up programs, see Chapter 14, "Using Start-Up Files in MS OS/2." Causing Cmd to End Automatically By using the /c option, you can cause cmd to end after a program finishes running. Normally, after a program that was started with the start command finishes running, the new session or window that was created does not disappear. When you specify the /c option, the new full-screen session or window closes after the program ends. You can use this option to start a program without keeping an extra copy of cmd running. For example, suppose you want to run the chkdsk utility when you start or restart MS OS/2 and place the status report for drive D in a file named STATUS. You could type the following line in your STARTUP.CMD file: start /c chkdsk d: > c:status If you do not specify otherwise, MS OS/2 will create a file named STATUS on your start-up drive (usually drive C). For more information on STARTUP.CMD, see Chapter 14, "Using Start-Up Files in MS OS/2." If you have put this line in your STARTUP.CMD file, every time STARTUP.CMD is run, the start command starts the cmd program in a new window, runs chkdsk, saves the chkdsk status information in the STATUS file, and then closes the window. You can then view the STATUS file to see the status information for drive D. Starting a Program in a Full Screen To start a program in a full-screen session, you use the /fs option. Some programs are designed to be run only in a full screen. If you start these from cmd running in a window, these programs display their output in a full screen, then switch back to the window, making the output unreadable. The /fs option guarantees that when you start a full-screen program in a window, the program will run in a full screen. Starting a Foreground Program You can start a program that you want displayed on your screen by specifying the /f option. This way, when the program starts, you can see it running in the session or window you are currently working in. Other Options to the Start Command The start command has several other options, which are described in the following list. For details about these options, see the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. Option Purpose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── /k Preserves the new session or window after the program ends. This is the default setting. /n Causes a program to start without first starting cmd. /win Specifies that the program will be run in a window. , /pm Specifies that a Presentation Manager application will be started. /i Causes the newly started copy of cmd to inherit the environment specified in your CONFIG.SYS file. The /i option is described in "Inheriting the Environment of the Session," later in this chapter. /pgm Specifies that the quoted string following this option is the name of the program to be run. Starting a Background Program with the Detach Command To start programs that are not visible on your screen when they run, use the detach command. These background programs are processed, but they do not run in a session. This means that you cannot provide input to them (such as typing commands), and they do not display output. In addition, detached programs do not appear in the Task List. To detach a program, you type detach followed by the name of the background program you want to run. For example, suppose you have a program called archive that you use to make archive copies of some of your files. To run the archive program as a detached program, you would type the following: detach archive c:\archive\olddocs.arc c:\*.doc In this example, the archive program would run as a detached program, and it would copy all of your document files in the root directory of drive C to a file called OLDDOCS.ARC in the ARCHIVE directory of drive C. Once you start a background program, MS OS/2 displays the message "The Process Identification Number is nn" and then displays the cmd prompt again. After the prompt appears, you can continue to type commands and run programs while your background program runs. Programs that can run without user input or that take a long time to run are good candidates for use as background programs. That way, you do not need to have cmd running in a full screen or window just to start one program. It is a good idea to avoid unnecessary full-screen sessions or Presentation Manager windows, because extra sessions and windows slow down the performance of your computer. Since you cannot see the output of a background program, you should redirect the output to a file or device. For example, suppose that you want an alphabetical list of a very large list of names. The following command starts a background program that reads the names from the file NAMES, sorts them, and writes them to the file SORT.DIR: detach sort < names > sort.dir While this is taking place behind the scenes, you can continue to run another program from the cmd prompt displayed on your screen. For a detailed explanation of redirection symbols (>, <, or >) and the pipe ( | ), see "Redirecting Input, Output, and Error Messages," later in this chapter. Setting Up the Environment The environment consists of a collection of variables used by the system. These variables, called environment variables, are user-defined and can be assigned values of your choosing. There are environment variables, such as PATH and DPATH, that are commonly used by programs, and you can also define your own environment variables. When you start a program from cmd, the system searches for the program in the directories specified by the PATH environment variable. Some programs also use the DPATH environment variable, which specifies the data search path to use. If you are a programmer, you might need to set the LIB (library search path) and INCLUDE (include-file search path) environment variables. This section describes how to set up the PATH and DPATH environment variables, as well as how to use the set command. For more information about environment variables, see Chapter 15, "Using MS OS/2 Configuration Commands." Displaying Your Path After you install your program─but before you run it─you may need to modify your PATH environment variable. The MS OS/2 command interpreter, cmd, uses this variable to search for programs that you start from cmd. When you type a command to start a program, cmd first searches your current directory for the program. If it does not find it there, cmd searches the first directory listed by the PATH environment variable, then the second, and so on, until the program is found or all directories listed have been searched. When MS OS/2 is first installed on your system, a default PATH setting is assigned automatically and stored in your environment along with other environment variables. You can view your path by typing the following: path You can also view the values assigned to other environment variables by typing set by itself. You can always run a program if you are already in the directory where the program is installed or if you specify the exact path of the program on the command line. It is usually easier, however, to modify your path so that you can run your program while you are in any directory. Setting Your Path To modify the PATH environment variable, you can use the path command. To use this command, type path followed by the directories that you want in your search path. Separate directory names with a semicolon (;). For example, suppose you want to add the APPS directory to your search path. Your current path is set to the OS2 directory and several of its subdirectories. You can type the following to set the new path: path c:\os2;c:\os2\dll;c:\os2\system;c:\os2\intro;c:\apps Restarting MS OS/2 will remove path assignments made with the path command. In addition to the path command, you can also use the set command to set your search path (described in the following sections). Or, you can set your path by using the set configuration command. See Chapter 15, "Using MS OS/2 Configuration Commands," for information on how to use this command. Setting Up a Data Search Path You can set up a search path for data files by using the dpath command. Just as the path command tells cmd where to locate program files, the dpath command tells programs where to locate data files. A data file is any file not having the file extension .EXE, (in a full-screen session or in cmd running in a window), or .BAT (in the DOS session). For example, to tell MS OS/2 to search for data files first in your current directory and then in the ACCOUNTS directory, type the following: dpath accounts ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note Not all programs use the DPATH variable in their data searches. If it is not used, DPATH is ignored. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Setting an Environment Variable To set environment variables, you can use the set command. You set environment variables by typing set followed by the name of the variable, an equal sign (=), and the value. (For more information on environment variables, see "Setting Up the Environment," earlier in this chapter.) To view your current environment, type set by itself. You will see a list of environment variables and the values that are assigned to them. The form a value takes depends on what the variable is and what it is used for. For example, while the PATH variable requires directory paths, the PROMPT variable requires the special characters that define the way the prompt looks. To define or redefine an environment variable, you type set followed by the name of the variable, an equal sign (=), and the value. If you want to define an environment variable called TEMP and assign the TEMP directory on drive C to it, type the following: set temp=c:\temp If you type set by itself, the TEMP variable appears in the list. In most cases, however, you will want to append, not override, any new values to your existing settings. For example, suppose that your current path looks like this: PATH C:\OS2;C:\OS2\DLL;C:\OS2\SYSTEM;C:\OS2\INTRO Also, suppose that you have just installed a spreadsheet program called SP in the directory APPS, and you want to be able to run your program from any directory. You could add the APPS directory to the search path by typing the existing path, then adding the APPS directory to the end of the list. An easier way, however, is to use a variable in the set command. To append a value to your path, type the following: set path=%path%;c:\apps The %path% variable is replaced by the existing path, and APPS is appended to the end of the list. After you have set your path, verify that it has been added by typing set again. Deleting a Setting To delete the current setting for an environment variable, you type set followed by the name of the variable and an equal sign (=), but you do not type a value to be assigned to the variable. For example, to delete the DPATH environment variable and its current setting from your environment, type the following: set dpath= Inheriting the Environment of the Session To start a new copy of cmd in a window and have it inherit the environment that was set up when you started your system, use the start command with the /i option. Normally, when you type start, the new copy of cmd inherits the environment of the current session. Since you can change the environment at any time by using the path and set commands, your current environment may not be the same as the one that you originally set up in the CONFIG.SYS file. To cause a new copy of cmd to inherit the environment set up in your CONFIG.SYS file, type the following: start /i Cmd starts to run in a new window. Now, if you type set by itself, you will see that the new environment is identical to the environment set in CONFIG.SYS. (For information about environment variables set in CONFIG.SYS, see Chapter 15, "Using MS OS/2 Configuration Commands." For more information about the start command, see "Starting a Program with the Start Command," earlier in this chapter.) Redirecting Input, Output, and Error Messages When an MS OS/2 program runs, it usually receives input and produces output. For example, the output of the dir command is a directory list that is usually displayed on your screen. In addition, if the system encounters errors while running a program, it displays error messages. MS OS/2 programs can receive input from different devices, such as a keyboard, a disk file, or a modem. Similarly, programs can send their output and error messages to different destinations, such as a computer screen, a disk file, or a printer. .AR 19.5P By default setting, MS OS/2 programs receive input from the keyboard and send output to the screen. Information that you type at the keyboard is called standard input, or STDIN, and the information that is sent to the screen is called standard output, or STDOUT. In addition, if the system encounters an error condition, it normally sends error messages to the screen. This is called the standard error, or STDERR. If you want MS OS/2 to have input come from a source other than the keyboard, or have output or error messages sent to a device other than the screen, you can use two powerful features of MS OS/2: redirection symbols and pipes. Redirection symbols (>, <, or >) let you change the way that MS OS/2 deals with input and output. Instead of taking input from the keyboard, for example, you could direct MS OS/2 to access data from a file on your disk. Instead of displaying output on the screen, you could send the program's output or error messages to a printer. Pipes ( | ) let you take the output of one program and use it as the input to another program. The uses of redirection symbols and pipes are described further in the following sections. To keep track of data and to identify files, MS OS/2 uses file handles, and some of these can be redirected. By default setting, STDIN has the value (or handle) of 0, STDOUT has the value of 1, and STDERR has the value of 2. File handles 0 through 9 can be redirected by using the MS OS/2 command interpreter, cmd. File handles 3 through 9 must have been assigned by a program before they can be redirected. Pipes and redirection symbols can be used alone or in combination to change where input is read from and where output and error messages are written to. This lets you redirect input, output, and error messages to a file or device other than the keyboard or the screen. Saving Program Output in a File Instead of displaying messages on the screen, you can have those messages sent to a file on your disk. To redirect the standard output (STDOUT) to a file, you use a greater-than sign (>) in your command. Unless you specify a number before the greater-than sign, the standard output (handle 1) is assumed. This means that > and 1> are equivalent. For example, to redirect the output of the dir command to a file named DIRLIST.TXT, type the following: dir > dirlist.txt Now, if you use the type command to view DIRLIST.TXT, you will see that the directory list appears in the file. If the filename you specify does not already exist, MS OS/2 creates a new file and stores your directory list in it. However, if the filename does already exist, MS OS/2 replaces what is in the file with the new data (the old contents of the file are lost), so be sure not to specify the name of an existing file that you want to keep. Sending Program Output to a Device You can also redirect standard output to a device. For example, if you want to send your directory list to a printer that is attached to your computer's first parallel port (LPT1), type the following: dir > \dev\lpt1 Or, to send your list to a terminal that is attached to your computer's first serial communications port (COM1), type the following: dir > \dev\com1 Remember that your devices must be installed and running properly before you can redirect output to them. Finally, if your program sends output to handles 3 through 9, you can redirect standard output to a file or device by specifying the handle number before the greater-than sign. For example, if you typed myprog 3> outfile, this would take any output from MYPROG that is sent to handle 3 and send it to OUTFILE. Appending Output to a File If you want to add standard output to a file (instead of replacing the entire file), you can use two greater-than signs (>) to tell MS OS/2 to append the output of the command (such as a directory list) to the end of the file you specify. For example, to append your directory list to an existing file named NEWLIST.TXT, type the following: dir > newlist.txt When you redirect output with two greater-than signs (>), the existing contents of the file are not overwritten. Reading Input from a File If you want your program to read input from a file, use a less-than sign (<) in your command. Unless you enter a number before the less-than sign, standard input (handle 0) is assumed. This means that < and 0< are equivalent. It is often useful to have the input for a command come from a source other than the keyboard, such as from a file. For example, suppose you have a file called NAMESnot in alphabetical order, you could sort the file's contents by typing the following: sort < names The sort utility takes the contents of NAMESdisplays the newly sorted contents alphabetically on the screen. Reading Input from One File and Saving the Output in Another You can have a program both read input from a file and save output in another file by combining redirection symbols. For example, to sort the addresses in the client list in ADDRESSCLIENTS.ADD, type the following: sort < address Thus, ADDRESSthe output. Saving Error Messages in a File By default setting, MS OS/2 displays error messages (STDERR) on your screen. It is sometimes helpful, however, to store them in a file. That way, you have a permanent record of any errors you encounter while running a program. Suppose you are planning to copy all of the files on drive C that contain the filename extension .TXT to drive A. To do this and to create a file to hold the error messages that may appear while the files are being copied, type the following: copy *.txt a: 2> logfile.mes Any error messages that the operating system sends out during the copying operation are now stored in the file LOGFILE.MES. If you use the type command to view LOGFILE.MES, you will see the error messages that would normally be displayed on your screen. In this case, the message might be "SYS0002: The system cannot find the file specified." You must use the number 2 before the redirection symbol to specify that the error messages, not the command's output, are redirected to LOGFILE.MES. Sending Both Output and Error Messages to One File If you want your log file to contain both standard output and standard error messages, you can redirect them both to the same output device or file. This can be useful when you run a detached program, since you cannot view the output from background programs while they are running. After the detached program finishes running, you can view an output file that contains output and error messages that would normally have been displayed on your screen if the program had been running in a session. For example, if you want to use the dir command to list all of the .TXT files that are on your current drive. To send both the standard output standard output (handle 1) and the standard-error messages (handle 2) to the file LOGFILE.MES, type the following: dir *.txt > logfile.mes 2>&1 In this example, "2>&1" tells MS OS/2 that any output written to handle 2 will have the same effect as if it were written to handle 1. Therefore, the LOGFILE.MES file will contain both the output of the dir command and any error messages. The order of the symbols and arguments in the command is very important here: "2>&1" must follow the name of the file. Sending Output and Error Messages to Different Files If you want output or error messages to be directed to two different files, specify the filenames separately: dir *.txt > outfile.doc 2> errfile.doc Now, any output from the dir command is in OUTFILE.DOC, and error messages are in ERRFILE.DOC. Taking Output from One Program and Sending It to Another Another way you can manipulate input and output is by using pipes. Pipes work by taking the output of one command and using it as the input for the next command. Using pipes saves time, since you can run two, three, or more programs from a single command line. Piped commands are separated by the pipe symbol ( | ). When you use pipes, the first command on the command line runs as usual. The output of the first command is piped (that is, used as input) to the command that follows the first pipe symbol. The second command then runs, using the piped input. This program is repeated until all of the piped commands are processed. By using pipes, you could process the same set of data in several different ways. For example, to view a sorted directory list of the current directory, type the following: dir | sort The dir command is carried out, and the output (the directory list) is piped to the sort utility. Then, the sort utility sorts the output, and the screen displays an alphabetically sorted directory list. Tasks That Use Redirection Symbols and Pipes You can use redirection symbols and pipes to perform many tasks. The following examples show just a few possible uses. Sorting a Directory List and Saving It in a File By combining the pipe and redirection symbols, you can pipe the output of one command to another command and then save the output in a file. A useful technique is to pipe two commands together and send the output to a file. For example, the following command creates a file named DIRECT.LST in your working directory: dir | sort > direct.lst The DIRECT.LST file now contains a sorted list of the working directory. You can also specify a drive other than the default drive. For example, suppose you want to create the file DIRECT.LST on drive B and send the sorted data to it. To do this, type the following: dir | sort > b:direct.lst Printing a Sorted Phone List As you have already seen, you can redirect both the input and the output of a program. It is sometimes useful to print the output of a program. For example, if you wanted to sort a phone list and then print out the sorted list, you could type the following: sort < phone.lst > \dev\lpt1 The contents of the file PHONE.LST first become the input for the sort utility and then become the output to a printer attached to LPT1. Reassigning Standard Input and Standard Output You can assign standard input and output to a different keyboard and terminal. For example, to assign standard input and output to the keyboard and terminal attached to COM1, type the following: cmd < \dev\com1 > \dev\com1 This would allow you to run cmd on your computer from a remote terminal. This is similar to the ctty command in the MS-DOS operating system. Preventing Error Messages from Being Displayed If you do not want error messages to be displayed on your screen, you can redirect them to NUL. Anything sent to NUL is discarded. To send error messages to NUL, type the following: cmd 2> \dev\nul This command starts a new command interpreter (cmd) and sends all error messages to NUL. Piping Several Commands Together You can pipe several commands together. For example, to sort several phone lists and display the sorted output one screenful at a time, you could type the following: type *.lst | sort | more All of the phone lists having the filename extension .LST are sent as output together to be sorted and then displayed one screenful at a time. Chapter 9 Using MS OS/2 Utilities ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Introduction MS OS/2 provides programs called utilities to help you work with directories and data files, maintain disks, print files, change your keyboard layout, and display Help information. Utilities can run in either a full screen or in a window; you can start them from the MS OS/2 command interpreter (cmd) in a full screen, from cmd in a window, or from Desktop Manager. The examples in this chapter assume that you are in a full-screen session and have started cmd. In addition, most of these utilities can run in the DOS session. Chapter 10, "Using the DOS Session," describes which of the utilities in this chapter can be run in the DOS session and which ones must be run in a full-screen or Presentation Manager session. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note All examples of filenames and directory names in this chapter use the file allocation table (FAT) file system, which is the file system used by DOS and MS OS/2 versions 1.1 and earlier. For information on using high-performance file system (HPFS) filenames and directory names, see Chapter 16, "Using the High-Performance File System." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Starting a Utility If you run certain utilities often, you might want to add them to Desktop Manager. That way, you can run the utility directly from Desktop Manager without having to start the cmd program. See Chapter 2, "Running Applications with MS OS/2," for details on how to add programs to Desktop Manager. For more information about running programs and commands from cmd, see Chapter 8, "Running Cmd." You can also start a utility from Desktop Manager, if the utility appears on the list of programs that can be started. Do the following: Mouse ■ Double-click the name of the utility. Some utilities are designed to be run from a full screen. If they are run from a cmd window, these utilities will display their output on the full screen, then they will switch back to the window when the utility is finished running. This may happen so quickly that you won't have time to read the full-screen output. If this happens, switch to a full-screen session and start the utility again. To start a utility from the cmd prompt, do the following: Keyboard ■ At the prompt, type the name of the program you want to start, followed by any command-line arguments, and press ENTER. Getting Help Information To display Help information about warning or error messages that you may see on your screen, use the MS OS/2 Help batch program. Each of these messages consists of a number (for example, SYS1041) and a brief description of the error condition. For a more detailed explanation of the error condition, you type help followed by the message number. For example, suppose that you receive the error message, "SYS0002: The system cannot find the file specified." To see a detailed explanation of this error message, type the following: help sys0002 The message number can be shortened to 0002, or just 2, such that you only need to type help 2 on the command line. A more detailed explanation of the possible problem and the action you might take to correct the problem appear on your screen: SYS0002: The system cannot find the file specified. EXPLANATION: The file named in the command does not exist in the current directory or search path specified. Or, the filename was entered incorrectly. ACTION: Retry the command using the correct filename. Working with Disks MS OS/2 provides the following utilities to help you work with disks: Utility Purpose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── format Formats a disk. diskcopy Copies the contents of a floppy disk to another floppy disk. Utility Purpose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── label Assigns a volume label to a disk. diskcomp Compares the contents of two floppy disks. These utilities are described in the following sections. Formatting a Floppy Disk Before you can use a floppy disk, you must prepare it for use by using the format utility. You can also format a previously formatted disk. Formatting a disk erases all of its contents. Before you format your disk, make sure that you know what type of disk you have and what type of disk drive is in your computer. The following list shows the types of floppy disks that can be formatted with the format utility: Disk size Type ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── 5-inch 360-kilobyte (low-density) 5-inch 1.2-megabyte (high-density) 3-inch 720-kilobyte (low-density) 3-inch 1.44-megabyte (high-density) With the default setting, the format utility will format a disk according to the size and type of drive in your computer. If you do not specify options, and if your computer has a low-density drive, the format utility functions as though you are formatting a low-density disk; if your computer has a high-density drive, format functions as though you are formatting a high-density disk. (If your computer has more than one type of drive, the density level that format sets itself to process will depend on which drive you tell format to use.) Later in this section, you'll learn about options that override the default setting. Formatting a 5-Inch Disk To format a 5-inch disk (low- or high-density) in a disk drive of the same size, you type format followed by the letter of the drive that contains the disk. If you want to format a disk in drive A, type the following: format a: A message will then appear, asking you to insert a floppy disk in drive A and press ENTER, at which point formatting will begin. Usually, disks are given a volume label that identifies the disk. This label can be up to 11 characters in length. After a disk is formatted, the format utility automatically prompts you to type the volume label. Then another message will appear, asking whether you want to format another disk. If you prefer, you can specify the volume label as an argument to format by using the option /v:label after the drive letter. For example, to give the label REPORTS to the disk in drive A, type the following: format a: /v:reports Since you have already specified the volume label, you will not be prompted to type it after the disk is formatted. Although a high-density (1.2-megabyte) drive is designed to format high-density disks, you can also format a 5-inch double-sided low-density (360K) disk by using the option /4. For example, to format a low-density disk in drive B, which is a high-density drive, type the following: format b: /4 ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note This option is designed to format low-density disks that will be used in high-density drives. If you format a disk with the /4 option in a high-density (1.2-megabyte) drive, you might not be able to read that disk in a low-density (360K) drive. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Formatting a 3-Inch Disk The format utility has two options that are used to format 3-inch disks: /t:tracks and /n:sectors. These options are normally used to format disks that are of a lower density than the drive (for example, to format a 720K disk in a 1.44-megabyte drive). The /t:tracks option formats a disk to the number of tracks specified. Tracks is the number of tracks per disk. For 720K and 1.44-megabyte disks, this value is 80. If you do not specify this option, format uses the size of the drive to determine how many tracks the disk should have. The /n:sectors option formats a disk to the number of sectors specified. Sectors is the number of sectors per track. For 720K disks, this value is 9, and for 1.44-megabyte disks, this value is 18. For example, to format a 3-inch low-density (720K) disk in drive A, which is a high-density drive, type the following: format a: /n:9 You cannot do the opposite, however. You cannot format a high-density disk in a low-density drive. Copying a Disk To copy the contents of a floppy disk in one drive (the source drive) to a floppy disk in another drive (the destination drive), you can use the diskcopy utility. If the destination disk is unformatted, diskcopy formats the disk with the same number of sides and sectors per track as the source disk. Use this utility with care, since diskcopy destroys the existing contents of the destination disk. To run the diskcopy utility, you type diskcopy followed by the names of the source and destination drives. The source and destination drives can be the same; if you do not specify any drives, diskcopy uses the current drive as both source and destination. The diskcopy utility prompts you to insert the source and destination disks at appropriate times and waits for you to press a key before continuing. If errors are found on either disk, a message appears on the screen, describing the drive, track, and side where the error was found. After this, the copying operation continues. When it finishes copying the first disk, diskcopy asks you whether you want to copy another disk. The diskcopy utility is most often used to make backup copies of floppy disks. Diskcopy copies an entire floppy disk faster than the copy command does. For example, many applications require you to make backup copies of the installation disk. To do this using diskcopy, insert the installation disk in drive A, and a blank, formatted disk in drive B. Then type the following: diskcopy a: b: Or, if your computer has only one floppy-disk drive, specify drive A as both the source and the destination drive: diskcopy a: a: The diskcopy utility prompts you to insert the source or destination disk at appropriate times. When diskcopy has finished copying the disk, a message appears asking whether you want to copy another disk. The copying is done track by track and produces an identical copy of the original disk. Diskcopy does not work on hard disks, and you cannot run this utility on drives that you have used in the subst or join utility. Also, diskcopy ignores any assignments created by the assign utility, and the source and destination disks cannot be virtual or assigned disks. Certain restrictions apply concerning which types of disks can be copied in certain disk drives. For more information about types of disks and disk drives, see "Working with Disks," earlier in this chapter. Assigning or Changing the Volume Label To assign a volume label to a floppy disk or hard disk or to change the existing label, use the label utility. To use this utility, you type label followed by the drive letter and the label to be assigned to the disk. If you omit the drive letter, the label will be assigned to the current drive. For example, suppose that you want to change the volume label of drive D from APPS to MKTG. Type the following: label d: The current label is displayed, and you are prompted for the new volume label: The volume label in drive D is APPS. Enter a volume label of up to 11 characters or press Enter for no volume label update. Type mktg and press ENTER. If you now type vol d: to view the label, you will see that the label has been changed to MKTG. You can type the volume label on the command line, as follows: label d:mktg No messages are displayed. The prompt appears again after the operation is complete. Comparing Floppy Disks To compare the contents of a floppy disk in the source drive to the contents of a floppy disk in the destination drive, use the diskcomp utility. The comparison is done track by track, and diskcomp automatically determines the number of sides and sectors per track based on the format of the source disk. The source and destination disks must be of the same type. Diskcomp does not work on hard disks. For example, suppose that you receive an update package for a word-processing program. When you are in the middle of making a backup copy of the updated version, you are interrupted, and the floppy disk you have just copied gets mixed in with disks that contain old versions of the program. To determine which disk you just copied, place the update disk in drive A and one of the unknown disks in drive B, then type the following: diskcomp a: b: Or, if your computer has only one floppy-disk drive, specify drive A as both the source and destination drive: diskcomp a: a: The diskcomp utility prompts you to insert the source and destination disks at appropriate times during the disk comparison. If it finds a place where the contents of the two disks are not identical, an error message appears, telling you the side and track that are different. If the disks are identical, a message appears at the end of the comparison, telling you that the disks are identical. After diskcomp is through running, a message appears, asking you whether you want to compare two more disks. Working with Files and Directories MS OS/2 provides the following utilities to help you manage your files and directories: Utility Purpose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── xcopy Copies a directory and its contents to another directory. tree Displays a list of all the directories and files on a drive. attrib Displays or sets the file flags (also known as attributes) of files. The following sections describe these utilities. Copying Directories and Subdirectories To copy an entire directory and its contents, use the xcopy utility. To use this utility, specify a source directory that files will be copied from and a destination where files will be placed. The source and destination can be a drive, directory path, and/or filename. If you do not specify a drive or directory path, xcopy uses the current drive and directory. The xcopy utility has several useful options. These options are described in the following sections. Specifying a Directory or Subdirectory You may want to copy not only the files in a directory, but all of the subdirectories as well. You could copy the files in each subdirectory individually to the destination directory, but this is often very time consuming. An easier way is to use the /s and /e options with xcopy. The /s option copies subdirectories unless they are empty; /e copies subdirectories that are empty. Together these options enable you to copy the files in the specified directory in addition to the files in all of the subdirectories. You must specify both options in order to copy all of the subdirectories. To see how these options work, suppose you have a directory named OS12, which has the following subdirectories and files: OS12 ________|________________________________________ | | | | BIN BATCH FILE.DOC FILE.BAK | ______|______ | | | MY.EXE SHOW.CMD TELL.CMD If you type the following, you will copy the files in the OS12 directory, as well as the files in the BIN and BATCH subdirectories, to the root directory in drive A: xcopy \os12\*.* /s /e a:\ The xcopy utility preserves the original directory structure as it copies files and directories─the OS12 directory will appear in the root directory of drive A, BIN and BATCH will appear as subdirectories of OS12, and so on. Confirming Each Copying Operation The /p option causes the xcopy utility to prompt you with "(Y/N)?" after displaying the name of each source file and before copying it. To copy the file, type Y for yes. To prevent that file from being copied, type N for no. Verifying Each Copying Operation You can use the /v option to verify that each file is copied accurately. This compares the destination file to the source file to make sure that they are identical. Preserving Extended Attributes In MS OS/2, some applications attach extended attributes (additional information, such as author, application type, and file history) to your files and directories. These extended attributes are used by other applications, the file system, or the operating system itself. For example, an application such as Microsoft Excel may check a file's extended attributes to determine whether the file is a Microsoft Excel chart. The xcopy utility copies a source file's extended attributes to the destination file. You can see if your files have extended attributes by using the dir command with the /n option. If a file has extended attributes, the size of the attributes is displayed in the column before the filename. You may want to use the eautil utility before copying files that have extended attributes to a directory in MS-DOS or MS OS/2 versions earlier than 1.2. By using the eautil utility, you can split files and their extended attributes into separate files, copy the files, and then join the files together again. For information about the eautil utility, see the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. If you are copying a file that has extended attributes to a file system that does not support extended attributes, you may want to use the /f option with the xcopy utility. For more information about using the xcopy utility on files with extended attributes, see the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. Displaying the Directory Tree The tree utility displays the entire directory structure for a drive. To see the names of all the directories on your current drive (starting with the root directory), you type tree without arguments. To see the names of all the directories on a different drive, specify the name of the drive after tree. For example, to see the names of all the directories on drive B, type the following: tree b: A list similar to this one will appear: Directory path listing Path: \ACCOUNTS Subdirectories: APRIL MAY Path: \ACCOUNTS\APRIL Subdirectories: None Path: \ACCOUNTS\MAY Subdirectories: None Since the directory-tree list may be very long, you will probably want to do one of two things when you use the tree utility. You may want to redirect the output to a file, or you may want to use the more utility to view the list one screenful at a time. Redirecting Output to a File Use the redirection symbol (>) to send the directory-tree list to a file. For example, to see the directories on your current drive and redirect them to the file TREE.LST, type the following: tree > tree.lst Then, you can use the type command to view the file TREE.LST or the print utility to print the file. The print utility is discussed in greater detail in "Printing Data Files," later in this chapter. .ET Viewing the Directory Tree One Screenful at a Time If you have many directories, the directory-tree list may scroll on your screen too fast for you to read. To view the list one screenful at a time, you can pipe the output of the tree utility to the more utility as follows: tree a: | more Each time a screenful of information is displayed, you will see the message "-- More --" displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press the SPACEBAR or the ENTER key to display the next screenful. Displaying Filenames You can use the /f option after the drive letter to display the names of the files within the directories on a drive. For example, suppose you want to generate a list of all the files that you currently have on your hard disk. To display a list of the directories and all of the files on drive C, type the following: tree c: /f Displaying and Setting File Flags You can use the attrib utility to display and set file flags, which are special features that a file can have. The following file flags can be set: ■ Read-only ■ Archive .RT You have the option of turning file flags on or off. If the read-only file flag is set, you can read a file but you cannot change its contents. This flag is commonly used to prevent a file from being deleted or changed accidentally. Flagging files with the archive flag allows you to copy only recently modified files to or from a disk with utilities such as backup, restore, and xcopy. Displaying File Flags To see which file flags are set for one or more files, you type attrib followed by the names of the files you are interested in. For example, to see which file flags are set on all of the files in your current directory, type the following: attrib * A file list appears on your screen, containing letters that signify which file flags are set for the file. The flags are followed by the drive, directory path, and filename. The file-flag letters you might see are as follows: ■ If the letter "R" appears, the read-only file flag is set for the file. This means that you can read the file, but you cannot change it. ■ If the letter "A" appears, the archive file flag is set for the file. By default setting, all files have the archive file flag set when they are created or modified. Certain programs, such as xcopy, backup, and restore, can turn off a file's archive file flag after they run. For more information about how the archive file flag works with these programs, see "Setting the Archive File Flag," later in this chapter. To gain a better understanding of how file flags work, suppose that a directory contains the files WORD.LST, ACCOUNTS.OLD, and LETTERyou type attrib *, the following appears on your screen: R C:\WORD.LST A C:\ACCOUNTS.OLD A R C:\LETTER Notice that WORD.LST and LETTERyou can read these files but you cannot change them. ACCOUNTS.OLD and LETTERarchive file flag turned off. To see the file flags for files in the current directory and in any subdirectories, type the /s option as follows: attrib * /s When you type this command, the subdirectory file entries are listed first and the current directory entries are listed last. Keep the following points in mind when you are copying files: ■ When you copy a file by using the copy command, the archive file flag is automatically set for the file you are copying to (the destination file). This is true even if the file being copied (the source file) has its archive file flag turned off. ■ If the source file has its read-only file flag set, this flag is not copied to the destination file. Setting the Read-Only File Flag The read-only file flag determines whether you can write to a file or a set of files. If the read-only flag is set, it prevents a file from being accidentally modified. Use the +r option to set the read-only file flag, and use the -r option to turn off the flag. Suppose, for example, that you have saved permanent personnel records in the database file EMPLOY.DBS. To prevent other users from modifying this file, set the read-only file flag by typing the following: attrib +r employ.dbs When other users type dir to get a directory list, the read-only file flag cannot be seen. However, if they try to use a text editor to modify the file, or if they try to delete the file, they will be prevented from performing the operation. If you later want to update the personnel records, turn off the read-only file flag by typing the following: attrib -r employ.dbs Now this file can be changed or deleted. Setting the Archive File Flag The archive file flag can be used as a control mechanism with the backup, restore, and xcopy utilities. Use the +a option to set the archive file flag, and use the -a option to turn it off. The /m option used with the backup and restore utilities copies only files that have their archive file flag set. The /m option then automatically turns off the archive file flag of the original files after copying them. Thus, if the archive file flag is turned off, the file is not backed up or restored. With the xcopy utility, you can choose to use the archive file flag in doing copying operations. If you use the /a option, only those files with their archive file flags set will be copied. If you choose the /m option, files with their archive file flags set are copied, and xcopy automatically turns off the archive file flags of the original files after copying them. You usually will not need to turn a file's archive file flag on or off. However, there may be times when you want to modify the way that the backup, restore, or xcopy utilities operate on certain files. For example, suppose that each Monday you make a backup disk that contains specific directories by using the backup utility with the /m option. To save time, you decide to copy only essential files to the backup disk. Instead of letting backup find and copy all of the files that have their file flags set, you can use the -a option to turn off the file flags for all of the files that have the extension .BAK. To perform this operation, type the following: attrib -a *.bak This means that the files that have the extension .BAK will not be copied when you use backup to perform the copying operation. For more information about the backup and restore utilities, see Chapter 12, "Maintaining Your System." Working with Data Files MS OS/2 provides the following utilities to help you view and work with data files: Utility Purpose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── more Displays output from a command or utility, one screenful at a time. sort Sorts a file alphabetically or numerically. find Finds a text string in a file. comp Compares two files or sets of files. The more and sort utilities (sometimes called filter commands) take input from a device or file, process the input, and then send it to an output device or file. As such, they are used in conjunction with redirection symbols or pipes. The more and sort utilities must be run from the MS OS/2 command interpreter (cmd)─they cannot be run from Desktop Manager. For more information on redirection symbols or pipes, see Chapter 8, "Running Cmd." Displaying Output One Screenful at a Time To display output one screenful at a time, use the more utility. You can use this utility in two ways: ■ To view the output of a command or utility one screenful at a time ■ To view files one screenful at a time You can either redirect an input file or pipe the output of a command or utility to more. When the first screen is filled, the message "-- More --" appears at the bottom of the screen. Press the ENTER key to display the next screenful of information. To view the output of a command or utility one screenful at a time, redirect the output to the more utility. To do this, you use the pipe (|) symbol. For example, a long directory list often contains more filenames than can appear in a single screen. You can use the more utility to display your directory list one screenful at a time by typing the following: dir | more Other commands and utilities, such as type, display output information that can also be piped to the more utility. For example, suppose that you have a long file, CLIENTS.NEW, that you want to view on your screen. The following command pipes the file to more: type clients.new | more When you type this command, the CLIENTS.NEW file is displayed one screenful at a time. You could accomplish the same thing by redirecting a file as input to the screen, one screenful at a time. To do this, type the following: more < clients.new Sorting Input and Output To sort input or output according to the character found in a specified column, use the sort utility. Most often you would want to sort by the character in the first column─for example, by the first character of the first word on each line─but you can sort by any column you want. The character is sorted based upon its location in the character set you are using. Which character set you are using depends upon the code page that is set up for your system. (See the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference for the character sets of the different code pages.) .ET For the United States character set, the characters are sorted from 0 to 9 and then from A to Z. The sort utility does not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase letters. You can sort files of up to 64K in length. You can use the sort utility in two ways: ■ To sort a file that has been sent as input to sort ■ To sort the output of another command or utility Sorting a File To sort the lines in a file, you redirect an input file to sort. Each line in the file is sorted based upon the character found in the first column, unless you specify a column number. (For more information on how to specify a column number to be used for sorting, see "Sorting by Column," later in this chapter.) For example, suppose that the file INFILE.LST contains the following list of customer names: Draper, John Benson, Clara Wiggins, Bess Peters, Marcus To sort the contents of the INFILE.LST file, type the following: sort < infile.lst The list is then sorted and displayed in this way: Benson, Clara Draper, John Peters, Marcus Wiggins, Bess ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note The sort utility does not permanently change the order of the contents in the original file. For more information about saving the sorted output in another file, see Chapter 8, "Running Cmd." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── .RT If you want to reverse the order so that the file is sorted from Z to A or from 9 to 0, you can use the /r option. For example, if you use this option with INFILE.LST, your sorted file will look like this: Wiggins, Bess Peters, Marcus Draper, John Benson, Clara Sorting Output You can also pipe the output from another command or utility to the sort utility. For example, to sort the directory list for your current directory, type the following: dir | sort You will see your directory list displayed in alphabetical order. 6 File(s) 841728 bytes free Directory of C:\CLUB The volume label in drive C is APPS. The Volume Serial Number is A512:6414 . <DIR> 3-25-89 3:37p .. <DIR> 3-25-89 3:37p ACCOUNT OLD 92 6-25-89 5:52p CAT TXT 120 4-16-89 8:26a LETTER FIL 252 3-20-89 4:10p WORD LST 56 5-10-89 11:16a Sorting by Column You can specify any column to be used for the sorting. The option /+n sorts according to the character in column n. For example, to sort your directory list according to the date it was created or last modified, you could sort according to the date field. Let's say that your date field starts in column 22 of the directory list. To sort by the date field, type the following: dir | sort /+ Your directory list will now appear like this: Directory of C:\CLUB LETTER FIL 252 3-20-89 4:10p . <DIR> 3-25-89 3:37p .. <DIR> 3-25-89 3:37p CAT TXT 120 4-16-89 8:26a WORD LST 56 5-10-89 11:16a ACCOUNT OLD 92 6-25-89 5:52p 6 File(s) 841728 bytes free The volume label in drive C is APPS. The Volume Serial Number is A512:6414 Searching for a String in a File To search for a string in a file, use the find utility. If find locates the string it is searching for, it displays the name of the file followed by the line that contains the string. To use the find utility, you type find followed by any options, the string you are searching for (in quotation marks), and the name of the file to search. You cannot use wildcard characters (* or ?) in a filename specification, and because the find utility is case-sensitive, you must type the string with the exact uppercase and lowercase characters that you want to search for. If you do not specify a filename for the search, standard input is used─this means that, unless input has been redirected from a file or from the output of another program, the find utility reads input from the keyboard. (You terminate keyboard input by pressing CTRL+Z or F6 and then pressing ENTER.) For example, to search for the last name "Smith" in the PHONE.LST file, type the following: find " phone.lst If you are searching for a string that contains quotation marks (for example, "Hi there!" or I said "Hi there!" to Ralph), you must substitute two sets of quotation marks for the single set of quotation marks, as in the following examples: find " there!" test.doc Or find " said " there!" to Ralph" test.doc Although you cannot use wildcard characters to specify filenames to be searched, you can pipe another command to the find utility. For example, if you want to search the files PHONE.MKT, PHONE.ENG, and PHONE.SUP for the name "Smith", pipe the output of the type command to the find utility as follows: type phone.* | find " This way, the find utility searches through three files instead of one. You can also specify more than one file to search by listing each file separately after the search string. Displaying Lines That Do Not Contain a String If you want to search a file and display those lines that do not contain the specified string, use the /v option. For example, suppose that you are searching for client names that are listed in the file CLIENTS.LST. To locate the client names that do not have the string "Past Due" after their names, type the following: find /v "Past Due" clients.lst Displaying the Count of Lines That Contain a String To display the count of lines that contain the specified string, use the /c option. For example, you could find the count of lines that contain the string "Past Due" by typing the following: find /c "Past Due" clients.lst If you specify /c with /v, the find utility displays the count of lines that do not contain the string you typed. Displaying the Line Number To display the line number of any lines that contain a specified string, use the /n option. The /n option causes each line to be preceded by its line number in the file. If you specify /c with /n, the find utility ignores /n. Comparing Two Files To compare one file or set of files with a second file or set of files, use the comp utility. The files can be on different drives or in different directories. To use the comp utility, you type comp followed by the drive, directory path, and filename of both files. If you do not specify a directory path or filename, comp assumes that the files are in the current directory on the current drive. You can use the comp utility in several ways. To compare the contents of drive A with drive C, type the following: comp a: c: To compare the contents of the PROFITS directory on drive A and the PROF directory on drive C, type the following: comp a:\eprofits c:\eprof To compare the contents of two files, \1988\SAMPLE.C and \1989\SAMPLE.C, in different directories, type the following: comp c:\1988\sample.c c:\1989\sample.c To compare the files in the root directory on drive C that have the extension .ASM with the files in the root directory on drive B that have the extension .BAK, type the following: comp c:\*.asm b:\*.bak If the files being compared are of different sizes, comp displays a message telling you of their size differences and then asks you if you want to continue. If you type Y for yes, comp displays the location and contents of any mismatched bytes. After 10 mismatches occur, the comparison stops and you are asked whether you want to compare two more files. An error message appears if comp does not find an endof-file (CTRL+Z) marker in a file. Printing Data Files To print any MS OS/2 data file, you can use the print utility. To use the print utility, you type print followed by a filename. By default setting, print sends the file to the printer that is attached to your computer's LPT1 port. If you want to send the file to a printer that is attached to another port, use the option /d:device. For example, to print the file REPORTparallel printer that is attached to LPT2, type the following: print /d:lpt2 report Remember that LPT2 and the printer that is attached to it must be set up correctly before you can print to it. The print utility can be used by itself or in conjunction with the print spooler, Print Manager. For instructions on how to set up and use the Print Manager, see Chapter 4, "Printing Files." Selecting the Keyboard Layout To select an alternative keyboard layout, use the keyb utility. The keyboard layout defines where the characters in a specified code page will be found on your keyboard. If you have selected and prepared a code page for a country other than the United States, your keyboard layout will be set up for that country. To change to a keyboard layout for a different country, you must use the keyb utility. To use the keyb utility, you type keyb followed by a two-letter country code. For example, to select the keyboard layout for Germany, type the following: keyb gr Make sure that the keyboard country code you select is supported by the code page that is installed. The following list shows the keyboard layouts that are available and the two-letter codes that identify them: Code Keyboard Subcode ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── BE Belgium 120 CF Canada 058 (French) DK Denmark 159 FR France 189, 120 GR Germany 129 IT Italy 141, 142 LA Latin 171 America NL Netherland 143 s NO Norway 155 PO Portugal 163 SF Switzerlan 150F d (French) SG Switzerlan 150G d (German) SP Spain 172 SU Finland 153 SV Sweden 153 UK United 166, 168 Kingdom US United 103 States The subcode specifies a keyboard layout for countries that have more than one keyboard layout. Subcodes are associated with enhanced keyboards only. Because France, Italy, and the United Kingdom have more than one enhanced keyboard, the subcode allows you to select the keyboard you want. Turning ANSI Support On or Off The ansi utility turns the ANSI extended screen and keyboard support on or off. If ANSI support is turned on, a program that you are using (or creating) can use the ANSI escape sequences. An ANSI escape sequence is a series of characters (beginning with an escape character or keystroke) that you can use to define MS OS/2 functions. For more information about ANSI escape sequences, see Chapter 17, "Using MS OS/2 Device Drivers," and Appendix A, "ANSI Escape Sequences." By default setting, ANSI support is on. To turn ANSI support off, type the following: ansi off To turn ANSI support back on, type the following: ansi on To turn ANSI support on in the DOS session, install the device driver ANSI.SYS by including the following line in your CONFIG.SYS file: device=c:\os2\ansi.sys For more information about ANSI.SYS, see Chapter 17, "Using MS OS/2 Device Drivers." Chapter 10 Using the DOS Session ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── In addition to the full-screen session and the Presentation Manager session, MS OS/2 provides another working environment, called the DOS session. If you are familiar with DOS and DOS applications, you will find that the DOS session operates much the way the DOS operating system does. As the name implies, the DOS session is like having the DOS operating system installed and running on your computer. You can use files, disk drives, printers, and serial devices just as if you were running DOS, as well as run DOS applications, such as Microsoft Works or Microsoft Windows. In addition, many of the MS OS/2 commands and utilities described in Chapter 8, "Running Cmd," and Chapter 9, "Using MS OS/2 Utilities," can be run in the DOS session. Since DOS uses the FAT file system exclusively, programs written for DOS may encounter problems when they attempt to access files and directories that use HPFS naming rules. DOS programs generally will not recognize these names and will be unable to access the files. For details on how HPFS files and directories work with DOS, see Chapter 16, "Using the High-Performance File System." When you are running programs in the DOS session, a command interpreter called command provides the interface to MS OS/2. Command reads information that you type at the command prompt and translates it into something your computer can use. This chapter describes the DOS session and command. Specifically, it describes how the DOS session starts up and is initialized, as well as how to do the following: ■ Switch to the DOS session ■ Start DOS programs ■ Run commands from command ■ Run utilities from command You will also find lists of the MS OS/2 commands and utilities that can and cannot be run in the DOS session. How the DOS Session Starts Whenever you start MS OS/2, it reads the CONFIG.SYS file. This file contains statements that set up the DOS, full-screen, and Presentation Manager sessions. To start the DOS session, MS OS/2 runs the DOS command-interpreter program that is specified by the shell configuration command. By the default setting, the command interpreter is command. Other configuration commands in CONFIG.SYS customize the DOS environment; these are listed in the following section. After the DOS session starts, you will see it represented by the DOS icon in the Presentation Manager session. Configuring the DOS Environment During installation, a default DOS environment is set up for you. You can modify this environment by editing your CONFIG.SYS file. The following configuration commands affect the DOS environment: Command Purpose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── shell Specifies the DOS command interpreter. rmsize Sets up the amount of memory reserved for DOS programs. break Sets up CTRL+C checking. fcbs Specifies the number of open file-control blocks. device Sets up devices used in the DOS session. protectonly Enables or disables the DOS session. For more information about using these configuration commands, see Chapter 15, "Using MS OS/2 Configuration Commands." Also see "Using a Mouse in the DOS Session," later in this chapter, for information about setting up a mouse for the DOS session. Running AUTOEXEC.BAT The first time you switch o the DOS session, command, the DOS command interpreter, automatically searches for a batch file called AUTOEXEC.BAT in the root directory of the drive from which you started MS OS/2. (Note that batch files run in the DOS session must have the filename extension .BAT, not the .CMD extension that batch files run under the MS OS/2 command interpreter, cmd, must have.) If it does not find the AUTOEXEC.BAT batch file, MS OS/2 runs the date and time commands. If AUTOEXEC.BAT is found, it starts to run. By placing batch commands in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file, you can run commands and utilities, and you can customize the DOS session. Like other batch files in the DOS session, AUTOEXEC.BAT can contain the following: ■ Command commands ■ MS OS/2 utilities ■ Batch commands .ET Typically, the AUTOEXEC.BAT file sets up environment variables and other features. For example, you can specify a search path for the DOS command interpreter, command, by using set path= in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file. You can also add commands to AUTOEXEC.BAT in order to perform specialized functions. In the following example, the AUTOEXEC.BAT batch file makes your command prompt the name of the current directory followed by the greater-than sign (>). It then sets your path, instructing command to search the current directory first, the BIN directory on drive C second, and the OS2 directory on drive C third. Finally, the AUTOEXEC.BAT file switches you to the OS2 directory on your C drive. @echo off prompt = $p$g set path=c:\bin;c:\os2 c: cd \os2 The @echo off command at the beginning of the file prevents the commands from being displayed on the screen as they run. Switching to the DOS Session Whenever you start MS OS/2, the DOS session is automatically started for you. To work in the DOS session, you must switch to it. The following are two ways to switch to the DOS session from Presentation Manager: Mouse ■ If you are using a mouse, double-click the DOS icon. Or Keyboard ■ If you are using the keyboard, use the Task List. .RT For information on using the Task List and switching between sessions, see Chapter 2, "Running Applications with MS OS/2." After you switch to the DOS session, the screen clears and the DOS command interpreter, command, displays a prompt. From this prompt, you can start programs, commands, or utilities. Switching from the DOS Session Once the DOS session is started, you cannot quit it. The command program started by the system will continue to run, even if you type exit. To run a program in a full-screen or Presentation Manager session, you must switch out of the DOS session. To switch out of the DOS session, you can do one of the following: ■ Press ALT+ESC to switch to another session. Or ■ Press CTRL+ESC to use the Task List. When you switch out of the DOS session, any DOS programs that are running will stop until you switch back to the DOS session. However, full-screen or Presentation Manager programs that are running will continue to run when you are in the DOS session. Starting a DOS Program To start a program from the DOS command interpreter, command, you type the name of the program at the prompt and press ENTER. Remember that not all programs can run in the DOS session. For example, Presentation Manager applications and many full-screen OS/2 programs cannot run in the DOS session. If you try to run a Presentation Manager application in the DOS session, you will receive the following message: This program requires OS/2 Presentation Manager. Or, if you try to run an application that is meant to run from the MS OS/2 command interpreter, cmd, you will receive this message: This program cannot be run in DOS mode. In either case, switch to the appropriate session before running your program. You can also add a DOS application to a group window in Desktop Manager and start the application from there. For information about adding an application to Desktop Manager, see Chapter 2, "Running Applications with MS OS/2." Also, while the DOS session operates much like the DOS operating system, compatibility problems can exist with some DOS applications that are run in the DOS session. Read your application's manual for information about which MS OS/2 environment is required to run the program. Managing Memory in the DOS Session Certain DOS-application manuals may recommend that you install a disk cache or virtual disk to improve performance. If you plan to run these applications in the DOS session under MS OS/2, keep the following points in mind: ■ The disk-cache program, SMARTDrive, is not supported in MS OS/2. To set up disk caching, use the diskcache configuration command in your CONFIG.SYS file. ■ The virtual-disk program, RAM disk, is not supported in MS OS/2. To set up a virtual disk, use the device configuration command in your CONFIG.SYS file to load the VDISK.SYS device driver. For information on setting up the MS OS/2 disk cache, see Chapter 15, "Using MS OS/2 Configuration Commands." For information on installing the VDISK.SYS device driver, see Chapter 17, "Using MS OS/2 Device Drivers." Also read your application's manual for additional information concerning memory management with MS OS/2. Setting Hardware Features in the DOS Session The DOS session runs independently of the full-screen and Presentation Manager sessions. Features such as hardware settings made with the mode utility are in effect only while you are running the DOS session. If you switch to a full-screen session or to Presentation Manager, the DOS settings will not be in effect. Using a Mouse in the DOS Session If you want to use a mouse in the DOS session, make sure that you have specified the proper mouse driver in your CONFIG.SYS file. In addition, some applications require you to specify an additional device driver called EGA.SYS. For instructions on how to specify these device drivers in the CONFIG.SYS file, see Chapter 17, "Using MS OS/2 Device Drivers." Running DOS TSR Programs Terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) programs that are designed to run in DOS (for example, thOS/2. Once started, these programs remain active while you ar session, but they become inactive when you switch to a full-screen session or to Presentation Manager. These programs can occupy a large amount of memory, and compatibility problems can exist if they are run in the DOS session. Be sure to read your program's manual for instructions and restrictions concerning MS OS/2. Using a DOS Command The DOS command interpreter, command, like the cmd program, has a set of built-in commands. These commands let you work with files, directories, and devices. The following is a list of the commands you can use in the DOS session: break chcp chdir cls copy date dir exit set time type ver verify vol del (erase) mkdir (md) path prompt rename ren) rmdir (rd) Most of these commands are identical to those found in cmd and are described in Chapter 8, "Running Cmd." Certain commands, however, may display slightly different on-screen messages when they run in the DOS session. And, when you run them from command, the following commands do not accept multiple drives or filenames: del (erase) dir mkdir (md) rmdir (rd) type vol The break command is the only command found in the DOS command interpreter, command, that is not found in the MS OS/2 command interpreter, cmd. For a description of the break command, see the following section, "Setting CTRL+C Checking." Setting CTRL+C Checking The break command lets you set CTRL+C checking. Normally, MS OS/2 checks to see whether you have pressed CTRL+C only while it is reading from your keyboard or while it is sending something to your screen or printer. You can use the break command to turn CTRL+C checking on or off. If the break command is turned on, CTRL+C checking is turned on while the system performs additional functions, such as disk reading and writing. (By default setting, CTRL+C checking is turned off.) To find out what the current setting is for the break command, type the following: break To turn CTRL+C checking on, type the following: break on To turn CTRL+C checking off, type the following: break off Some programs may internally set CTRL+C checking. The break command does not affect these programs. You can also set CTRL+C checking by placing a break configuration command in your CONFIG.SYS file. For more information about setting CTRL+C checking, see Chapter 15, "Using MS OS/2 Configuration Commands." Running a Utility in the DOS Session Most of the utilities that you can run in the MS OS/2 command interpreter, cmd, you can also run in the command program. The following utilities run in both cmd and command: attrib chkdsk comp diskcomp help label replace sort tree unpack diskcopy find format mode more xcopy patch print recover These utilities are described in Chapter 9, "Using MS OS/2 Utilities," and Chapter 12, "Maintaining Your System." Certain on-screen messages may differ slightly if a utility is run in the DOS session; this does not affect the utility's usage or function. The patch, replace, and unpack utilities are described in the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note You can run the print and mode utilities in the DOS session and in a full-screen session. However, the way you run the commands differs between the two sessions. For more information, see the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The following utilities can be run only in the DOS session and are described in the following sections: append assign graftabl join setcom40 subst Reassigning Paths and Drives To change how MS OS/2 accesses data and drives, you can use the append, assign, join, and subst utilities. For example, certain applications may require that you set the data path, much the same as you set the PATH environment variable. Or, you might want to change drive or directory-path assignments to make working with a particular drive or directory path easier. Setting a Data Search Path To set a data search path in the DOS session, use the append utility. Unless you specify a particular directory path on a command line, MS OS/2 searches only your current directory for data files. With the append utility, you can specify the additional directories to be searched for data files. MS OS/2 will first search the current directory for a data file, then search the directories that you have specified with the append utility. This can be useful if you have data files located in different directories or located across a network. Using the append utility to set a data search path and store it in the environment requires two steps. First, type the following: append /e The /e option can be used only the first time you use the append utility. This option stores append as an environment variable. If you do not want to store append in the environment, omit this step. Second, type append followed by the directory paths that you want to add to the data search path. For example, to use the TEST directory on drive A and the SAMPLE directory on drive C as the data path, type the following: append a:\test;c:\sample You use a semicolon (;) to separate individual directories. The append command must not contain more than 128 characters. To display the data search path, you type append by itself. In the preceding example, if you type append, the following will appear on your screen: APPEND=A:\eTEST;C:\SAMPLE When you want to restore the data path to the default setting (which searches only the current directory for data files), type the following: append; To see how append might be used, suppose that you have customerinformation files stored in the directories CUST1 and CUST2 on drive C, and in the directory CUST3 on a floppy disk in drive A. You could set up your data search path by typing the following: append /e append c:\cust1;c:\cust2;a:\cust3 Now, if you want to display the contents of the SMITH.ACC file, which is in one of these three directories, type the following: more < smith.acc MS OS/2 searches the current directory for the file SMITH.ACC. If it doesn't find the file, MS OS/2 searches the CUST1, CUST2, and CUST3 directories in the order they are listed. If MS OS/2 finds the file in any of those directories, it displays the contents of the file one screenful at a time. Assigning a Drive Letter to Another Drive To assign a drive letter to another drive, you can use the assign utility. Some applications require that you put your disks in a floppy-disk drive. If you prefer to use a hard disk for your data files, you can use the assign utility to assign the floppy-disk drive letter to the hard-disk drive. So instead of reading from and writing to the floppy-disk drive, such as drive A, you can assign drive A to drive C. Then, when you request drive A, you will actually get drive C. To use the assign utility, you type assign followed by the drive letter you want to reassign and the letter of the drive you want to assign the first drive to. Separate the two drive letters with an equal sign (=). For example, to assign drive A to drive C, type the following: assign a=c Now, if you type dir a:, you will actually see a directory list for the current directory on drive C. To reset all drives to their original assignments, type the following: assign ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note If you plan to use both the assign utility and the append utility, you must first set the data path by using the append utility. You could do this, for example, by including an append statement in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Since the assign utility disguises the true device type, you should not use assign with commands and utilities that require drive information, such as label, join, subst, and print. The format, diskcopy, and diskcomp utilities ignore drive reassignments. Joining a Drive to a Directory Path To give a drive the name of a directory on your current drive, use the join utility. Once you have done this, you no longer access files and directories on the "joined" physical drive with a separate drive letter. You use only the directory name to access that drive now joined to the directory. To use this utility, you type join followed by a drive letter and the path of the directory that will be associated with that drive. The drive letter you specify must already exist. You cannot join a drive if it is being used by another program. For example, if you want to refer to drive D as the DATA directory on drive C, type the following: join d: c:\data If the directory does not exist, MS OS/2 creates it. The directory you specify must be empty, and it must be a subdirectory, not the root directory. Now, if you type dir c:\data, you will see the contents of the root directory on drive D. You can also type join without arguments to see the drives and directories that are currently joined. To disable the connection between drive D and the DATA directory, use the /d option, as follows: join d: /d The following utilities do not work on drives used in the join utility: chkdsk diskcomp diskcopy format label recover Keep in mind that once you have used the join command to join a drive, MS OS/2 will display an error message if you try to use that drive letter. You must restore the drive by using the /d option before you can refer to the drive again. Substituting a Drive Letter for a Path You can substitute a drive letter for a directory path with the subst utility. After you have substituted a drive letter for a directory path, you can refer to the substituted drive just like a physical drive. When you request the substituted drive, MS OS/2 will replace it with the directory path you have assigned to it. To see what substituted drives are currently in effect, you type subst without options. To set up a new substituted drive, you type subst followed by the drive letter and then the directory path that the drive letter will substitute. For example, to substitute drive Z for the directory path \ACCOUNTS\PAYABLE on drive C, type the following: subst z: c:\accounts\epayable Now, if you type dir z:, you will see the contents of the PAYABLE subdirectory of the ACCOUNTS directory on drive C. To delete a drive substitution, use the /d option, as follows: subst z: /d The following commands do not work on drives created by the subst utility: chkdsk diskcompdiskcopy format label recover Displaying Disk Status from the DOS Session The chkdsk utility displays status information about a disk and scans it for errors. You can run chkdsk from either cmd or command. While the command form you use to start the utility is the same for both, you receive additional information about the DOS session if you run chkdsk from command. In addition to disk-status information, you receive DOS storage information, as in the following example: [DOS mode storage report] 655328 bytes total storage 535024 bytes free The "bytes free" line tells you the amount of available memory in the DOS session to run other applications. The "bytes total storage" line tells you how much memory is reserved for the DOS session. With the default setting, 640 kilobytes are reserved. You can change the amount that is reserved by using the rmsize configuration command. For more information about setting the amount of memory for DOS applications, see Chapter 15, "Using MS OS/2 Configuration Commands." Enabling an Extended Character Set To load an extended character set in the DOS session, when your computer's graphics adapter is operating in graphics mode, use the graftabl utility. To load an extended character set, you type graftabl followed by a three-digit number that identifies a code page. You can specify any one of the following code pages: Code page Extended character set ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── 437 United States (default setting) 850 Multilingual 860 Portuguese 863 Canadian French For example, to load the Canadian French extended character set, type the following: graftabl 863 To display the current extended character set, along with a list of graftabl options, type the following: graftabl ? To display the current extended character set, type the following: graftabl /status To display the current extended character set and load the default extended character set (code page 437), type the following: graftabl For more information about setting up code pages, see Chapter 15, "Using MS OS/2 Configuration Commands." Setting COM-Port Availability To make a serial port available to a DOS program, use the setcom40 utility. Some DOS applications use a particular area in memory to determine the presence of the serial ports COM1 and COM2. The COM01.SYS or COM02.SYS device driver places zeros in these locations to prevent DOS-session programs from using these ports. You should use the setcom40 utility if you have used the device configuration command to install COM01.SYS or COM02.SYS (or an equivalent device driver). The setcom40 utility sets the appropriate address for the serial port before starting a program in the DOS session that uses the port. To use this utility, you type setcom40 followed by the name of the serial port you want to use, then specify whether you want to turn serial-port availability on or off. For example, suppose you have a serial printer attached to COM1 and have installed COM01.SYS. If you want to use a DOS-session program to print a file using that printer, type the following: setcom40 com1=on Suppose you also want to add an extra terminal to COM2. To do this, type the following: setcom40 com2=on Now, both COM1 and COM2 can be used by DOS programs. When you no longer need to use the printer, type the following: setcom40 com1=off When using serial ports in the DOS session, keep the following points in mind: ■ The setcom40 utility does not affect settings made with the mode utility. ■ Programs that are running in the DOS session should not use serial ports that are being used in a full-screen or Presentation Manager session, or serial ports that are being used by Print Manager. ■ If a program is using serial ports in the DOS session, it is important to end the program before switching out of the DOS session. ■ Two types of DOS-session programs may have problems using serial ports─those that use intermittent hardware interrupts and those that are time-dependent. In addition, some BASIC programs will interfere with the port even when they are not sending input to it or receiving output from it. For more information about COM0x.SYS device drivers, see Chapter 17, "Using MS OS/2 Device Drivers." Chapter 11 Using MS OS/2 Batch Programs ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Introduction Once you know how to run MS OS/2 commands, you can create your own programs to carry out complex or specialized tasks. With MS OS/2, you can combine commands and programs into a single program called a batch program or batch file. With batch programs, you can do the following: ■ Run several commands from one batch program ■ Carry out the same batch program with different data You can use batch programs to simplify a series of repetitive tasks, thus reducing the amount of typing you need to do. Or you can create custom commands designed for your particular work needs. You might, for example, need to copy different directories on a regular basis from your hard disk to a backup floppy disk. Instead of copying each directory separately by typing five copy commands at the prompt, you could type the name of the batch program once and let it do the five copying operations for you. A batch program consists of one or more lines of instructions that the command interpreter (cmd or command) reads and processes one at a time. As each line is processed, it is displayed (echoed) on your screen. (Later in this chapter you will learn how to prevent each line from being echoed.) The first sections of this chapter demonstrate how to build a simple batch program to perform a series of tasks. In later sections, you will learn how to improve and enhance this program with advanced batch-programming techniques. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note All examples of file and directory names in this chapter are for the file allocation table (FAT) file system, which is the one used by DOS and MS OS/2 versions 1.1 and earlier. If your batch files contain file or directory names that use high-performance file system (HPFS) naming features, you must enclose those names in quotation marks. For more information on using (HPFS) file and directory names, see Chapter 16, "Using the High-Performance File System." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Running a Batch Program To run your program, you type the name of your batch file, without the extension, then press ENTER. For example, if your batch file is named SPECIAL.CMD, type special in an OS/2 session to run the batch program. If the batch file is named SPECIAL.BAT, type special in the DOS session. If you want to stop your program before it finishes running, press CTRL+C. Using Batch Commands There are two types of batch programs: those that are run from an OS/2 session and those that are run from the DOS session. Batch programs that are run from an OS/2 session have a .CMD filename extension. These programs can contain MS OS/2 batch commands, cmd commands, MS OS/2 utilities, and programs that can be run from the MS OS/2 command interpreter, cmd. Batch programs that are run from the DOS session have a .BAT filename extension. These programs can contain MS OS/2 batch commands, command commands, MS OS/2 utilities, and programs that can be run from the DOS command interpreter, command. Batch commands give you control over how your commands are carried out. They also let you send or display messages, set variables, and use replaceable parameters (described later in this chapter). The MS OS/2 batch commands are as follows: Command Purpose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── call Calls one batch program from another batch program. echo Turns the echo feature on or off. endlocal Restores the drive, directory, and environment settings that were in effect before the setlocal command was used. extproc Defines an external batch processor for a batch program. for Performs a command for a set of items. goto Causes processing to continue at the line after a specified label. Command Purpose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── if Performs a command based on the result of a condition. pause Suspends processing of the batch program temporarily. rem Adds remarks to a batch program. setlocal Defines drive, directory, and environment variables that are used during batch-program processing. shift Changes the position of the replaceable parameters in batch-program processing. The endlocal, extproc, and setlocal commands can be used only in an OS/2 session; the rest of the batch commands can be used in OS/2 sessions and in the DOS session. The echo and for commands can be typed at the command prompt as well as be placed in batch programs; all other batch commands can be used only in batch programs. Creating Simple Batch Programs You create a batch program by typing commands in a file by using System Editor or any other text editor. Batch programs that you run from cmd, the MS OS/2 command interpreter, must have the filename extension .CMD. Batch programs in the DOS session must have the .BAT filename extension. Most of the filename examples used in this chapter have the .CMD extension. However, if you rename the files so that they have the .BAT extension, the sample batch programs will run in the DOS session. You run a batch program by typing the name of the batch file. (You do not need to type the extension.) The examples in this discussion have been simplified as much as possible to illustrate batch-programming commands and techniques. When you write a working batch program, however, you will probably want to embellish it with commands that provide error checking and commands that provide helpful information for the user. The simplest batch programs usually run utilities and display messages on the screen. They perform the same function that you would perform if you typed a series of commands at the command prompt. For example, the following is a simple batch program called Myprompt, stored in the batch file MYPROMPT.CMD: @echo off rem This is a simple batch program prompt The current time is $t$h$h$h$h$h$h$_$p This program changes your prompt so that it displays the time, the current drive, and the directory. (The $h characters remove the seconds and hundredths of seconds from the time display.) To run this program, type the following: myprompt The first line, "@echo off", is found in most batch programs. It prevents each batch command from being echoed on your screen as it is being processed by the command interpreter. The second line, "rem This is a simple batch program", is a comment statement used to add notes to batch files. The command interpreter does not process rem statements when echoing is turned off, so you are free to add whatever comments you want to your batch programs. The next line, "prompt", is the MS OS/2 command you use to change the command prompt in the current session. By placing this command in a batch file, you only have to remember or look up the options once. It is a good idea to remove blank lines from batch files, since each blank line will cause the command prompt to be displayed when the program is run. Setting Up Your Environment with a Batch Program One common way to use batch programs is to set up your environment. For example, you can set environment variables such as PATH and PROMPT in an initialization file. Suppose you want to create a system initialization file called OS2INIT.CMD. You want to set the OS/2 session environment variable TMP in this file, as well as switch to your HOME directory and start the SP spreadsheet program in the current session. OS2INIT.CMD would look like this: @echo off set TMP=c:\tmp cd \home start /f sp You could type these commands at the command prompt each time you start MS OS/2, but putting them in a batch file will save you time and effort. Displaying a Message with a Batch Program The following example creates a batch program that displays the message, "Use echo to display a message." Use System Editor or another text editor to create a file named SPECIAL.CMD, and then type the following: @echo off rem This program displays a message echo Use echo to display a message. You can use the rem batch command to add comments to your program. Any text after rem that is on the same line is treated as a comment. If the echo feature is on, rem commands are displayed as your program runs; if echoing is turned off (as in this example), no text is displayed. The @echo off command turns off the echo feature (the default setting has this feature turned on). This prevents the commands from being displayed on the screen as they are processed. The at sign (@) prevents the string "echo off" from being displayed as it turns the feature off. The @echo off command is often used at the beginning of batch programs to prevent unnecessary output from cluttering up your screen. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note When you are running a batch program in an OS/2 session, you can also turn echoing off by typing the /q option as an argument to the command that starts your batch program. For this reason, do not use /q as an argument to any command in your batch file. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── When echoing is off, you can use the echo command to display the text that follows it on the same line. You might want to display messages in your batch program to inform yourself or other users of what is taking place as the program runs or to inform them of error conditions that have occurred. Creating a Custom Command After using MS OS/2 for a while, you might find that there are commands and utilities that you use on a daily basis. You can create custom versions of these commands that incorporate the options that you always use. As an example, suppose that you work in a complex multilevel directory structure that contains many subdirectories. Also suppose that you must return to your root directory several times a day. To help you do this, you can create a customized version of the cd command. Your version will display the message, "Returning to the root directory", switch you to the root directory on drive C, and display the directory list for the root directory one screenful at a time. To set up this special version of the cd command, type the following lines in a file called HOME.CMD in your root directory: @echo off echo Returning to the root directory c: cd \ dir /p Now, no matter what drive or directory you are in, you only need to type home and MS OS/2 will return you to the root directory on drive C. .ET Performing a Series of Tasks with a Batch Program A common use of batch programs is to perform copying operations to update files or to create backup disks. Suppose that you have specific files in particular directories on a floppy disk that are updated on a weekly basis, and that they then need to be copied to particular directories on your hard disk. Suppose further that the specific files you are interested in are all of the files that contain the extensions .EXE and .LIB and all of the files in your INCLUDE directory, plus the file README.DOC from the root directory. This copying operation involves the following steps: 1. Copy all the .EXE files that are in the NEW directory on your floppy disk to the BIN directory on your hard disk. 2. Copy all the 3. B files in the NEW directory on your floppy disk to the LIB subdirectory of the BIN directory on your hard disk. 4. Copy all the files in the INCLUDE directory on your floppy disk to the INC directory on your hard disk. 5. Copy the README.DOC file from the root directory on your floppy disk to the root directory on your hard disk. You can create a batch program that performs each of these steps by typing the following in a file named TRANSFER.CMD: @echo off rem This batch program copies files from drive A to drive C echo Copying files ... copy a:\new\*.exe c:\bin copy a:\new\*.lib c:\bin\lib copy a:\include\*.* c:\inc copy a:\readme.doc c:\readme.doc .RT The copy commands in the batch file perform the same operations as they would if they were typed on the command line. In this example, the exact files and directories to copy have been specified in the batch file. In later sections, you will see how you can let a user type in arguments to a batch program. To run this program, type transfer and press ENTER. The .CMD extension is optional. You will see the copy command display the files being copied as the copying operation progresses. Copying files ... A:\NEW\MOVE.EXE A:\NEW\TEST.EXE 2 file(s) copied. A:\NEW\SLIBCE.LIB A:\NEW\MLIBCE.LIB A:\NEW\LLIBCE.LIB 3 file(s) copied. A:\INCLUDE\OS2.H A:\INCLUDE\TYPES.H A:\INCLUDE\STDIO.H A:\INCLUDE\OS2DEF.H 4 file(s) copied. A:\README.DOC 1 file(s) copied. .ET Using Advanced Batch-File Techniques In addition to the basic tasks you can perform by using a batch program, there are more advanced techniques that will make your programs more flexible and powerful. For example, you can program your batch file so that it accepts parameters on the command line. You can also set conditions within batch files so that tasks are performed when those conditions are met. This section describes these advanced batch-file techniques. Using Replaceable Parameters The Transfer program used in the preceding section illustrates how one program can perform several copying operations. These operations are fixed, since there is no way to specify which files are copied. But you can also write a batch program that allows you to specify which files to copy. Batch programs can contain a special symbol called a replaceable parameter. This symbol is a percent sign (%) followed by a digit from 0 through 9. The replaceable parameters in a batch program .RT are assigned values when you type the command and options. For example, suppose you type the transfer command followed by three arguments, as follows: transfer \ebin \elib \einc If you use the %0, %1, %2, and %3 parameters in your batch file, %0 will be replaced by "transfer", %1 by "\ebin", %2 by "\elib", and %3 by "\einc". The Transfer program created earlier can be changed so that you can specify on the command line whether you want the files from the BIN, INC, or LIB directories to be copied from a floppy disk in drive A to your hard disk. To accomplish this, you will need three features: the if batch command, the goto batch command, and the pause batch command. Using the If Batch Command The if batch command causes a command to be carried out if a certain condition is true. The if command can have one of the following forms: Form Description ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── if string1==string2 command Compares the character string string1 with string2. If they are the same, command is processed. if exist filename command Checks whether the named file exists. If the file does exist, command is processed. if errorlevel number command Checks the exit code of the command or program that was run just before the if statement. If the command or program returns an exit code that is equal to or greater than the number specified, command is processed. (For information about exit codes, see "Checking the Error Level," later in this chapter.) The if not batch command causes a command to be carried out if a certain condition is not true. For example, if not exist filename command processes command if the filename does not exist. Using the Goto Batch Command The goto batch command directs your program to switch to a different part of the file and continue processing the commands at that point. The goto command has the following form: goto label The way you tell the program what part of the file to switch to is by using a label. The label is any string of characters (which may or may not form a word) that you put in the file, on a line by itself, at the point where you want your program to continue processing commands. For example, goto end will cause processing to continue at the command found after the label ":end". You identify a label in the batch file by typing a colon (:) in front of it. Using the Pause Batch Command The pause batch command temporarily stops your program from running and displays the message, "Press any key when ready . . . ." You can continue running the program by pressing a key, or you can quit the program by pressing CTRL+C. Modifying the Transfer Batch Program The following example shows the usage of the batch commands just described. As you see here, you can modify the Transfer program so that the first argument typed on the command line is used in the batch file: @echo off rem This batch program lets you decide which directory to copy echo Copying files from %1 pause if "%1"=="" goto end if %1==\ebin goto copybin if %1==\einc goto copyinc if %1==\elib goto copylib echo %1: Unknown option goto end :copybin copy a:\bin\*.* c:\bin goto end :copyinc copy a:\inc\*.* c:\inc goto end :copylib copy a:\lib\*.* c:\lib :end The %1 parameter is used in the echo command to display whatever argument you type. The pause command lets you determine whether to continue copying or quit the program by pressing CTRL+C. The program uses the first if command, if "%1"=="" goto end, to check whether you have typed an argument. If no argument is found, the command causes the program to jump to the label ":end". When you are specifying no argument in an if command, you must use quotation marks; if you are specifying an argument, the quotation marks are optional. The next three if commands cause the first argument that you type to be substituted for %1 and compared to the strings "\ebin", "\einc", and "\elib". If a match occurs, the program jumps to the ":copybin", ":copyinc", or ":copylib" label, respectively. After the program has copied the files, the goto command causes the program to jump to the ":end" label. Notice that if you type in an argument other than "\ebin", "\einc", or "\elib" (that is, if none of the if conditions were true), the message "Unknown option" is displayed and the program jumps to the ":end" label. Specifying Multiple Arguments To make your program more powerful, you will probably want to be able to specify more than one argument after the batch program. For example, the Transfer program that you created previously processes only the first argument typed. It ignores any additional arguments. To specify two directories, you could modify the Transfer program to include the following lines: if %1==\ebin goto copybin if %1==\elib goto copylib if %2==\ebin goto copybin if %2==\elib goto copylib Both %1 and %2 would be compared to the strings "\ebin" and "\elib" and sent to the appropriate copy command. But suppose that you want the option of typing up to 10 arguments after the transfer command, with the arguments specified in any order. You would need many if commands to test for every possible combination of arguments. One way to do this is to use the shift batch command. This command lets your program process any number of arguments that are typed in any order. Each time shift is carried out, the program processes the next argument in the file. To see how this works, create a file named DISPLAY.CMD with the following lines: @echo off rem This displays a list of arguments :displayarg if "%1"=="" goto end echo %%1 is now %1 shift goto displayarg :end Then type display followed by a list of numbers for each argument. As it runs, the program will display each number on a line of its own. The statement if "%1"=="" checks to see whether all of the arguments have been read. In this example, two percent signs (%%) are used to display the actual percent character ("%1") instead of the %1 argument. Now you can modify the Transfer program to accept any number of arguments, as follows: @echo off rem Copying multiple directories pause :chkargs echo Copying files from %1 if "%1"=="" goto end if %1==\ebin goto copybin if %1==\einc goto copyinc if %1==\elib goto copylib echo %1: Unknown option goto end :copybin copy a:*.exe c:\bin shift goto chkargs :copyinc copy a:*.inc c:\inc shift goto chkargs :copylib copy a:lib c:\lib shift goto chkargs :end The program compares each argument that the user types to the strings "\ebin", "\elib", and "\einc", as it did before. But the goto statements now direct the program to return to the ":chkargs" label after each argument is processed. Thus, you can type any number of valid arguments in any order, and the effect is the same. Repeating a Task Sometimes, you may want to perform a task on a set of different elements. For example, you may want to type out the contents of three files, or you may want to copy several directories from a floppy disk to a directory on your hard disk. The for statement lets you specify the set of elements that a command will work with. To see its use, type the following lines in a file called COUNT.CMD: @echo off for %%x in (One Two Three) do echo %%x If you now type count, the following appears: One Two Three The for command causes the batch processor to substitute each element in the parentheses, one at a time, for "%%x". (You can use any single character in place of x.) Then the program processes whatever command appears after the do command. In the preceding example, each element in the set (One Two Three) is substituted for "%%x", then "%%x" is echoed to the screen. So the first time through the program, "One" is displayed; the second time, "Two" is displayed; and the third time, "Three" is displayed. Thus, the command takes the place of typing the echo command three times. In a batch file, you must use two percent signs (%%) in front of the x to distinguish a for variable from a replaceable parameter. The following batch file, called BINCOPY.CMD, allows you to copy the contents of up to three directories that are in the current directory to your BIN directory on drive C: @echo off rem Updating %1 %2 %3 for %%x in (%1 %2 %3) do if not exist %%x goto end for %%x in (%1 %2 %3) do copy %%x c:\bin :end The first for command checks to see whether all of the directories exist. It does this by first substituting the arguments that you type for %1, %2, and %3, and then it uses the if not exist command after the do command to check to see that all of the directories do exist. If a directory does not exist, the program ends. The second for command does the actual copying by substituting each argument, one at a time, for the "%%x" in the copy command. Calling Another Batch Program You can run, or call, one batch program from another batch program by using the call command. When the batch processor encounters this command, it passes control to the "called" program. When the program is finished running, control returns to the original program. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note If you start a second batch program from a batch program without using call, the second program will run. However, control will not return automatically to the original batch program after the second program finishes running. You must use the call command if you want control to be passed back to the original program. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── For example, a main batch program could call other batch programs to perform the actual operations. The following short batch program calls the batch file COPY1.CMD if /c is typed as an argument, or it calls the batch file DEL1.CMD if /d is typed as an argument: @echo off rem This batch file calls other batch files if %1==/c call copy1 if %1==/d call del1 The batch files COPY1.CMD and DEL1.CMD perform the actual copying or deleting, then they return control to the original batch file. You cannot use pipes or redirection symbols with the call command. A batch file can call itself, but it should contain a command that ends it so that you do not remain in an infinite loop. Setting Variables in Your Batch Program You have the option of using variables in your batch programs. These variables are saved in your environment just like the PATH environment variable. To set a variable in your batch program, use the set command. For example, to set the variable STDERR to NUL, include the following line in your batch program: set stderr=^>nul Notice that in a batch file you must use the escape character (^) before the redirection symbol (>). The escape character (which is described later in this chapter) tells the batch processor to treat the greater-than symbol as a character, rather than processing it as a redirection symbol. Thus, the string "2>nul" is simply assigned to STDERR without being processed. If you type set after running the program, you will see that STDERR has been saved in your environment. To prevent it from being saved, you can type the following to delete the setting: set stderr= There are several ways to use variables in batch files. Suppose you need to create a master phone list every week from various phone-list files in different directories. You want to be able to just type the names of the files that contain the phone lists and have them collected in a file called PHONE.LST for later viewing. You decide that you need a batch file that will delete the old phone list, then create a new phone list that contains any phone files you specify on the command line. The batch file will then discard any error messages and display the new phone list on the screen. @echo off rem This batch file creates a new phone list del phone.lst :newphone if "%1"=="" goto displayit set stdout=^>^>phone.lst & set stderr=2^>nul type %1 %stdout% shift goto newphone rem Now display the phone list :displayit type phone.lst %stderr% When you run this batch file, STDOUT is replaced by the string ">phone.lst", which appends output to the file PHONE.LST. So when the type %1 %stdout% command is run, %1 is replaced by the first argument typed, and the contents of the file specified are appended to the PHONE.LST file. When the phone list is displayed, STDERR is replaced by the string "2>nul", which redirects error messages encountered while sending the output of the file to NUL. Notice that the ampersand (&) (which is described later in this chapter) separates the two operations. As before, STDOUT and STDERR are saved as variables in your environment after the program ends. You could assign STDOUT or STDERR to null values after you run the batch program, or you could set variables that are local to your batch program by using the setlocal and endlocal batch commands. Just place setlocal at the beginning of the program and place endlocal at the end of the program. This tells the batch processor that any variables you set are active only while the batch program is running. After you run your program, these variables are not saved in your environment. To see how these commands work, look at the batch file LOCAL.CMD: @echo off setlocal rem This program keeps the variables STDERR and MYVAR from rem being saved in your environment. if "%1"=="" echo Valid arguments /s /m & goto end if %1==/s set stderr=errfile if %1==/m set myvar="Hi there!" set :end endlocal This program assigns the variable STDERR to the file ERRFILE (if the user types /s), and assigns the variable MYVAR to the string "Hi there!" (if the user types /m). It then carries out the set command, which displays your environment settings. You will see that either STDERR or MYVAR appears in the list of environment variables. However, if you type set after running the batch program Local, STDERR or MYVAR will not appear as environment variables (unless you have set one of them previously). Checking the Error Level Some MS OS/2 commands and utilities return an exit code when they are completed; that is, they send a number back to the system to tell it whether the program ran successfully or not. If the command or utility ran successfully, it returns an exit code of zero; if it did not run successfully, it returns an exit code greater than zero. You can check this value and specify what command will then run by placing the command if errorlevel (or if not errorlevel) immediately following the line that runs the original command or utility. The if errorlevel command checks to see whether the exit code is equal to or greater than the number you specify. For example, you could run the format utility in a batch file, check to see that the formatting operation was successful (returned an exit code of zero), and display a message on the screen by running the following program: @echo off format a: if errorlevel 1 echo A formatting error occurred. & goto end echo Format successful :end If the utility returns an exit code of greater than zero, an error message is displayed and processing jumps to the label ":end". Otherwise, the message "Format successful" is displayed. Using Special Characters in a Batch Program In Chapter 8, "Running Cmd," you learned how redirection and ipe symbols (<,>, >, and | ) could be used to specify more than one command on a line. The following symbols also have special meaning to MS OS/2: Symbol Meaning ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── ^ Removes a special character's meaning. ( ) Groups commands. & Separates multiple commands. && Performs one operation, then another. || Performs one operation or another. While these special characters can all be used on the command line, they are most useful in batch programs. In the following sections, each of these special characters is described. Removing a Special Character's Function To remove the meaning of special characters, use the escape character (^) before the character. This lets you use special characters as regular characters in a string. For example, to redirect the line "hello" into a file named GREET, type the following: echo hello > greet If you use the escape character before the redirection symbol, the redirection symbol loses its meaning. To have the batch processor treat the redirection symbol as an ordinary character, type the following: echo hello ^> greet Now the entire line is echoed to your screen: hello > greet This is useful if you want to display a special character but do not want the symbol to perform any function. Grouping Commands To group commands, use parentheses [( )]. For example, to display the sorted output of a directory listing of drive A and the contents of the file DIR.LST on drive C, type the following: (dir a: & type c:dir.lst) | sort Combining Commands To combine several commands, separate each command from the others with the ampersand (&). For example, to display a directory list for drive A, the version of MS OS/2, and the volume label of your current drive, type the following: dir a: & ver & vol MS OS/2 processes the individual commands in order, from left to right. Using the AND Operator The AND operator (&&) processes the command to the left of the symbol. If the command is successful, it processes the command to the right of the symbol. If the first command is unsuccessful (that is, produces an error), the command to the right is not processed. For example, the following command displays the contents of the file BUDGET dir budget Using the OR Operator The OR operator (||) processes either the command to the left of the symbol or the command to the right. If the command to the left is successful, it does not process the command to the right. If the command to the left is unsuccessful (that is, produces an error), the command to the right is processed. For example, the following command either deletes the file called LETTER.TMP or displays a directory list of all files with the filename extension .TMP: del letter.tmp || dir *.tmp If LETTER.TMP exists, it is deleted. If LETTER.TMP does not exist, a directory list of all the files with the .TMP extension is displayed. Part 3: Configuring and Maintaining Your System ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This part of the Microsoft Operating System/2 User's Guide provides information to help you configure and maintain your system. One chapter describes utilities and commands you can use to perform such system-maintenance tasks as making backup copies of your files and configuring and formatting your hard disk. Another explains how to set up your hard disk by using the Presentation Manager Fixed Disk Utility. Two more chapters present an overview of the start-up files you can use in MS OS/2 and how to customize your working environment by using configuration commands in your CONFIG.SYS file. The new high-performance file system (HPFS) is discussed in a chapter that tells you how to install HPFS, how it is different from the file allocation table (FAT) file system, and how some MS OS/2 commands and utilities work differently in HPFS than they do in the FAT file system. The last chapter explains how to use device drivers to support new hardware or enable additional features of MS OS/2. Chapter 12 Maintaining Your System ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Introduction This chapter is designed to help you with the tasks of aintaining your system, including maintaining your files, directories, and disks. It describes the MS OS/2 disk utilities that you use to perform tasks such as displaying information about a disk and backing up and restoring files, and it describes how you can use the mode utility to provide information about devices for MS OS/2. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note All examples of filenames and directory names in this chapter use the file allocation table (FAT) file system, which is the file system used by DOS and MS OS/2 versions 1.1 and earlier. For information on using high-performance file system (HPFS) filenames and directory names, see Chapter 16, "Using the High-Performance File System." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Using MS OS/2 Disk Utilities MS OS/2 provides utilities that help you work with and maintain disks. The following list describes these utilities: Utility Purpose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── chkdsk Displays status information about a disk. backup Makes backup copies of files. restore Restores backup files. recover Recovers a file or disk that contains bad sectors. The backup and restore utilities work only in an OS/2 session. You can run the chkdsk and recover utilities in both DOS and OS/2 sessions. Unlike commands and utilities that operate on files and directories, disk utilities are designed to help you prepare and maintain floppy and hard disks. Displaying Disk Information The chkdsk utility displays status information about a disk and checks the disk for errors. You should run this utility periodically to keep track of how much space is left on a disk and to display any errors found on the disk. If chkdsk finds an error, a message describing the error appears on the screen. You can start the chkdsk utility from the DOS session, an OS/2 session, or the Utilities group in Desktop Manager. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note This section describes the chkdsk utility as it works in the MS OS/2 file allocation table (FAT) file system. For a description of the chkdsk utility as it works in the high-performance file system (HPFS), see Chapter 16, "Using the High-Performance File System." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── To run chkdsk, you type chkdsk followed by a drive letter or filename. Chkdsk always checks a drive; you can also check a file by specifying a filename. (You can specify multiple filenames by using wildcard characters.) If you specify a filename, chkdsk checks the drive and also tells you whether the specified file is contiguous. (You can specify a directory path with the filename.) If you do not specify a drive, chkdsk checks the current drive. For example, to check your hard disk and save the output in the file REPORT.DSK on drive A, type the following: chkdsk c: > a:report A typical status report might look like the following: The type of file system for disk is FAT. The volume label is RALPH. The Volume Serial Number is E392-1C15 72286208 bytes total disk space. 311296 bytes in 7 hidden files. 520192 bytes in 125 directories. 67895296 bytes in 2443 user files. 12288 bytes in bad sectors. 3547136 bytes available on disk. 4096 bytes in each allocation unit. 17648 total allocation units. 866 available allocation units on disk. The message about hidden files gives you the number of files that are needed by the system but are not shown when you use the dir command to display a directory list. To discover the names of hidden files, use chkdsk with the /v option (described later in this chapter, in "Displaying Each File on Your Disk"), or use File Manager in the Presentation Manager session. The "bytes in bad sectors" message shows you how many of the sec- tors on your disk are defective. Since the system automatically compensates for bad sectors, there is no reason to worry about them unless the number of bad sectors becomes very large. The "bytes available on disk" message shows you the number of unused bytes on the disk. You should check this value from time to time, especially if disk space is limited. MS OS/2 files are stored in a series of units called sectors, which are grouped into larger units called clusters. The chkdsk utility may report that it has found lost clusters. A lost cluster still exists, but the information in it is no longer associated with a file. This could occur for many reasons─for example, if you turned off your computer while the system was writing to a file. When a cluster is lost, MS OS/2 cannot read, write, or modify the data in it. If part of a file is in a lost cluster, you will not be able to work with the file at all. In addition, lost clusters take up valuable disk space. If you use the /f option, chkdsk fixes any lost clusters by writing them to a file. For instructions on how to use the /f option, see the following section. If you specify files to be checked when you use the chkdsk utility, you will receive a message that tells you whether the files are stored in contiguous sectors. If a file is not stored in contiguous sectors, the num- ber of its blocks that are stored in noncontiguous sectors is displayed. Although storing files in contiguous sectors is not required, it enables your computer to read from or write to files more efficiently. If many of your files are stored in noncontiguous sectors, you can make all files contiguous by backing up the files on your disk, reformatting the disk, and restoring the files to the disk. Fixing Errors on Your Disk To fix errors on your disk, use chkdsk with the /f option. You can use the copy of the chkdsk utility that was put onto your start-up disk when you installed MS OS/2 to fix errors on any disk except your start-up disk. This means that if you normally start MS OS/2 from drive C, you can fix errors only on disks that are in drives other than drive C. To fix errors on drive C, do the following: 1. Insert the MS OS/2 Install disk into drive A and turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, restart it by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL. 2. At the first screen, press the ESC key. This takes you to the command prompt. 3. Insert the disk that contains the CHKDSK 4. Type chkdsk c: /f and press the ENTER key. The chkdsk utility attempts to recover lost clusters and places their contents into files that have the name FILEnnnn.CHK, where nnnn is a sequential number assigned by MS OS/2. The recovered files may or may not be usable, depending upon their condition. If the files with lost clusters are ASCII files (data files), you may be able to recover the lost data. If you find that there is text missing from an ASCII file, run chkdsk with the /f option, then do the following: 1. Use the type command to look at the contents of each of the .CHK files. 2. If the missing text appears in one of the .CHK files, use a text editor to copy this text back into the original file. In MS OS/2, some applications attach additional information, such as author, application type, and file history, to your files and directories. These pieces of information are called extended attributes and are used by other applications, the file system, or the operating system itself. If chkdsk finds errors in extended attributes, the recovered extended attributes are placed in files named EAnnnn.CHK, where nnnn is a sequential number assigned by MS OS/2. You can look at files that have extended attributes by using the type command, as described previously. If after using the type command you can identify which of your files the extended attributes belong to, you can join the extended attributes to the files by using the eautil utility. For information about using eautil, see the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. Displaying Each File on Your Disk Use the /v option if you want the name of each file on the disk to be displayed as it is being checked. The /v option causes the chkdsk utility to display all files, including hidden files. (However, the hidden files are not flagged in any way.) Discovering which files are hidden files requires some checking. If you need to know the names of the hidden files, follow these steps: 1. Use the chkdsk utility without the /v option. This tells you the number of hidden files; however, it does not tell you the names of the files. 2. Use the chkdsk utility with the /v option to produce a list of all of the files on a particular drive. 3. Use the dir command to produce a file list that does not show any hidden files. 4. Compare these two lists. Any file that is in the chkdsk /v list but is not in the dir list is a hidden file. You can use the number produced in step one to make sure you have found every hidden file. Since chkdsk /v displays filenames left-aligned, you can easily use the sort utility to sort filenames and directories alphabetically. The sort utility is described in detail in Chapter 9, "Using MS OS/2 Utilities." Making Backup Copies of Your Files The backup utility creates a backup copy of one or more files on a disk and stores the copy on another disk. It provides an easy way to make backup copies of files, directories, or entire disks. Using backup differs from using the copy command or the xcopy utility to copy files; when you use backup to copy files, the contents of the files are stored in a single file, instead of in individual files. In addition, backup has several options that let you make backup copies of specific files. The backup utility is most commonly used to make backup copies of files that are on your hard disk and store them on a series of floppy disks. You can use these floppy disks to recover your files if the hard disk becomes corrupted. You can back up one floppy disk to another floppy disk even if the disks have a different number of sides or sectors. The backup utility does not make copies of files if the files are already open or if they are in use by another program. For example, if you run backup from your start-up disk, files such as the OS2.INI file and the SWAPPER.DAT file are not backed up because they are being used by MS OS/2. To back up these files by using the backup utility, follow these steps: 1. Insert the MS OS/2 Install disk into drive A and turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, restart it by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL. 2. At the first screen, press ESC. This takes you to the command prompt. 3. Insert the disk that contains the BACKUP 4. Start the backup utility. You can make backup copies of individual files or of the entire start-up disk. To restore these files to the start-up disk, run the restore utility from drive A, in the same way as described in the preceding steps. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note The backup utility does not make backup copies of the files OS2LDR, OS2KRNL, CMD.EXE or COMMAND ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Making Backup Files on Another Disk To run the backup utility, type backup followed by the drive that contains the disk you want to back up (the source disk) and the drive that contains the disk that will hold the backup files (the backup disk). To back up the contents of your current directory to a directory in another drive, you specify the drive letters of the source drive and the backup drive. For example, to back up the root directory of your hard disk (drive C) to a floppy disk in drive A, type the following: backup c: a: To make a backup copy of the contents of a specified directory, you type the drive letter and path of the directory you want to copy. For example, to back up the files in the ORDERS subdirectory of the ACCOUNT directory to a floppy disk in drive A, type the following: backup c:\account\orders a: Suppose you have several files on your hard disk that have the filename extension .OLD. To back up these files to a floppy disk in drive B, use a wildcard character, as shown in the following: backup c:\account\orders\*.old b: By default, any files on the backup floppy disk are erased before the backup files are added to it. If all of the files cannot fit on one floppy disk, the backup utility prompts you to insert another backup disk when the current disk is filled. When the backup operation is complete and you look at a directory list for the backup disk, you will not see the names of the files you just copied. Instead, you will see two files named BACKUP.nnn and CONTROL.nnn. These files contain your files and paths; they will be used later to restore these files. On the first backup disk, these two files will be called BACKUP.001 and CONTROL.001; on the second disk, they will be called BACKUP.002 and CONTROL.002, and so on. If you copy files to a hard disk, backup automatically creates a directory called BACKUP, which contains the BACKUP and CONTROL files. The backup utility automatically formats an unformatted floppy disk before saving backup copies on it. Making Backup Copies of Subdirectories If you use the backup utility without options, only the files or directory you specify are copied. To copy several directories or an entire disk, you can use the /s option. The /s option enables you to create backup copies of subdirectories. For example, to back up your hard disk (drive C), including all subdirectories, to floppy disks in drive A, type the following: backup c: a: /s The original directory structure is maintained while all files and directories are copied to drive A. Making Backup Copies of Files Modified Since the Last Backup Operation The backup utility can use the archive file flag to determine which files to back up. If you use the /m option, only those files that have been modified since the last backup operation are copied to the backup disk. However, the previous backup files will be deleted from the backup disk (unless you use the /a option, as described later). Whenever you use backup, those files for which the archive flag is set are found and copied. The backup utility then turns off the archive flag for those files. When you make a backup copy of the same set of files and use the /m option, the archive flag is set only for those files that have been created or modified since the last backup operation. Therefore, only they will be backed up. (The /m option may not perform as described here if you use the attrib utility to modify the archive flags of the files.) You can also use the /m option to make copies of directories. When you use this option, the backup utility makes a copy of a directory only if its extended attributes have changed since the last backup operation. Adding Files to the Backup Disk By default, the contents of the backup floppy disk or BACKUP directory are erased before the backup files are added to it. If you want to add files to an existing backup disk or directory without modifying the current contents, use the /a option. Suppose your backup floppy disk contains the contents of the ENG directory and you need to make a backup copy of the MKT directory. You could make a second backup disk, or you could add the contents of MKT to the existing backup disk by using the /a option. To add the second directory to the backup disk, type the following: backup c:\emkt a: /a The BACKUP and CONTROL files now contain backup copies of the contents of both the ENG and MKT directories. Any other files that were on the backup disk remain unchanged. Making Backup Copies of Files Modified After a Certain Date and Time You may be interested in backing up only those files that were modified after a certain date and time. To do this, use the /d:date option and, optionally, the /t:time option. Note that /t cannot be used without /d. Suppose you wanted to back up only those files that were modified after the beginning of 1988. You would run the backup utility and specify the date and time, as follows: backup c: a: /d:12-31-87 /t:23:59 Any files that were modified after 11:59 P.M. on December 31, 1987, would be copied. Making a Backup Log The /l[:logfile] option lets you create a log of the files you have copied by using the backup utility. This log contains a list of entries, one entry per file. Each entry contains the number of the backup disk and the name of the file. This information can be used to restore a particular file from a floppy disk. Unless you specify otherwise, the log file is created in the root directory of the source disk or source drive. If you do not specify a log-file name, the log file is named BACKUP.LOG. For example, suppose you want to back up the contents of the MKT directory on drive C to a floppy disk in drive A. To create a backup log on drive C called MKTLOG.001, type the following: backup c: a: /l:mktlog.001 Preserving Extended Attributes In MS OS/2, some applications attach additional information, such as author, application type, and file history, to your files and directories. These pieces of information are called extended attributes and are used by other applications, the file system, or the operating system itself. The backup utility automatically preserves the extended attributes of a file or directory. Restoring Backup Files To restore backup files to a disk, use the restore utility. The restore utility can restore files between similar or different disk types. Many of the options of the restore utility are analogous to the options of the backup utility. Restoring Files to a Disk To restore files that were copied by using the backup utility, you type restore followed by the drive that contains the disk with the backup fileswil directories from which they were copied. For example, if you have a floppy disk that contains backup files, you need only insert it in drive A and type the following to restore the files to the BAK directory on drive C: restore a: c:\bak Restoring Subdirectories If you made backup copies of subdirectories by using the /s option of the backup utility, you can restore these subdirectories by using the /s option of the restore utility. For example, to restore all of the backup files in drive A to the current directory in drive C, type the following: restore a: c: /s Prompting the User Before Restoring Files The directory being restored may contain read-only files or files that have been modified since the last backup operation; you may not want to restore these files. The /p option displays a warning message and prompts the user with "Replace the file (Y/N)?" To restore the backup file, type Y for yes. To leave the file unchanged, type N for no. Selecting Files to Restore Just as you can make backup copies based on the time or date a file was created or last modified, you can also restore files based on the time or date. The options that you can use with restore are as follows: Option Purpose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── /b:date Restores only those files that were last modified on or before date. /a:date Restores only those files that were last modified on or after date. /e:time Restores only those files that were last modified at or earlier than time. /L:time Restores only those files that were last modified at or later than time. /m Restores only those files that were modified after the last backup. You can combine options, if you like. These options work only if the filenames on the source drive are the same as those on the destination drive. In other words, if you are restoring files to an empty directory or to a directory that contains filenames that are different from the backup filenames, these options do not apply. For example, suppose that you want to update a phone list periodically from a backup floppy disk that is made from the company's master phone lists. Suppose also that you want to restore the list to a direc- tory named \PHONE on drive C. To update those phone lists that have not been modified since a specified date, you could use the /b and /m options, as follows: restore a: c:\phone /b:5-14-89 /m The /b option specifies only those files that were last modified on or before May 14, 1989. The /m option specifies those files that have the archive flag set, which means that the file has been modified since the last backup operation. Restoring Files That Are Not on the Destination Drive To restore only those files from the backup disk that do not currently exist on the destination drive, use the /n option. For example, suppose you have the files TEMP1.BAK, TEMP2.BAK, and TEMP3.BAK on a backup disk, and that TEMP1.BAK and TEMP2.BAK already exist in the destination directory. If you use the /n option, only TEMP3.BAK will be restored. Preserving Extended Attributes The restore utility, like the backup utility, preserves the extended attributes of a file or directory. If you are restoring files that have extended attributes to a file system that does not support extended attributes, you may want to use the /f option with the restore utility. For more information about the restore utility, see the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. Recovering a File from a Damaged Disk If a sector on your disk is damaged, you can use the recover utility to try to recover either just the file that has been written to the damaged sector or the entire disk. Before using this utility, be sure that you have backup copies of all the files on your disk. Then try to restore your files by using the restore utility. If this fails, use the recover utility on one file at a time. Use recover on a disk only if the entire disk is unreadable. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note This section describes the recover utility as it works with the MS OS/2 file allocation table (FAT) file system. For a description of the recover utility as it works with the high-performance file system (HPFS), see Chapter 16, "Using the High-Performance File System." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── To recover one file, you type recover followed by the name of the file you want to recover. MS OS/2 reads the file sector by sector, skipping the bad sectors, and labels any bad sectors so that no data is written to them in the future. To recover an entire disk, you type recover followed by the drive letter. The recover utility does not work on a network from a remote workstation, nor does it work on drives that are used with the assign, subst, or join utility. When you use the recover utility on a disk, no other program can access that disk while the utility is running. This prevents other programs from modifying the disk while recover is modifying it. Likewise, if a program is already using a disk, you cannot start the recover util- ity on that disk. Therefore, you cannot run recover on the disk from which you started MS OS/2. Nor can you run recover on the disk from which you started recover. If you need to run recover on the start-up disk, follow these steps: 1. Insert the MS OS/2 Install disk into drive A and turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, restart it by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL. 2. At the first screen, press ESC. This takes you to the command prompt. 3. Insert the disk that contains the RECOVER 4. Start the recover utility. For example, if you want to run recover on the EMPLOYEE.TXT file located on drive C, type the following at the A prompt and press ENTER: recover c:\employee.txt If you need to run recover on the disk that contains the recover utility, you need to copy the RECOVERfloppy disk or hard disk) and run the utility from there. Recovering Extended Attributes When recovering a single file, the recover utility attempts to recover the extended attributes of the file. If it cannot recover the complete extended attribute information, what it can recover is stored in a file named EAnnnn.REC. (The letters nnnn designate a sequential number assigned by the operating system.) You can read this file by using the type command. The recovered file will no longer have extended attributes. When recovering an entire drive, all of the files lose their extended attributes. The recover utility stores the extended attributes in a file named FILEnnnn.REC. You can read this file by using the type command, but there is no way to tell which files the extended attributes originally belonged to. Specifying Device Information To specify or change the settings for a device in your system, use the mode utility. You can change settings for a parallel printer, a display device, or asynchronous communications devices such as modems and terminals. Before using devices that were set by using the mode utility, make sure that the proper device drivers and devices are installed. For more information about MS OS/2 device drivers, see Chapter 17, "Using MS OS/2 Device Drivers." For complete information about the options to the mode utility, see the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. Setting Operating Arguments for Devices The mode utility prepares MS OS/2 for communication with devices such as parallel and serial printers, modems, and screens. To use the mode utility, you must specify the name of the device you want to use followed by a list of arguments. MS OS/2 assigns names to devices as follows: ■ LPT1, LPT2, and LPT3 are parallel printers attached to the parallel ports of your computer. If you do not specify a port, LPT1 is the default device name. (PRN can be used in place of LPT1.) ■ COM1, COM2, and COM3 are serial devices that are attached to the serial communications ports of your computer. These could include devices such as modems or serial printers. Before you can set operating arguments for these devices, the device must be installed correctly and the appropriate device driver must be installed. For instructions on how to install device drivers, see Chapter 17, "Using MS OS/2 Device Drivers." Setting the Parallel-Printer Mode You can use the mode utility to set characteristics for parallel printers connected to parallel ports LPT1, LPT2, and LPT3. (PRN and LPT1 can be used interchangeably.) To set the operating arguments for a parallel port, you type mode followed by the following parallel-printer options: Option Purpose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── lptn Specifies the printer number: 1, 2, or 3. chars Specifies the number of characters per line: 80 or 132. The default value is 80. lines Specifies vertical spacing (lines per inch): 6 or 8. The default value is 6. p Specifies that the mode utility continues to send output to the printer even though a time-out error has occurred. A time-out error occurs when a printer cannot print your output in a previously specified amount of time. You can break out of this process at any time by pressing CTRL+C. You must set the lptn option; all other arguments are optional. For example, suppose that you want your computer to print to a parallel printer that is connected to your computer's second parallel-printer port (LPT2). If you want to print with 132 characters per line and 8 lines per inch, type the following: mode lpt2: 132,8 Setting the Asynchronous Communication Mode You can use the mode utility to configure a specified serial port for communication with external devices such as printers, terminals, and modems. To display the status of a serial device, you type mode followed by the name of the asynchronous port. For example, to see the status of the device that is connected to COM2, type the following: mode com2 To set the operating arguments for a serial port, you type mode followed by a combination of the following options: Option Purpose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── comn Specifies the number of the asynchronous communications (COM) port. The range of valid values depends on your particular computer. For example, IBM PC/AT (and compatible) computers generally have two COM ports, while IBM PS/2 computers can have up to eight. baud Specifies the transmission rate. Valid rates are 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, 9600, and 19,200. (The 19,200 rate is valid for IBM PS/2 computers [and compatible computers] only.) You can use just the first two digits to specify the transmission rate. parity Specifies the parity. Valid values are N (none), O (odd), E (even), M (mark; the parity equals 1), or S ; the parity equals zero). The default value is E. databits Specifies the number of data bits. Valid values are 5, 6, 7, and 8. The default value is 7. stopbits Specifies the number of stop bits. Valid values are 1, 1.5, and 2. If the baud option is set to 110, the default value is 2; otherwise, the default value is 1. If you specify 1.5 stop bits, the databits option must be set to 5. You must set the baud option; all other arguments are optional. The options in the following list are used only when you use the mode utility in a full-screen session. These options may be listed in any order following the stopbits argument. Option Purpose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── to=state Specifies whether infinite time-out processing is enabled (on) or whether normal time-out processing is used (off). The default setting is to=off. xon=state Specifies whether automatic transmit-flow control is enabled (on) or disabled (off). The default setting is xon=off. Option Purpose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── idsr=state Specifies whether the input handshake using DSR (data set ready) is enabled (on) or disabled (off). The default setting is idsr=on. odsr=state Specifies whether the output handshake using DSR (data set ready) is enabled (on) or disabled (off). The default setting is odsr=on. octs=state Specifies whether the output handshake using CTS (clear to send) is enabled (on) or disabled (off). The default setting is octs=on. dtr=state Specifies whether DTR (data terminal ready) is enabled (on) or disabled (off), or whether DTR handshaking is enabled (hs). The default setting is dtr=on. rts=state Specifies whether RTS (request to send) is enabled (on) or disabled (off), whether RTS handshaking is enabled (hs), or RTS toggling is enabled (tog). The default setting is rts=on. p DOS session only. Specifies that the mode utility uses the COM port for a serial printer and that it continues to send output to the printer even when a time-out error occurs. A time-out error occurs when a printer cannot print your output in a previously specified amount of time. You can break out of this process at any time by pressing CTRL+C. buffer=on | off | auto Specifies whether extended hardware buffering is enabled, disabled, or controlled automatically by the device driver. This option applies only to communications hardware or drivers that are capable of extended hardware buffering. For more information about this option, see the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. Suppose you wanted to use the mode utility to set up the COM2 serial communications port for 9600 baud, with even parity, 7 data bits, and 1 stop bit. To do this, you would type the following: mode com2: 9600 In this example, the parity and number of data and stop bits were not specified, because the default values were used. If, on the other hand, you wanted to set up the COM2 port for 1200 baud, odd parity, 7 data bits, and 2 stop bits, you would type the following: mode com2: 1200,o,,2 The arguments you specify when you use the mode utility to set up your serial port must match the requirements of the device with which you want to communicate. Setting the Display Mode You can use the mode utility to select the active graphics adapter and its display mode or to change the way information is displayed on your screen. You can use the following options with the mode utility to set the display mode: Option Purpose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── display Specifies one of the following values: 40, 80, BW40, BW80, CO40, CO80, or MONO. For each of these values, 40 and 80 indicate the number of characters per line. BW and CO refer to a color graphics adapter with color disabled (BW) or enabled (CO). MONO specifies a monochrome adapter with a constant display width of 80 characters per line. rows Specifies the number of rows of text displayed by the screen: 25, 43, 50, or 60. The adapter type determines which of these values are valid. The initial value is 25; the default value is the last value that you set. When you type mode with the display argument, the utility affects the current session only. Suppose your computer uses an 80-character-per-line color graphics adapter (CO80). To change the number of rows of text displayed by the screen to 43, type the following: mode co80,43 Chapter 13 Setting Up Your Hard Disk ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Introduction Before you use a hard disk, there are certain setup tasks that must be performed. These setup tasks may include any of the following: ■ Displaying partition data or logical-drive information ■ Creating or deleting a primary partition ■ Changing the start-up partition ■ Creating or deleting extended partitions and logical drives ■ Formatting the hard disk This chapter describes the tasks involved in setting up your hard disk and the tools you use to perform these setup tasks: Presentation Manager Fixed Disk Utility and the fdisk utility. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note All examples in this chapter are for the file allocation table (FAT) file system, which is the file system used by DOS and MS OS/2 versions 1.1 and earlier. For information on using the high-performance file system (HPFS), see Chapter 16, "Using the High-Performance File System." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Starting and Quitting Fixed Disk Utility Fixed Disk Utility is a Presentation Manager application. You start it from the Desktop Manager Utilities group. To start Fixed Disk Utility, follow these steps: 1. Switch to Desktop Manager. 2. Open the Utilities-group window. 3. Choose Fixed Disk Utility. Fixed Disk Utility appears in a window on your screen, as shown in the following example. (This figure may be found in the printed book). Specific examples are used throughout this chapter to illustrate how Fixed Disk Utility works. Your computer may display values different from those given in the examples, depending on the size and format of your hard disk. You can quit Fixed Disk Utility by using the Exit command from the Options menu. A dialog box asks if you want to save any changes. If you choose to save changes, another dialog box appears, telling you to restart your system by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL. Changes take effect after you restart your system. To quit Fixed Disk Utility, follow these steps: 1. Select the Options menu and choose the Exit command. The Exit Fixed Disk Utility dialog box appears. 2. To save any changes, turn on the Save Changes check box. 3. Choose the Yes button. If you choose the No button in the dialog box, you return to Fixed Disk Utility. When you choose the Yes button, a dialog box appears, telling you to close all other running programs and then restart your computer by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL. At this point, you must either restart your system or choose the Help button for information about shutting down your system. Displaying Partition Data You can see how your hard disk is set up by using Fixed Disk Utility. (This figure may be found in the printed book). When you start Fixed Disk Utility, it creates a window that provides information about your hard disk. The Fixed Disk Utility window is divided into three sections: hard-disk icons, partition information, and logical-drive information. ■ You can display information for up to seven hard disks by using Fixed Disk Utility. Each hard disk is represented by a hard-disk icon, which is located at the top of the window. When you select a hard-disk icon, information about that disk is displayed. ■ You can organize your hard disk into separate sections called partitions. The primary partition is drive C; this is the location of the MS OS/2 start-up files. (The primary partition can contain data files and directories in addition to the start-up files.) PRI OS/2 designates the primary partition in the Fixed Disk Utility window. ■ The extended partition is where logical drives are set up. Logical drives can contain data files and directories, but cannot contain MS OS/2 start-up files. EXT OS/2 designates the extended partition in the Fixed Disk Utility window. Having an extended partition on your hard disk is optional. ■ A partition's status is either startable or not startable. If the partition is startable, it contains the operating system's start-up files. ■ The size of the partition is displayed in megabytes. ■ The Percent of Disk entry indicates how much of the disk is formatted as the primary partition and how much of it is assigned to the extended partition and logical drives. ■ The Logical Drive entry gives the drive letter that MS OS/2 has assigned to each logical drive─for example, D, E, or F. ■ The Volume Label entry is the name that you give the disk when you format it. ■ The System entry indicates the file system with which the disk is formatted. If the type is IFS, for example, it means the partition is formatted with an installable file system. Creating and Deleting the Primary Partition MS OS/2 creates the primary partition during the installation process. Since the primary partition contains the MS OS/2 start-up files, and Presentation Manager cannot be started without them, you cannot create the primary partition on your start-up drive by using Fixed Disk Utility. You can, however, create a primary partition on another hard disk. To create a primary partition on a disk drive (other than the start-up drive), follow these steps: 1. Select the hard-disk icon for the disk you want to create a primary partition for. 2. Select the Options menu and the Create Primary Partition command. The Create Primary dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. Press ENTER or choose the Create button to accept the default (maximum) value for the partition size, or type a smaller size and then choose the Create button. The maximum partition size is determined by the amount of space available on your hard disk. 4. A dialog box appears, reporting that the primary partition has been created. Choose the OK button. 5. To save your changes, select the Options menu, choose the Exit command, and follow the instructions on your screen. When a primary partition is created during the MS OS/2 installation process, you are asked to specify the size of the partition. By default, the installation program creates the primary partition using the maximum space available on the hard disk. Once the primary partition has been created, the only way to change its size is to delete it and then reinstall MS OS/2. The following section describes how to delete the primary partition. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note Be sure to make backup copies of all files before you delete the primary partition. When the primary partition is deleted, any extended partitions and logical drives are deleted as well, and all information contained on them is destroyed. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── To delete the primary and extended partitions, follow these steps: 1. Make sure that you have backup copies of all the files you want to save. 2. Insert the MS OS/2 Install disk into drive A and turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, restart it by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL. 3. At the first screen, press the ESC key. This takes you to the command prompt for drive A. 4. Type the following at the prompt, and then press the ENTER key: fdisk /d 5. MS OS/2 displays a message that asks if you are sure you want to delete the primary partition. Press Y to proceed with the deletion. Press ENTER or N to stop without deleting the partition. Changing the Start-Up Partition The start-up partition is the partition from which your system starts; it contains the operating system's start-up files. If you have more than one operating system on your computer, you place each in a separate partition. Then, to use one of them, you make that partition the start-up partition. The primary partition on your C drive is, by default, the start-up partition. An extended partition cannot be a start-up partition unless it contains the start-up files for an operating system. To change the start-up partition, follow these steps: 1. Select the hard-disk icon for the disk that contains the partition you want to make the start-up partition. 2. Select the partition that you want to make the start-up partition from the Partition Information section of the Fixed Disk Utility window. 3. Select the Options menu and choose the Make Startable command. 4. A dialog box appears, telling you that the partition was made the start-up partition. Choose the OK button. 5. To save your changes, select the Options menu, choose the Exit command, and follow the instructions on your screen. Using an Extended Partition and Logical Drives Most users set up their entire hard disk as the primary partition, so they can gain access to any file or directory on the disk without having to change to a different logical drive. Some users, however, may need to set up and use an extended partition and logical drives. Several people sharing one computer, for example, could reserve the primary partition (drive C) for system files and shared data files and use logical drives D and E for the files of individual users. The following sections describe how to create and delete an extended partition and logical drives. Creating an Extended Partition You must create an extended partition before you can create logical drives. To create an extended partition, follow these steps: 1. Select the hard-disk icon for the disk on which you want to create an extended partition. 2. Select the Options menu and choose the Create Extended Partition command. The Create Extended dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. Press ENTER or choose the Create button to accept the default (maximum) value for the partition size, or type a smaller size and then choose the Create button. The maximum partition size is determined by the amount of space available on your hard disk. .ET 4. A dialog box appears, reporting that an extended partition has been created. Choose the OK button. 5. To save your changes, select the Options menu, choose the Exit command, and follow the instructions on your screen. .RT Creating a Logical Drive After you have created an extended partition, you can create a logical drive. To create a logical drive, follow these steps: 1. Select the hard-disk icon for the disk on which you want to create a logical drive. 2. Select the Options menu and choose the Create Logical Drive command. The Create Logical dialog box appears. (This figure may be found in the printed book). 3. Press ENTER or choose the Create button to accept the default value for the size of the logical drive. You can type a smaller size if you would like to create more than one logical drive. 4. A dialog box appears, reporting that a logical drive has been created. Choose the OK button. 5. To save your changes, select the Options menu, choose the Exit command, and follow the instructions on your screen. When you quit Fixed Disk Utility after creating a logical drive, you should restart your system and then use the format utility to prepare the new logical drive for use. To do this, follow these steps: 1. Restart your system by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL. 2. Choose OS/2 Full-Screen Command Prompt from the Main-group window. 3. At the command prompt, type the following and press ENTER: format drive: The drive argument is the letter assigned to the logical drive you just created. Repeat this step for every logical drive you created. The format utility, by default, formats a logical drive to use the file allocation table (FAT) file system. You can also format a logical drive to use the high-performance file system (HPFS). For more information, see Chapter 16, "Using the High-Performance File System." For complete information about using the format utility, see the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. Deleting a Logical Drive Before you can delete an extended partition, you must first delete any logical drives it contains. Remember that when you delete a logical drive, you lose any information stored there. To delete a logical drive, follow these steps: 1. Select the hard-disk icon for the disk that contains the logical drive to be deleted. 2. Select the logical drive to be deleted. 3. Select the Options menu and choose the Delete command. 4. A dialog box appears, asking if you are sure you want to delete the logical drive. Choose the Yes button to continue. 5. Another dialog box appears, reporting that the logical drive has been deleted. Choose the OK button. 6. To save your changes, select the Options menu, choose the Exit command, and follow the instructions on your screen. Deleting an Extended Partition To delete an extended partition, follow these steps: 1. Select the hard-disk icon for the disk that contains the extended partition to be deleted. 2. Make sure any logical drives in the extended partition have been deleted. 3. Select the extended partition to be deleted. 4. Select the Options menu and choose the Delete command. 5. A dialog box appears, asking if you are sure you want to delete the logical drive. Choose the Yes button to continue. 6. Another dialog box appears, reporting that the logical drive has been deleted. Choose the OK button. 7. To save your changes, select the Options menu, choose the Exit command, and follow the instructions on your screen. Chapter 14 Using Start-Up Files in MS OS/2 ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Introduction Whenever you start or restart your system, MS OS/2 uses start-up files to get information about how to start your system. There are different start-up files for different parts of MS OS/2: AUTOEXEC.BAT provides information for the DOS session, STARTUP.CMD is for the full-screen and Presentation Manager sessions, and CONFIG.SYS provides information for the entire working environment. You can customize your MS OS/2 working environment by using these start-up files. This chapter briefly describes how to use the start-up files in MS OS/2. AUTOEXEC.BAT The AUTOEXEC.BAT batch file is used for customizing the DOS session in MS OS/2. You can use this file to change your DOS command prompt or to make MS OS/2 run certain commands automatically when you start the DOS session. The AUTOEXEC.BAT batch file is created during MS OS/2 installation, in the root directory of your start-up drive. It is run the first time you start the DOS session after starting or restarting your system. For more information about how to use AUTOEXEC.BAT and the DOS session, see Chapter 10, "Using the DOS Session." CONFIG.SYS The CONFIG.SYS file is an ASCII (text) file that contains start-up information. MS OS/2 reads this file when you start or restart your system. The protshell command in CONFIG.SYS specifies what user interface and initialization file to use, as well as which command interpreter to use in a full-screen session. A CONFIG.SYS file is created during MS OS/2 installation, and the following protshell command is placed there: protshell=c:\os2\pmshell.exe c:\os2\os2.ini c:\os2\cmd.exe This command specifies PMSHELL.EXE (Presentation Manager) as the user interface, OS2.INI as the initialization file, and cmd as the command interpreter to use in a full-screen session. OS2.INI and OS2SYS.INI The OS2.INI and OS2SYS.INI initialization files are binary files that contain information MS OS/2 uses when it starts Presentation Manager. OS2.INI contains information such as the program names, group names, and search paths used by Presentation Manager. For example, when you customize Desktop Manager or make changes through Control Panel, the new information is saved in the OS2.INI file. The file OS2SYS.INI contains information used by Print Manager. If something happens to either your OS2.INI or OS2SYS.INI file, you will need to replace it with a new one. To create a new OS2.INI or OS2SYS.INI file by using the makeini utility, follow these steps: 1. Insert the MS OS/2 Install Disk into drive A and turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, restart it by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL. 2. At the first screen, press the ESC key. This takes you to the command prompt. 3. To create a new OS2.INI file, type the following and press the ENTER key: c:\os2\makeini os2.ini ini.rc 4. To create a new OS2SYS.INI file, type the following and press the ENTER key: c:\os2\makeini os2sys.ini inisys.rc 5. Remove the MS OS/2 Install disk from drive A and restart your computer by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL. For information about cmd, the MS OS/2 command interpreter, see Chapter 8, "Running Cmd." The CONFIG.SYS file contains other commands that customize your system. For a list of the contents of CONFIG.SYS and for information about how to use configuration commands, see Chapter 15, "Using MS OS/2 Configuration Commands." Other Start-Up Files The CONFIG.SYS file is the primary start-up file for the OS/2 and DOS sessions. Although CONFIG.SYS is usually the only start-up file you will need, you can create other start-up files to further customize the cmd working environment. There are two cmd start-up files you can create, both of which are batch programs: ■ The STARTUP.CMD batch program, which initializes the first cmd session. ■ A separate batch program, which initializes all subsequent cmd sessions. Both types of batch programs are described in the following sections. Calling STARTUP.CMD When you start or restart your system, MS OS/2 searches for the STARTUP.CMD file in the root directory of the start-up drive. If found, STARTUP.CMD automatically creates the first cmd session. As in other batch files, you can place batch commands, cmd commands, utilities, and programs in the STARTUP.CMD file. Remember that STARTUP.CMD is run only when you start or restart your computer, and therefore customizes only the first cmd session. To customize additional cmd sessions, you must create a separate batch program. Calling a Batch Program from Cmd To run a specified batch program whenever you start cmd, you add the /k option, followed by the name of the batch program, to the protshell configuration command in the CONFIG.SYS file. For example, suppose that whenever you run cmd you want your command prompt to appear in a special, customized form. First you create a batch file that contains the command that sets your prompt to the way you want it to appear, and then you specify the name of that batch file on the protshell command line in the CONFIG.SYS file. If the batch file in this example were named OS2INIT.CMD, you would add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: protshell=c:\os2\pmshell.exe c:\os2\os2.ini c:\os2\os2sys.ini c:\os2\cmd.exe /k c:\os2init.cmd (This should all be typed on one line, even though it appears as two lines here.) In this example, the OS2INIT.CMD batch program runs whenever cmd is started. OS2INIT.CMD can contain any combination of batch-program commands. For more information about the protshell command, see Chapter 15, "Using MS OS/2 Configuration Commands." Chapter 15 Using MS OS/2 Configuration Commands ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── When you start MS OS/2, your system reads configuration commands from the CONFIG.SYS file on your start-up disk. These commands give information to the operating system about the setup, or configuration, of your particular system. This chapter gives the form of the MS OS/2 configuration commands and examples of how they might be used. Even though most users will never need to change their CONFIG.SYS file, changes can be made, if necessary, by referring to the information in this chapter. For more information about the individual configuration commands, see the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. During installation, MS OS/2 creates the CONFIG.SYS file; you can view the default values assigned to some of the configuration commands and modify some of those values at this time. Once the installation is complete, you can change command values, either by running the installation program again or by using System Editor or another text editor to edit your CONFIG.SYS file. If MS OS/2 detects an error in the CONFIG.SYS file, it displays an error message and pauses until you press the ENTER key. If you do not want MS OS/2 to pause after displaying a CONFIG.SYS error message, add the following command to your CONFIG.SYS file: pauseonerror=no When you add this command, MS OS/2 still displays the error message, but it does not pause before processing the CONFIG.SYS file. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note All examples of filenames and directory names in this chapter use the file allocation table (FAT) file system, which is the file system used by DOS and MS OS/2 versions 1.1 and earlier. For information on using high-performance file system (HPFS) filenames and directory names, see Chapter 16, "Using the High-Performance File System." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Defining the CONFIG.SYS File In order to run MS OS/2, certain configuration commands are required in your CONFIG.SYS file. During installation, MS OS/2 adds these required commands to your CONFIG.SYS file. The following list shows you what the CONFIG.SYS file might look like after MS OS/2 is installed: protshell=c:\os2\pmshell.exe c:\os2\os2.ini c:\os2\os2sys.ini c:\os2\cmd.exe set comspec=c:\os2\cmd.exe libpath=c:\os2\dll;c:\; set path=c:\os2;c:\os2\system;c:\os2\install;c:\; set dpath=c:\os2;c:\os2\system;c:\os2\install;c:\; set prompt=$i[$p] set help=c:\os2\help set bookshelf=c:\os2\book buffers=30 diskcache=64 maxwait=3 memman=swap,move protectonly=no swappath=c:\os2\system 512 threads=128 shell=c:\os2\command.com c:\os2 /p break=off fcbs=16,8 rmsize=640 country=001,c:\os2\system\country.sys devinfo=kbd,us,c:\os2\keyboard.dcp codepage=437,850 device=c:\os2\epmdd.sys devinfo=scr,ega,c:\os2\viotbl.dcp set video_devices=vio_ibmega set vio_ibmega=device(bvhega) device=c:\os2\ega.sys device=c:\os2\com01.sys The following list tells you what the onfiguration commands in this example do: Command Purpose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── protshell Specifies the MS OS/2 user interface (the protected-mode shell) and the MS OS/2 command interpreter. set comspec Specifies the location of the MS OS/2 command interpreter, cmd; used by programs to find cmd quickly. libpath Specifies the location of dynamic-link libraries. set path Specifies a search path for cmd. set dpath Specifies a data search path; used by programs to locate associated data. set prompt Determines the appearance of the command prompt. Command Purpose ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── set help Specifies the location of Presentation Manager help files. set bookshelf Specifies the location of the file containing the on-line MS OS/2 Command Reference. buffers Specifies the number of disk buffers in memory. iopl Determines the input and output privilege levels. diskcache Enables disk caching and specifies the disk-cache size. maxwait Specifies the maximum amount of time any active process must wait before it is run. memman Specifies whether memory swapping and moving is permitted. protectonly Determines whether MS OS/2 will run a DOS session and a full-screen session. swappath Specifies the location of the disk-swap file and the minimum free space (in kilobytes). threads Specifies the maximum number of threads that can be used at one time. shell Specifies the DOS command interpreter, command; used in the DOS session. break Determines when MS OS/2 checks for the key combination CTRL+C during a process; used in the DOS session. fcbs Specifies the maximum number of open file-control blocks; used in the DOS session. rmsize Determines the amount of memory reserved for DOS (real-mode) applications; used in the DOS session. country Defines country-dependent information, such as time, date, and currency conventions. devinfo Specifies the information a device needs in order to use a particular code page. codepage Specifies which code pages your system is prepared to use. device Sets up a device driver. Modifying Values of Configuration Commands You can use your favorite text editor to modify the CONFIG.SYS file. Changes take effect when you restart your system. Before you make changes to the CONFIG.SYS file, you should first make a backup copy of the file. The backup copy of the CONFIG.SYS file is useful if you make a change that causes an error and prevents your system from starting correctly. If such an error occurs, follow these steps to start your system: 1. Insert the MS OS/2 Install disk into drive A and turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, restart it by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL. 2. At the first screen, press the ESC key. This takes you to the command prompt. 3. Copy your backup copy of the configuration file to the root directory of the start-up drive. The copy you put on the start-up drive must be named CONFIG.SYS. 4. Remove the MS OS/2 Install disk from drive A and restart your computer by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL. It is important to note that most users will never need to change the values in the CONFIG.SYS file and that it is recommended that you not do so. If you need to change the CONFIG.SYS file, however, the information provided in this chapter should help you to understand how the configuration commands work. Setting Up the Presentation Manager Session This section describes the configuration commands that set up the Presentation Manager session. You use these commands to set up the MS OS/2 user interface and to specify the location of dynamic-link libraries. The following commands are described: ■ libpath ■ protshell ■ iopl Specifying the Location of .DLL Files MS OS/2 finds dynamic-link library modules by using the libpath onfiguration command. Dynamic-link libraries contain functionally related portions of MS OS/2. The filenames of dynamic-link libraries usually end with the extension .DLL; for example, a library named DISPLAY.DLL contains an MS OS/2 display driver. Presentation Manager printer drivers, fonts, and queue processors are also dynamic-link libraries; these filenames usually end with the .DRV, Suppose, for example, that you have a new dynamic-link library that you have put into the LIB directory on drive C. For MS OS/2 to be able to use the new dynamic-link library, the LIB directory must be part of the libpath command in your CONFIG.SYS file. The libpath command would appear as follows: libpath=c:\os2\dll;c:\;c:\lib This example directs MS OS/2 to look for dynamic-link libraries in the C:\OS2\DLL directory, the root directory, and the C:\LIB directory on your hard disk. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note There are differences between the libpath command and the set path command. The libpath command is a configuration command that specifies the location of each of the directories containing .DLL files. The set path command sets the value of the PATH environment variable and specifies a directory search path. Also, with the libpath command, the current directory is not searched first, as it is with set path. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Changing the User Interface You use the protshell configuration command to specify the user interface (the protected-mode shell) and the MS OS/2 command interpreter. The user interface is the program you see when you start your system. During installation, MS OS/2 places the following protshell command in your CONFIG.SYS file: protshell=c:\os2\pmshell.exe c:\os2\os2.ini c:\os2\cmd.exe In this example, the user interface is PMSHELL.EXE, the Presentation Manager shell. For more information about this command, see Chapter 14, "Using Start-Up Files in MS OS/2." Specifying the Presentation Manager Device Driver When you specify the Presentation Manager shell, you must also specify the Presentation Manager device driver. The device=c:\os2\pmdd.sys command specifies this device driver; this command is placed in your CONFIG.SYS file during the installation of MS OS/2. If, for some reason, this command does not exist in your CONFIG.SYS file, you will not be able to start Presentation Manager. You can add the command by following these steps: 1. Insert the MS OS/2 Install disk into drive A and turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, restart it by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL. 2. At the first screen, press ESC. This takes you to the command prompt. 3. Using a text editor, add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: device=c:\os2\pmdd.sys 4. Remove the MS OS/2 Install disk from drive A and restart your computer by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL. Enabling Input and Output Privilege Levels You enable or disable input and output privilege levels by using the iopl configuration command. The privilege level assigned to a program determines which data segments it can access and which machine instructions it can execute. Applications are usually assigned privilege level 3, which allows them to refer only to their own data segments and restricts them from issuing input/output instructions. Applications that are assigned privilege level 2 can refer to the data segments of other applications and issue input/output instructions. When you specify iopl=yes, a program that has been assigned privi- lege level 2 is allowed to send or receive the machine instructions necessary to access a particular input/output device. You can also specify input/output privilege levels for programs on an individual basis. For example, to grant a printer driver named Newprint access to a particular piece of hardware, add the following command to your CONFIG.SYS file: iopl=newprint.drv The iopl command does not affect programs that run in the DOS session. It is not necessary for you to specify iopl=no, since no is the default value. Setting Up the DOS Session This section describes the configuration commands that customize the DOS session. In most cases, the default initialization values should not be changed. You will need to modify these values only when you want to create a customized work environment or when an application requires you to do so. You can further customize the DOS session by adding commands to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file. For information on this file, see Chapter 10, "Using the DOS Session." Enabling the DOS Session By default, the DOS session is enabled whenever you start MS OS/2. This is controlled by the protectonly configuration command in your CONFIG.SYS file. The following rules apply to setting up the DOS session: ■ If you specify protectonly=no, the DOS session can be started. If you do not place a protectonly command in your CONFIG.SYS file, MS OS/2 enables the DOS session. ■ If you specify protectonly=no, the following line must also appear in the CONFIG.SYS file: device=c:\os2\dos.sys ■ If you specify protectonly=yes, the DOS session cannot be started. Configuring the DOS Session While most of the configuration commands apply to all of the sessions in MS OS/2, the following configuration commands are specific to the DOS session: ■ shell ■ rmsize ■ break ■ fcbs These commands are described in the following sections. Specifying the DOS Command Interpreter To specify the DOS command interpreter, use the shell configuration command. The shell configuration command lets you specify the command interpreter that is loaded and run in the DOS session. The default shell for the DOS session is command. This means that if you do not include a shell configuration command in the CONFIG.SYS file, MS OS/2 searches for COMMANDof your start-up disk and loads it into memory. If you specify another DOS shell to use, MS OS/2 will search for that shell program and load it into memory. The chances are that you will need to use the shell command only if the COMMANDexample, suppose that COMMANDdirectory of your start-up drive (drive C). In this case, you would place the following line in your CONFIG.SYS file: shell=c:\os2\command.com c:\os2 /p /e:512 This example directs MS OS/2 to load command from the OS2 directory instead of from the root directory of drive C. Another reason for using the shell configuration command is to spec- ify options to the DOS-session command interpreter. Command has options that let you permanently keep a copy of COMMANDin memory, run a command or program, or specify the size of the command interpreter's environment. For information about command and its options, see the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. Allocating Memory for DOS Applications To set the amount of memory reserved for DOS applications, use the rmsize configuration command. Up to 640K can be reserved. You need to specify at least 256K to be able to create a DOS session. The default size depends on the total memory installed in your computer; it is the amount of memory installed below 1024K (either 512K or 640K). To use this command, you type rmsize= followed by the number of kilobytes of memory you want to reserve for DOS applications. For example, to reserve 640K for use by programs running in the DOS session, add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: rmsize= Remember that some of the total memory is reserved for MS OS/2 itself. For more information about memory usage with the rmsize command, see the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. Setting CTRL+C Checking Normally, MS OS/2 checks whether you have pressed CTRL+C only while it is reading from your keyboard or sending something to your screen or printer. However, you can enable additional CTRL+C check- ing by using the break configuration command. When you specify break=on, MS OS/2 checks whether CTRL+C has been pressed whenever it is reading from or writing to a disk. For example, if you want to stop a file from being sorted and you have set break=on in your CONFIG.SYS file, you can press CTRL+C to stop the sorting process. To enable additional CTRL+C checking, add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: break=on Specifying the Number of Open File-Control Blocks (FCBs) To specify the number of open file-control blocks (FCBs), use the fcbs configuration command. Although it is recommended that new programs use file handles to access files, some older DOS applications use data structures called file-control blocks (FCBs) to control opened files. If your application uses FCBs, you can use the fcbs configuration command to specify the maximum number of files controlled by FCBs that can be opened concurrently. The command also specifies the number of files opened with FCBs that are protected against automatic closure. By default, up to 16 FCB files can be opened concurrently, and all but 8 files can be automatically closed. You should use the fcbs command to change these values only if your application requires you to do so. To use this command, you type fcbs= followed by the total number of FCBs that can be opened concurrently (1 through 255) and the total number of files that cannot be closed automatically (zero through 255). For example, to open as many as four files with FCBs and protect the first two files from being closed automatically, add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: fcbs=,2 The number of files that are protected from closure must be less than or equal to the total number of open files. Modifying Multitasking Features MS OS/2 provides several configuration commands that let you modify its multitasking features. Although most users will not need to use these commands, there may be times when you are advised to change these features to enhance how an application runs with MS OS/2. The following commands let you modify the multitasking features of MS OS/2: ■ threads ■ maxwait ■ priority ■ timeslice These commands are described in the following sections. Specifying the Maximum Number of Threads To specify the maximum number of threads that you can create at one time, use the threads configuration command. MS OS/2 allocates at least one thread for every running program. A program may request additional threads if it needs them to perform tasks simultaneously. The threads configuration command sets a system-wide limit on the number of threads that can be created. During installation, MS OS/2 sets the number of threads to 128. About 35 threads are used by MS OS/2; the remaining threads are available for use by other programs. If you will be running many programs that use a large number of threads, you may want to use the threads configuration command to increase the number of threads that can be created at one time. To use this command, you type threads= followed by the maximum number of threads you want to create at one time. You can specify any value from 64 through 512. For example, to increase the number of threads from 128 (the default value) to 255, add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: threads= Be aware that as the number of threads is increased, a small amount of memory is used up. Specifying the Maximum Time a Process Waits In a multitasking environment, each process that runs is assigned a priority level that determines how often the process can run. If a process has a high priority, it is granted permission to run more often than a process with a low priority. Thus, a low-priority process might wait a long time before it is allowed to run. You can change the amount of time a process must wait by using the maxwait configuration command. The maxwait command specifies the maximum amount of time any active process must wait before it runs. If the specified time elapses, the priority of the waiting process is increased for one execution cycle (also called a time slice). To use the maxwait command, you type maxwait= followed by the number of seconds a process must wait before receiving a priority increase. You can specify any value from 1 through 255 seconds. The default value is 3 seconds. For example, suppose that you want to make background programs, which normally have low priority, run faster. You could specify that you want a process to wait only 1 second before receiving a priority increase, by placing the following line in your CONFIG.SYS file: maxwait= Note that this will increase the speed of low-priority processes (such as background programs), but that it will also decrease the speed of high-priority processes (such as foreground programs). Disabling Dynamic Priority Assignments In MS OS/2, processes (threads) are divided into three categories according to their priority: general, time-critical, and low. The general-priority category is further divided into foreground, background, and interactive subcategories. MS OS/2 can automatically adjust the priority levels of general-priority processes as circumstances change (for example, when a foreground process becomes a background process), thus causing the process to run more often or less often. This feature is known as dynamic priority scheduling. By default, MS OS/2 allows dynamic priority scheduling; however, you can turn this feature off (or turn it back on) by using the priority configuration command. To disable dynamic priority processing and instead allocate CPU time to the processes according to the priorities they are currently assigned, you would type the following: priority=absolute By default, the priority command is set to dynamic. Unless you are specifically advised to do so, it should not be necessary to change this setting. This command interacts with the maxwait command described earlier: the priority command must be set to dynamic for the maxwait command to have an effect on system performance. Setting the Time-Slice Values To specify the minimum and maximum amount of time that MS OS/2 will dedicate to a given process before it checks on other processes that may be waiting, use the timeslice configuration command. A time slice is an interval of time used by MS OS/2 to schedule the threads of a process. To use this command, you type timeslice= followed by the minimum and, optionally, the maximum time-slice value (in milliseconds). If you specify only the minimum time-slice value, the maximum time slice is also set to that value. For example, if you run an application that advises you to change the minimum time-slice value to 64 milliseconds, add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: timeslice= If you add this line, MS OS/2 will let at least 64 milliseconds pass before it switches to another program. For applications that take up a large amount of processing time, a larger time-slice setting is better. For applications that do not work if they are interrupted for long periods of time, such as telecommunications applications, a smaller time-slice setting is better. Managing System Memory The following MS OS/2 configuration commands help your system manage memory efficiently: ■ diskcache ■ memman ■ swappath ■ buffers These commands are described in the following sections. Setting Up a Disk Cache You can enable disk caching and specify the number of kilobytes of memory allocated for the disk cache by using the diskcache configuration command. Since reading from a disk cache in memory takes less time than reading from storage, using a disk cache makes your system-response time much faster. When disk caching is enabled and a program instructs the system to read from your hard disk, the system stores what it reads in the disk cache in memory. When the program instructs the system to read from the hard disk again, the system checks the cache for the data, and reads from the hard drive only if the data is not in the cache. To allocate a 128K disk cache in your system, add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: diskcache= If there is no diskcache command in your CONFIG.SYS file, MS OS/2 does not enable disk caching, and no cache space is allocated. You should not use the diskcache configuration command if your system has a partition that uses the high-performance file system (HPFS), because it slows the performance of HPFS. Enabling Memory Swapping and Moving You can use the memman configuration command to enable or disable the memory-management techniques of swapping and moving. Swapping is a technique by which some segments in memory are written to a file on a disk, making the memory these segments were using available for another purpose. The swapped segment is reloaded into memory when it is needed. You can swap memory segments from the DOS session by using the swapdos option. Moving is a technique by which MS OS/2 can combine unused blocks of storage into larger areas, which can then be used by a program or application. Suppose you are running a telecommunications program that loses its connection if it cannot respond to incoming data within a specified amount of time. To prevent MS OS/2 from swapping segments of the program out to the hard disk (and possibly preventing a timely response), add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: memman=noswap You can use the memman command in several forms, including the following: memman=swapdos memman=swap,move,noswapdos memman=noswap,nomove memman=swap memman=swap,move memman=noswap memman=noswap,move If you specify the swapdos option, swap and move are the default assignments. If you specify only the swap or noswap option, move is the default assignment. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note MS OS/2 may not swap the DOS session in the following situations: ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── ■ If you use the mode utility to configure a serial port ■ If you switch to another session while a DOS program is reading from or writing to a file Using a Disk-Swap File You can specify the location of the disk-swap file by using the swappath configuration command. A disk-swap file is a file that keeps track of code or data that is temporarily moved out of mem- ory while another programs runs. The swappath command is used in conjunction with the memman command. Suppose, for example, that you want MS OS/2 to write the swap file to the SWAPFILE directory on your hard disk (drive C). To do this, add the following lines to your CONFIG.SYS file: memman=swap,move swappath=c:\swapfile If the swappath command is not specified in your CONFIG.SYS file, MS OS/2 writes the disk-swap file to the root directory of the drive from which your system starts. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note If you are using the swappath command, make sure your sys- tem has ample space available. The minimum size of a disk-swap file is 512K. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Changing the Number of Disk Buffers You can change the number of disk buffers (work areas in memory) by using the buffers configuration command. MS OS/2 uses disk buffers as temporary work space while reading and writing data when you use the file allocation table (FAT) file system. Suppose that you want to change the number of buffers to 15. To do this, add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: buffers= Each disk buffer is a 512-byte block of memory. You can specify from 1 through 100 buffers. During installation, the value of the buffers command is set to 30. If you remove the buffers command from your CONFIG.SYS file, the default value is 3. Setting Up a Device Driver You can set up a device driver by using the device configuration command. A device driver is a program that allows MS OS/2 to use devices in your system. These devices may include the keyboard, monitor, disk drives, and system clock, and pointing devices such as a mouse. For example, if you are using the serial version of the Microsoft Mouse with Presentation Manager on an IBM PC/AT (or a compatible computer), your CONFIG.SYS file should contain the following device commands: device=c:\os2\epointdd.sys device=c:\os2\msser01.sys model= device=c:\os2\mouse.sys type=msser$ This example directs MS OS/2 to look for the pointer and mouse drivers. When MS OS/2 loads these drivers, MS OS/2 and DOS programs can use the mouse. For more information about MS OS/2 device drivers, see Chapter 17, "Using MS OS/2 Device Drivers." Setting Up Your Environment One of the steps in setting up your system environment is defining the way you want your system to perform. This section describes how to set environment variables and how to run programs that set up your system. Environment variables are ASCII strings that can be assigned values of your choice. The set of these strings is known as the environment. A small part of memory is reserved for storing environment variables. When a value is stored as an environment variable, it can be used by any program in the session. Setting Environment Variables To assign a value to an environment variable, use the set configuration command. To use this command, specify the environment-variable name followed by the value that will be assigned to it. Environment variables commonly set in your CONFIG.SYS file include PATH (directory search path) and DPATH (data search path). Programmers will often set the LIB (library search path), INCLUDE (include-file search path), and TMP (temporary-file search path) environment variables in their CONFIG.SYS file. You can also define and set your own environment variables. For example, to set the PATH environment variable so that MS OS/2 searches the current directory first (the default setting), the BIN directory on drive C second, and the OS2 directory on drive C third, add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: set path=c:\ebin;c:\eos2 You can turn on the MS OS/2 command-line editing feature by setting an environment variable. To do this, place the following line in your CONFIG.SYS file: set keys=on For information about how to use the keys command, see Chapter 8, "Running Cmd." Inheriting Environment Variables Normally, environment variables such as PATH and DPATH are set up in your CONFIG.SYS file. The first time the MS OS/2 command interpreter (cmd) is run, these environment variables are used to set up the initial working environment. When you start cmd from Desktop Manager, the new session inherits the environment variables found in the CONFIG.SYS file. If you start cmd from an existing session, however, the new version of cmd inherits the environment variables of the current session. If you have modified any environment variables, the current environment may not be the same as the environment that is specified in the CONFIG.SYS file. Starting a Program When You Start Your System By using configuration commands, you can have MS OS/2 start programs when you start or restart your system. Whether you run a program as a foreground or a background program depends on whether the program needs to receive input. A program that needs to receive input from the keyboard or mouse must run as a foreground program. Starting a Program as a Foreground Program You use the call configuration command to specify an MS OS/2 program that you want to be started as a foreground program whenever you start or restart your system. You can specify any program that you can start from cmd. For example, you can use the call configuration command to start a program that makes a network connection each time you start your system. (This kind of program should run as a foreground program, because you will need to type your password.) To start a program called Connect, located in the NETWORK directory of drive C, you would add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: call=c:\network\connect.exe If the program you want to start requires arguments, simply type the arguments after the program name. Starting a Program as a Background Program You use the run configuration command to specify a program that you want to be started as a background program when you start or restart your system. Suppose that you want to start a keyboard speed-up program called Fastype each time you start MS OS/2. If this program is located in the root directory of drive C, you would add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: run=c:\fastype.exe Keep the following points in mind when you use the call and run configuration commands: ■ You can specify multiple call and run commands in your CONFIG.SYS file. ■ You cannot specify a batch program with either the call or run command. ■ MS OS/2 processes call and run commands in the order in which they appear in the CONFIG.SYS file. ■ MS OS/2 processes all device commands before processing call and run commands. ■ Programs specified by the call and run commands are started before the user interface is initialized. Setting Up Code-Page Support MS OS/2 provides national-language support through the use of code pages. A code page is a set of 256 characters that MS OS/2 recognizes and processes. MS OS/2 currently supports four code pages: United States (437), Multilingual (850), Portuguese (860), and Canadian French (863). New programs, including Presentation Manager, use the multilingual code page. If you have a program that uses a different code page, you will need to set up the code page during installation or by modifying your CONFIG.SYS file. You can set up one code page for a single country, or you can set up two code pages to enable code-page switching. If you set up two code pages, you can use the chcp command to switch between them. This command is described in Chapter 8, "Running Cmd." You can also switch between the keyboard layouts of two different countries by using the keyb utility. This utility is described in Chapter 9, "Using MS OS/2 Utilities." If you are using the United States version of MS OS/2, the correct code-page information is set up automatically during installation. If, however, you want your keyboard, screen, and printer to be customized to support characters and keyboard layouts for countries other than the United States, you must modify the default code-page information. Normally, you modify code-page information during installation. On-screen messages prompt you for the country you want to support. The information you supply is written to your CONFIG.SYS file. If you want to change code-page information after installing MS OS/2, follow the instructions in this section to modify your CONFIG.SYS file. To set up code-page support for a country other than the United States, you must do the following: ■ Set the country code for the country for which you want code-page support by using the country configuration command. ■ Prepare the code page(s) for the system by using the codepage configuration command. ■ Prepare devices for use with the code page(s) you have prepared, by using the devinfo configuration command. The following sections describe how to use each of these commands in your CONFIG.SYS file. After you have specified the country code and code page(s) to be used, and after you have prepared devices for use with code pages, restart your computer. When you restart your computer, MS OS/2 reads the information in your CONFIG.SYS file and loads the proper code page(s) in memory. Supported Countries The following list shows each country (or group of countries) that is supported by MS OS/2, and its related country code, default code-page assignment (assigned during the installation of MS OS/2, when you choose the country), keyboard code, and keyboard subcode. The primary code page is listed first, followed by the secondary code page. You use the values in this list when you add the country, codepage, and devinfo configuration commands to your CONFIG.SYS file, and when you use the keyb utility. ╓┌─────────────────────┌────────┌────────┌─────────┌─────────────────────────╖ Country Code Keyboard Keyboard Country code pages code subcode ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Australia 061 437,850 ─ ─ Belgium 032 850,437 BE 120 Canada (French) 002 863,850 CF 058 Denmark 045 850 DK 159 Finland 358 850,437 SU 153 France 033 437,850 FR 189, 120 Germany 049 850,437 GR 129 Italy 039 437,850 IT 141, 142 Latin America 003 437,850 LA 171 Netherlands 031 850,437 NL 143 Country Code Keyboard Keyboard Country code pages code subcode ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Netherlands 031 850,437 NL 143 Norway 047 850 NO 155 Portugal 351 850,860 PO 163 Spain 034 850,437 SP 172 Sweden 046 850,437 SV 153 Switzerland (French) 041 850,437 SF 150F Switzerland (German) 041 850,437 SG 150G United Kingdom 044 437,850 UK 166, 168 United States 001 437,850 US 103 ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note Although they are not shown in the list, the following code pages are available with special versions of MS OS/2: Arabic, Asia, Hebrew, Japan, Korea, People's Republic of China, and Taiwan. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Setting the Country Code To define country-dependent information such as time, date, and urrency conventions, use the country configuration command. To use this command, you type country= followed by the country code. If your COUNTRY.SYS file is not in the root directory of your start-up drive, you type the drive, directory path, and filename after the country code. For example, if your COUNTRY.SYS file is in the OS2 directory on drive C, you would type the following to specify the country code for France: country=,c:\os2\country.sys The country code 033 sets country-specific information for France. Preparing Code Pages To select the code page(s) that will be prepared for use, use the codepage configuration command. To use this command, you type codepage= followed by one or two code-page numbers. (If you are preparing two code pages, separate the two numbers with a comma.) Valid code-page numbers are as follows: Number Code page ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── 437 United States 850 Multilingual 860 Portuguese 863 Canadian French For example, to prepare code pages 437 (United States) and 850 (Multilingual), type the following: codepage=,850 If you prepare two code pages, you can use the chcp command to switch back and forth between the two character sets. See the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference for the charac- ter sets for code pages 437, 850, 860, and 863. Preparing Devices for Use with Code Pages To prepare your keyboard, screen, and printer so that they can use the code pages that you specified with the codepage configuration command, use the devinfo configuration command. If you want to be able to switch code pages, one devinfo command is required for each device you prepare. The devinfo command for your keyboard specifies your keyboard layout and the file that contains the keyboard-translation tables. To set up your keyboard for use with code pages, you type devinfo=kbd followed by a keyboard code and the drive, directory path, and name of the file containing the keyboard-translation table. By default, MS OS/2 supplies keyboard-translation tables in a file called KEYBOARD.DCP. For example, to prepare a French keyboard for use with code pages, place the following line in your CONFIG.SYS file: devinfo=kbd,fr,c:\os2\keyboard.dcp .ET The devinfo command for your screen specifies the type of screen (either EGA or VGA) and the file that contains a video-font table for displaying characters in each of the supported code pages. To set up your screen for use with code pages, you type devinfo=scr followed by the type of graphics adapter you have and the drive, directory path, and name of the file that contains the system code pages for the screen. The file VIOTBL.DCP contains the screen-translation table. For example, to prepare an EGA display for use with code pages, place the following line in your CONFIG.SYS file: devinfo=scr,ega,c:\os2\viotbl.dcp The devinfo command for your printer specifies the printer type, the printer name, and the file that contains a printer-font table for each code page supported by MS OS/2. To set up your printer for use with code pages, you type devinfo= followed by the port name, the printer name, and the drive, directory path, and name of the file that contains the printer-font tables. For example, to prepare an IBM 4201 printer that is connected to the LPT1 printer port for use with code pages, you would add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: devinfo=lpt1,4201,c:\os2\4201.dcp If your computer includes code-page information in read-only memory (ROM), specify the code page and font-identification number for each .RT ROM or printer cartridge by using the ROM specification after the name of the file containing the printer-font table. If you do not specify multiple fonts or font-identification numbers, the devinfo command uses zero as the font-identification number. For example, to prepare an IBM 4201 printer that is connected to printer port LPT1 for use with code page 437 that is contained in ROM, add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: devinfo=lpt1,4201,c:\os2\4201.dcp,rom=(437,0) Remember that you must have one devinfo command for each device on your system if you want to be able to switch code pages. Controlling System Tracing The system trace is a record of actions, such as hardware interrupts or functions, that are taken or processed by the operating system while it runs. Recording these events can be helpful in developing programs for MS OS/2. There are two configuration commands that control system tracing: tracebuf and trace. (There are also two utilities you can use to control system tracing: trace and tracefmt. For information about these utilities, see the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference.) Setting the Size of the System-Trace Buffer To set the size of the system-trace buffer, you place a tracebuf command in your CONFIG.SYS file. The system-trace buffer is where system-trace events are stored. If you enable tracing but do not specify the size of the trace buffer, a 4K buffer is automatically set up for you. To use the tracebuf command, type tracebuf= followed by the size of the trace buffer (in kilobytes). The size can be from 1 through 63K. For example, to set up a trace buffer of 8K, add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: tracebuf= A trace buffer of between 4 and 8K is enough for most trace activities. Turning Tracing On or Off To turn tracing on or off for some or all events, you use the trace configuration command. To use this command, you should specify an event code that corresponds to a type of system activity, such as file-system events. The event code must be a decimal number from zero through 255. To turn tracing on, type trace=on followed by one or more event codes. Typing trace=on without an event code records all system-trace events. To turn tracing off, type trace=off followed by one or more event codes. Typing trace=off without an event code cancels the recording of all system-trace events. You can turn tracing on for specified event codes. For example, to turn on only the system-trace events zero and 1, add the following lines to your CONFIG.SYS file: trace=off trace=on 0, 1 You can also selectively turn tracing off for certain events. If you want to turn tracing on for all events except 31 through 34, add the following lines to your CONFIG.SYS file: trace=on trace=off 31, 32, 33, 34 You can use the tracefmt utility to view trace-event records. For more information about using tracefmt, see the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. Chapter 16 Using the High-Performance File System ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Introduction A new feature of MS OS/2 is the capability for multiple file systems to exist under one operating system. The original file allocation table (FAT) file system is still present, but you can install additional file systems as well. In MS OS/2, an additional file system is referred to as an installable file system (IFS). One installable file system you can use is the high-performance file system (HPFS). HPFS completes the tasks of writing to and reading from your hard disk much faster than the FAT file system can. HPFS also allows you to use up to 254 characters, including some characters not allowed in the FAT file system, when naming files and directories; this lets you create more descriptive names. HPFS uses disk caching and lazy writing to speed up reading and writing tasks. In most cases, when a program needs to write information to the hard disk, it is not necessary that the information be written immediately. When you use HPFS, information that a program sends to be written to the disk is temporarily stored in a cache in memory. This is called disk caching. Later, when the disk would otherwise be idle, HPFS writes the information to the disk as a background activity. This is called lazy writing. This chapter describes how to install and use HPFS. It explains some of the choices you make when you install HPFS and describes the utilities that run differently in HPFS. Installing HPFS You can install HPFS in two ways: by using the MS OS/2 installation program or by copying the HPFS files to your hard disk and adding information to your CONFIG.SYS file. .ET If you choose to format the primary partition during the installation of MS OS/2, you must also choose which file system to use. You can choose either HPFS or the FAT file system. You can format the primary partition to use one file system and format the extended partition to use the other. For example, you might format the primary partition to use HPFS and format the extended partition to use the FAT file system. If you have chosen to use the dual-boot option on your hard disk, however, you cannot format your primary partition to use HPFS. If you choose to install dual boot and format an extended partition to use HPFS, you will not be able to use the HPFS partition when you are running DOS. The dual-boot option is described in Appendix B, "Using MS OS/2 Dual Boot." .RT To install HPFS on your primary partition by using the MS OS/2 installation program, follow these steps: 1. Insert the MS OS/2 Install disk in drive A and restart your system by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL. 2. Follow the installation instructions on your screen to create, size, and format the HPFS primary partition. The installation program copies the HPFS and MS OS/2 information to your hard disk. 3. When the installation program has finished, restart your system by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL. If you already have MS OS/2 (version 1.2 or higher) installed and running on your computer, you can install HPFS on the extended partition without going through the installation program again. To do this, follow these steps: 1. Either use Fixed Disk Utility to create an extended partition and logical drive on your hard disk or use an existing extended partition. (For information about Fixed Disk Utility, see Chapter 13, "Setting Up Your Hard Disk.") 2. Using System Editor or another text editor, add the following lines to the beginning of your CONFIG.SYS file: ifs=c:\os2\hpfs.ifs /c:64 run=c:\os2\cache.exe /lazy:on 3. Using System Editor or another text editor, remove any diskcache configuration commands from your CONFIG.SYS file. 4. Close all running programs, then restart your system by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL. 5. Format the new logical drive to use HPFS, by using the format utility with the /fs:hpfs option. For example, if the new logical drive is drive D, type the following: format d: /fs:hpfs Using Files and Directories in HPFS In HPFS, you can give files and directories more descriptive names than you can in the FAT file system. When using these HPFS nam- ing features, you need to be aware of how HPFS names work with MS OS/2. Naming rules and the interaction of HPFS filenames with MS OS/2 are described in the following sections. (For rules on nam- ing FAT files and directories, see Chapter 3, "Using File Manager.") Naming HPFS Files and Directories HPFS file and directory names may include several features that are not available in the FAT file system: ■ File and directory names can be up to 254 characters long. (In the FAT file system, there is a limit of 8-character filenames and 3-character filename extensions.) Paths and filenames together can be up to 259 characters long. ■ Blank spaces and periods (.) can occur anywhere in the file or directory name. However, blanks and/or periods that occur at the end of a name are not treated by MS OS/2 as a significant part of the name. For example, the filenames "xyz", "xyz.", "xyz. ", and "xyz ." are stored by MS OS/2 as "xyz". ■ The following characters can be used in naming HPFS files and directories: \, + = [ ] ; Note that the following characters are not currently allowed in any file system with MS OS/2: < > : " / \ | * ? ■ You can use uppercase, lowercase, or mixed case when naming HPFS files and directories; the name is displayed in the directory list just as you typed it. However, MS OS/2 ignores case in comparing file and directory names─for example, "Taxfile", "TAXFILE", and "taxfile" are the same filename to MS OS/2; only one can exist in a given directory. Using HPFS File and Directory Names with Commands You must enclose any blanks or special characters in double quotation marks when you type an HPFS filename or directory name on the command line so that MS OS/2 will recognize that they are part of the name. You can put the double quotation marks around the entire name or around just the blanks and special characters. For example, to copy a file named "My Tax File, 1988.txt" to a directory on drive C named "Current Taxes", you can type either of the following: copy "My Tax File, 1988.txt" c:\e"Current Taxes" copy My" "Tax" "File", "1988.txt c:\e\Current" "Taxes You must also use double quotation marks any time a file or directory that uses the HPFS naming features is listed in batch programs. Transferring HPFS Files and Directories Because not all file systems support the use of HPFS naming features, you must be careful when copying and moving files between file systems. In general, HPFS file and directory names that use HPFS naming features cannot be transferred from HPFS to the FAT file system. However, these names can be preserved in the file's extended attributes when you transfer the file. For example, if you copy or move a file that uses HPFS naming features between file systems by using File Manager, you have the option of preserving the HPFS name in the file's extended attributes. (If you use the copy or move command at the command prompt, you must rename the file; the HPFS filename is lost.) Copying a File or Directory By using File Manager, you can copy a file or directory between two different file systems without losing the HPFS name. File Manager gives you the option of preserving the name in an extended attribute. The following example describes one method of copying a file by using File Manager; you also can use other methods to copy files. For more information, see Chapter 3, "Using File Manager." To copy a file with an HPFS name from a drive that uses HPFS to a drive that uses the FAT file system, follow these steps: 1. Switch to the Main-group window and choose File Manager. 2. Open the directory window that contains the file you want to copy. 3. Select the file you want to copy. 4. Select the File menu and choose the Copy command. The Copy dialog box appears. 5. In the To text box, type the drive letter of the FAT file-system drive you want to copy the file to. (You can specify a floppy-disk drive.) 6. Choose the Copy button. 7. If you have chosen to confirm all proposed FAT file-system names, the Confirm dialog box appears. (To confirm proposed filenames, select the Options menu and choose the Confirmation command.) Choose the Copy button to accept the proposed filename, or type a new filename and choose the Copy button. Another dialog box appears if a file with the proposed filename already exists. Moving a File or Directory You can move a file or directory between different file systems by using File Manager; the method is very similar to copying a file or directory. When you use File Manager to move a file or directory, you have the option of preserving a name that uses HPFS naming features in an extended attribute. For more information about moving files and directories using File Manager, see Chapter 3, "Using File Manager." ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note In HPFS, you can change the case of a file or directory name (for example, from uppercase to lowercase) by using the move or the rename command and giving the file or directory a new name. You can use the Move or Rename command available in File Manager or type the command at the command prompt; when you type the new name, use the case you want the name to have. For example, to change MYTAXFILE.TXT to lowercase from the command line, you would type the following: ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── move MYTAXFILE.TXT mytaxfile.txt Preserving HPFS Names When File Manager copies or moves a file or directory that uses HPFS naming features from HPFS to the FAT file system, it modifies the name for use in the FAT file system and stores the HPFS name in the .LONGNAME extended attribute. In general, File Manager generates proposed file and directory names as follows: .ET ■ The base of the name is the first eight characters or the characters up to the last period, whichever limit is encountered first. ■ Any periods or special characters in the base of the name are converted to underscores (_). ■ The first three characters after the last period become the filename extension. (If there is no period in the filename, the proposed filename has no extension.) ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note If you copy files from HPFS to MS-DOS or a version of MS OS/2 that does not support extended attributes (versions earlier than 1.2), HPFS names are lost. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Copying or Moving a File or Directory from FAT to HPFS When you copy or move a file or directory from the FAT file system to HPFS, File Manager determines whether it has the .LONGNAME extended attribute. File Manager also checks to make sure that the destination file system can use extended attributes. If the extended .RT attribute exists and the destination file system can use it, the name is restored and the .LONGNAME extended attribute is deleted from the source file or directory. If you have chosen to confirm all name restorations, a dialog box appears, asking you to confirm the restored name. When you choose the Yes button, the name is restored and the extended attribute is deleted. Using HPFS Files with DOS and Earlier OS/2 Programs HPFS files and directories that use characters that FAT does not allow generally are not compatible with DOS programs or with programs written for earlier versions of MS OS/2. DOS Programs Because DOS uses the FAT file system, DOS programs are unable to process HPFS files whose names contain characters that are not allowed by FAT, multiple periods (...), or blank spaces immediately in front of the period preceding the filename extension (for example, "mytaxfile .txt"). When a DOS program attempts to access one of these files, the process is not completed correctly. For example, when you use the dir command in the DOS session, files and directories with long names or with spaces or characters not allowed by FAT do not appear in the directory list. Since DOS ignores case in file or directory names, names that use uppercase or mixed case but are otherwise acceptable are processed correctly. Earlier OS/2 Programs You can run a program written for MS OS/2 version 1.1 or earlier from a directory that uses HPFS naming features. However, like DOS programs, earlier OS/2 programs cannot process filenames or directory names that use the HPFS naming features. Using Wildcard Characters in HPFS You can use the asterisk (*) and question mark (?) wildcard characters in HPFS. Wildcard characters take the place of other characters when you specify filenames and directories in commands and utilities, and are especially useful when you work with groups of files. Generally, the asterisk matches zero or more characters in a filename. For example, suppose you have the following files: M MAY MAY.TXT MAY.TXT.BAK If you type may* when you are using the chdir, del, dir, or rmdir commands in HPFS, the files MAY, MAY.TXT, and MAY.TXT.BAK are matched. If you type *. instead, the files M and MAY are matched. When you use the copy, move, or rename commands in HPFS, the asterisk works a little differently. With each of these commands, you specify source and destination filenames. When you use the asterisk in the source filename, it works as previously described. However, when you use the asterisk in the destination filename, the system copies the characters that follow the asterisk to the destination filename. For example, if you type copy *.c *.bak, the copy command first finds all files that end with .C. Then it makes a copy of each file, using as the name of the new file the characters that precede the .C and adding the new .BAK extension. The question mark matches any single character in a filename except a period (.). For example, JUNE? matches JUNE, JUNE1, and JUNE2, but does not match JUNE3.TXT or JUNE.TXT. Wildcard characters are valid only in the filename that follows the last backslash (\) of a path. Running a Utility in HPFS Most MS OS/2 utilities work the same in different file systems. In the few cases in which this is not true, MS OS/2 determines which file system you are using and runs the utility for that file system. This section describes the following HPFS utilities, which work differently in HPFS than they do in the FAT file system: ■ format ■ chkdsk ■ recover Formatting a Disk Before you can use a hard or floppy disk, you must prepare it by using the format utility. You can use the format utility on new disks and on disks that have been formatted before. When you format a disk, any information it contained is lost. MS OS/2 formats a hard disk to use HPFS when you use the /fs option with the format utility. You cannot format a floppy disk to use HPFS. If you are running HPFS and you use the format utility to format a floppy disk, the disk is formatted as a FAT floppy disk. Suppose you want to format logical drive D on your hard disk to use HPFS. To do this, type the following: format d: /fs:hpfs There is no need to use the /t:tracks or /n:sectors options: HPFS always formats the disk to use the maximum number of tracks and sectors. Displaying Disk Information The chkdsk utility displays status information about a disk and checks a disk for errors. In HPFS, you use chkdsk as described in Chapter 12, "Maintaining Your System," except for the following: ■ Information about recovered files and extended attributes is stored in files named FILEnnnn Appendix A ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── specify a sequential number assigned by MS OS/2.) .LI Recovered directories and their contents are stored as directories named DIRnnnn.CHK. (The characters nnnn specify a sequential number assigned by MS OS/2.) These files are stored in a new directory named FOUND, located in the root directory. Recovering a File from a Damaged Disk You can use the recover utility to recover a file that has been stored in a bad sector on your hard disk. This utility can recover individual files only; it cannot recover an entire disk. To recover a file, you type recover followed by the name of the file to be recovered. The recover utility gives a recovered file its original filename, if possible. If the original filename cannot be restored, recover creates the file FILEnnnn.REC in the directory where the original file existed. (The characters nnnn specify a sequential number assigned by MS OS/2.) If the sector(s) containing a damaged file cannot be recovered, the recover utility retains the original file size by filling the unrecovered portion of the file with zeros. If no errors are found in a file's extended attributes, the recover utility preserves the extended attributes. If errors are found in the extended attributes, the recover utility recovers as many of the attributes as possible and stores them in a file named EAnnnn.REC. (The characters nnnn specify a sequential number assigned by MS OS/2.) Quitting HPFS It is important to use the Shutdown command to quit MS OS/2 when you are using the high-performance file system (HPFS). The Shutdown command (on the Desktop menu in Desktop Manager) saves any files that had been unsaved and closes the file system in an orderly fashion. If you do not use the Shutdown command to quit MS OS/2, the next time you restart your computer using HPFS or access an HPFS drive you may receive a message telling you that the drive may be in an inconsistent state. If you receive this message, prevent the loss of data by using the chkdsk utility to check your disk for errors. To use the chkdsk utility to fix errors on your HPFS drive, follow this step: ■ Type chkdsk followed by the HPFS drive letter and the /f option and press ENTER. For example, to fix the errors on logical drive D, which has been formatted to use HPFS, you would type the following: chkdsk d: /f If you have more than one HPFS-formatted drive, you must use the chkdsk utility to fix the errors on each of them. Chapter 17 Using MS OS/2 Device Drivers ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Introduction A device driver is a program that gives information to MS OS/2 about how to use a device in your system. MS OS/2 contains various device drivers, including a device driver for the keyboard, screen, printer, floppy-disk drive, hard-disk drive, and clock. MS OS/2 automatically loads this driver during installation. MS OS/2 also contains device drivers that you use with optional devices. Optional devices include a serial communications port, an external floppy-disk drive, and a pointing device such as a mouse. You need to set up the drivers for these optional devices, since MS OS/2 does not load them automatically. There are additional MS OS/2 device drivers that work with a device in your system to support or enhance its capabilities. These include drivers for using ANSI escape sequences and virtual disk drives. These drivers also need to be set up. In addition to the many device drivers MS OS/2 offers, device drivers are generally provided with any devices you might purchase. For more information about using a specific device driver, see the entry for that driver in the Microsoft Operating System/2 Command Reference. Setting Up an MS OS/2 Device Driver You set up a device driver in MS OS/2 by using the device configuration command to specify the name of the driver to load and its location in your system. (The device command is described in Chapter 15, "Using MS OS/2 Configuration Commands.") This chapter describes the device drivers that you need to set up. In general, if a device driver is not located in the root directory of the disk from which you start your system, you need to specify the full path of the device driver in the device command. You can set up a device driver in your system when you install MS OS/2, or you can use the ddinstal utility to set one up later, without running the installation program again. Ddinstal copies device-driver files to your system and adds the appropriate device command to your CONFIG.SYS file. To use the ddinstal program, follow these steps: 1. At the MS OS/2 command prompt, type ddinstal and press the ENTER key. 2. Insert the disk that contains the device driver to be installed and press ENTER. 3. Ddinstal lists any .DDP (device-driver profile) files it finds. Select the device driver you want set up from the list and press ENTER. (You can select more than one driver.) 4. When prompted, insert the MS OS/2 Install disk and restart your system by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL. (Although you use the Install disk, you will not go through the complete installation process again.) When the system restarts, the ddinstal utility continues to install the device driver. 5. When the program is finished, remove the Install disk and restart your system. Changing a Display Device Driver During installation, MS OS/2 determines what kind of display you have and loads the appropriate display device driver. If you replace your display, you may need to change the display driver. The following section describes how to change a display driver without running the installation program again. To change the display driver, follow these steps: 1. Define the VIDEO_DEVICES environment variable by using the set configuration command in your CONFIG.SYS file and listing one or more environment variables that describe video device handlers. For example, to use an IBM Enhanced Graphics Adapter, define the VIDEO_DEVICES environment variable by placing the following line in your CONFIG.SYS file: set video_devices=vio_ibmega 2. Define the environment variable that you specified with the set video_devices command, by specifying a video device handler. Each video device handler is made up of one or more components that provide a set of functions to be used by a specific display adapter. Using the example from step one of the preceding list, you would define the VIO_IBMEGA variable by specifying the BVHEGA.DLL dynamic-link library, placing the following line in your CONFIG.SYS file: set vio_ibmega=device(bvhega) As another example, suppose you were using an IBM 8514 display attached to an IBM 8514A display adapter. You would need to place the following lines in your CONFIG.SYS file: set video_devices=vio_ibm8514a set vio_ibm8514a=device(bvhvga,bvh8514a) In the preceding example, the BVHVGA.DLL and BVH8514A.DLL dynamic-link libraries both support the IBM 8514A display adapter. You can also specify the use of two displays. The following example shows the configuration commands you would specify if you were using both an IBM 8514 display attached to an IBM 8514A display adapter and an IBM PS/2 display attached to a VGA adapter: set video_devices=vio_ibmvga,vio_ibm8514a set vio_ibmvga=device(bvhvga) set vio_ibm8514a=device(bvh8514a) You may need to specify an additional display driver so that MS OS/2 can make use of the graphics functions of your display adapter while you are in the DOS session. You would do this by specifying the EGA.SYS device driver in the device configuration command in your CONFIG.SYS file, as follows: device=c:\os2\ega.sys This example directs MS OS/2 to look for the EGA.SYS device driver in the OS2 directory on drive C. Using ANSI Escape Sequences You can use ANSI escape sequences in the DOS session by setting up the ANSI.SYS device driver. ANSI escape sequences let you move the cursor, set the color for characters, and set the number of character rows and columns for the screen. Many programs use ANSI escape sequences to format screen output. In most cases, your program generates any ANSI escape sequences that are used. For example, terminal-emulation programs often pass ANSI escape sequences from a program on a mainframe computer to the screen. The ANSI escape sequences are correctly displayed only if the ANSI.SYS device driver is set up. You can direct MS OS/2 to load the ANSI.SYS device driver by adding the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: device=ansi.sys This example directs MS OS/2 to load the ANSI.SYS driver from the root directory of the drive from which you start your system. When MS OS/2 loads the device driver, it enables the ANSI escape sequences for the DOS session. (Support for ANSI escape sequences is automatically available in OS/2 sessions. You can turn off ANSI support by using the ansi utility.) If the ANSI.SYS driver is not located in the root directory, you need to specify the complete path, as follows: device=c:\os2\ansi.sys This example directs MS OS/2 to load the ANSI.SYS driver from the OS2 directory. If you need to design a screen display in a program you are writing, you may want to use ANSI escape sequences. Each escape sequence is a series of characters that begins with the escape character (ASCII code 27). For a list of the escape sequences and a description of what they do, see Appendix A, "ANSI Escape Sequences." Using a Serial Communications Port You can use the serial communications port by setting up the appropriate device driver for it. A communications port is an adapter to which the cable of a communications device is attached. Devices such as modems and serial printers are connected to this port. Before you set up a device driver for a communications port, you must choose the driver that works with your hardware. Refer to the following list to find the driver that matches your hardware: Driver Hardware ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── COM01.SYS IBM PC/AT or compatible computer COM02.SYS IBM PS/2 To direct MS OS/2 to load the COM01.SYS device driver from the OS2 directory on drive C, add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: device=c:\os2\com01.sys When this communications-port driver is loaded, MS OS/2 and DOS programs can use the serial communications ports on your IBM PC/AT (or compatible) computer. To use a communications port, you need to set up the port in addition to specifying the device driver. You set up a communications port by using Control Panel or by using the mode utility. (For information on the mode utility, see Chapter 12, "Maintaining Your System.") ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note If you want to use the serial version of the Microsoft Mouse, the command lines in the CONFIG.SYS file must appear in the following order: ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── device=c:\os2\pointdd.sys device=c:\os2\msser01.sys model= device=c:\os2\mouse.sys type=msser$ device=c:\os2\com01.sys Using a Logical Drive Letter You can use a logical drive letter to name a floppy-disk drive by setting up the EXTDSKDD.SYS device driver. A logical drive letter, in this case, is a name for a physical disk drive. (The logical disk drives that you can set up in an extended partition on your hard disk are also parts of a physical disk drive, but they are different from the logical drives that you use with EXTDSKDD.SYS.) Using a logical drive letter, you can name an external disk drive, or you can assign a second name (an alias) to a disk drive and copy files to different places on the same disk drive. For example, to direct MS OS/2 to load the EXTDSKDD.SYS device driver from the OS2 directory on drive C, add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: device=c:\os2\extdskdd.sys /d:2 When MS OS/2 loads the driver, your MS OS/2 and DOS programs can use an IBM external 720K 3-inch floppy-disk drive. By default, this logical drive has 80 tracks, nine sectors per track, and two read/write heads. The next available drive letter is assigned to the logical drive. If you want to copy from a logical drive on the external disk drive to a different logical drive on the same disk, add the following lines to your CONFIG.SYS file: device=c:\os2\extdskdd.sys /d:2 device=c:\os2\extdskdd.sys /d:2 This example directs MS OS/2 to load the EXTDSKDD.SYS device driver. The first line associates the next available drive letter with the external disk drive. The second line associates an additional drive letter (an alias) with the same external drive. This allows you to copy data from the external disk drive to a logical drive on the same disk. Using a Mouse You can use a mouse with your DOS and MS OS/2 programs by setting up a mouse driver. Many programs, especially Presentation Manager applications, use the mouse if one is available. Although a mouse is not required, it makes working with these programs easier and quicker. Setting Up a Mouse Driver To set up a mouse driver, you must choose the driver that matches your mouse hardware and your computer. You specify the driver in your CONFIG.SYS file by using the device configuration command. The following list shows some of the mouse drivers that are available with MS OS/2. Each is for use with IBM PC/AT (and compatible) computers. These drivers contain information MS OS/2 needs about a specific type of mouse. Driver Mouse ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── MSBUS01.SYS Bus (parallel) Microsoft Mouse MSINP01.SYS InPort(R) (parallel) Microsoft Mouse MSSER01.SYS Serial Microsoft Mouse PCMOU01.SYS Mouse Systems PC Mouse VISION01.SYS Visi-On Mouse with IBM PC/AT When you use the serial version of the Microsoft Mouse, you must specify the model argument on the command line. Valid values are 099 (the mouse with green buttons) and 199 (the mouse with white buttons). For example, to use the Microsoft Mouse (serial version) that has white buttons, you would specify the mouse-dependent device driver as follows: device=c:\os2\msser01.sys model= No matter what type of mouse you use, you must always specify the following three files in your CONFIG.SYS file: the mouse-dependent device driver, shown in the preceding list; the mouse-independent device driver, MOUSE.SYS; and the device driver for the mouse pointer, POINTDD.SYS. You specify these files by using the device configuration command. The mouse-dependent driver must always be specified before the mouse-independent driver. For example, to direct MS OS/2 to load the drivers for the pointer and InPort version of the Microsoft Mouse, add the following lines to your CONFIG.SYS file: device=c:\os2\msinp01.sys device=c:\os2\mouse.sys type=msinp$ device=c:\os2\epointdd.sys This example specifies that the pointer and mouse drivers are in the OS2 directory of the start-up drive. When MS OS/2 loads these drivers, both MS OS/2 and DOS programs can use the InPort version of the Microsoft Mouse on an IBM PC/AT (or compatible) computer. The type argument on the MOUSE.SYS command line specifies the type of mouse you are using; this argument is required. The following list shows the possible values of type for some of the mouse drivers that are available with MS OS/2: Driver Type ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── MSBUS01.SYS MSBUS$ MSINP01.SYS MSINP$ MSSER01.SYS MSSER$ PCMOU01.SYS PCMOU$ VISION01.SYS VISION$ Changing How the Mouse Device Driver Operates When you specify the mouse-dependent device driver, you can also specify the serial port to which the mouse is connected. You do this by using the serial option. For example, to specify that your mouse is connected to the COM2 serial port, add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: device=c:\os2\msser01.sys model= serial=com2 This example specifies that the serial version of the Microsoft Mouse is attached to the COM2 serial port. When you specify the mouse-independent device driver, MOUSE.SYS, you can also specify the sessions in which you will use the mouse. You do this by using the mode option. (Do not confuse the mode option of this command with the mode utility.) For example, to direct MS OS/2 to enable the serial version of the Microsoft Mouse in all sessions, add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: device=c:\os2\mouse.sys type=msser$ mode=b This example directs MS OS/2 to use the mouse driver in Presentation Manager, full-screen, and DOS sessions. To use the mouse only in Presentation Manager and full-screen sessions, change the value that is specified for the mode option to p (protected mode). To use the mouse only in the DOS session, change the value that is specified for the mode option to r (real mode). On the same device command line, you can also specify the qsize option. The qsize option lets you control how much information your program receives from the mouse. If you want to use the mouse with DOS applications, you also need to set up the EGA.SYS device driver. To direct MS OS/2 to load this driver, add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: device=c:\os2\ega.sys This example specifies that the EGA.SYS device driver is in the OS2 directory on drive C. Using a Virtual Disk Drive You can use a virtual disk drive in full-screen and DOS sessions by setting up the VDISK.SYS device driver. When you use a virtual disk drive, your system simulates a disk drive in memory and provides quick access to files stored there. You may want to use a virtual disk as a place in which temporary files are stored. Since temporary files are deleted when they are no longer needed, there is no reason to save them on a disk. To direct MS OS/2 to load the VDISK.SYS device driver from the OS2 directory on drive C, add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: device=c:\os2\vdisk.sys This line must come after any device commands that load the EXTDSKDD.SYS device driver in your CONFIG.SYS file. If the driver is found, MS OS/2 loads it and creates a 64K virtual disk with 128-byte sectors, 64 directory entries, and the name of the next available drive letter. (These are the default values.) Any information stored on a virtual disk is lost when your computer is restarted or turned off. If you use a virtual disk for temporary files, be sure to specify the appropriate drive letter with the set temp configuration command in your CONFIG.SYS file. This command tells MS OS/2 where to place all temporary files. You can have more than one virtual disk drive. Drive letters for virtual disks are assigned in the order in which the device commands appear in the CONFIG.SYS file. When you specify memory for a virtual disk, that memory is no longer available for other programs to use. You may want to increase the size of the virtual disk drive, since 64K is not very much space. You could do this by adding the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: device=c:\os2\vdisk.sys 128 This example creates a 128K virtual disk with 128-byte sectors and 64 directory entries. You may also want to change the number of directory entries for the virtual disk drive. You could do this by adding the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: device=c:\os2\vdisk.sys 256,128 This example creates a 256K virtual disk with 128-byte sectors and 128 directory entries. Note that a sector size is not specified; the place where it would be specified is designated by a comma. (If you wanted to specify all three values, you would separate them with spaces.) When you specify a value for the number of directory entries, the value is rounded up to the nearest sector-size boundary. For example, if you give a value of 25 and your sector size is 512 bytes, 25 will be rounded up to 32, which is the next multiple of 16. (There are sixteen 32-byte directory entries in 512 bytes.) The maximum size of a virtual disk depends on the amount of available memory in your system, but it cannot be larger than 4 megabytes. If the virtual disk size specified is too large to fit in memory, VDISK.SYS will attempt to make a virtual disk that is 16K. This may result in a virtual disk with a different number of directory entries than you specified. When you start or restart your system, MS OS/2 displays information about any virtual disk it creates. The information includes the assigned drive letter, the size of the virtual disk, its sector size, and the number of directory entries. You can also use the chkdsk utility to determine the size of a virtual disk. Part 4: Appendixes ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Appendix A ANSI Escape Sequences ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Introduction This appendix lists all of the escape sequences that you can use with the ANSI.SYS device driver in the DOS session or with the ansi command in either a full-screen session or in a window running the MS OS/2 command interpreter, cmd. ANSI escape sequences affect cursor positioning, erase functions, and screen graphics. You must type the escape sequences exactly as shown, without spaces. Each escape sequence begins with the escape character (ASCII code 27) and the left-bracket character. (You cannot press the ESC key to produce the escape character.) Cursor Functions The following functions affect the movement of the cursor. Cursor Position esc[row;colH or esc[row;colf These escape sequences move the cursor to the position specified by the row and column arguments. When no arguments are provided, the cursor moves to the home position (the upper-left corner of the screen). Cursor Up esc[nA This escape sequence moves the cursor up n rows without changing columns. If the cursor is already on the top line, no action is taken. Cursor Down esc[nB This escape sequence moves the cursor down n rows without changing columns. If the cursor is already on the bottom row, no action is taken. Cursor Forward esc[nC This escape sequence moves the cursor forward n columns without changing lines. If the cursor is already in the far-right column, no action is taken. Cursor Backward esc[nD This escape sequence moves the cursor back n columns without changing lines. If the cursor is already in the far-left column, no action is taken. Save Cursor Position esc[s This escape sequence saves the current cursor position; the cursor can be returned to the saved position by using the Restore Cursor Position escape sequence. Restore Cursor Position esc[u This escape sequence restores the cursor to the position specified with the Save Cursor Position escape sequence. Erase Functions The following functions erase the screen. Erase Display esc[2J This escape sequence erases the contents of the screen and moves the cursor to the home position (the upper-left corner of the screen). Erase Line esc[K This escape sequence erases from the cursor to the end of the line (including the cursor position). Screen Graphics Functions The following functions affect screen graphics. Set Graphics Rendition esc[g; ... ;gm This escape sequence calls the graphics functions specified by the numeric values described in the following list. The specified functions remain in effect until the next occurrence of this escape sequence. This escape sequence works only if the screen device supports graphics. The g variable may have any of the following values: Value Function ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── 0 All attributes off 1 Bold on 2 Faint on 3 Italic on 5 Blink on 6 Rapid-blink on 7 Reverse video on 8 Concealed on 30 Black foreground 31 Red foreground Value Function ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── 32 Green foreground 33 Yellow foreground 34 Blue foreground 35 Magenta foreground 36 Cyan foreground 37 White foreground 40 Black background 41 Red background 42 Green background 43 Yellow background 44 Blue background 45 Magenta background 46 Cyan background 47 White background 48 Subscript 49 Superscript The values 30 through 47 meet the ISO 6429 standard. Set Mode esc[=sh This escape sequence changes some of the capabilities and features of the screen. The s variable can have any of the following values: Value Function ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── 0 40 * 25 black and white 1 40 * 25 color 2 80 * 25 black and white 3 80 * 25 color Value Function ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── 4 320 * 200 color 5 320 * 200 black and white 6 640 * 200 black and white 7 Wraps at the end of each line Reset Mode esc[=sl The values for this escape sequence are the same as for Set Mode, except that the value 7 turns off line wrapping. Appendix B Using MS OS/2 Dual Boot ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Introduction This appendix describes how to install and use MS OS/2 dual boot on your computer. With dual boot, you can start MS OS/2 and DOS from the same hard disk. Installing Dual Boot In order to install MS OS/2 dual boot on your hard disk, you must already have either DOS (version 3.2 or higher) or an earlier version of MS OS/2 dual boot installed on your computer. The MS OS/2 installation program does not install DOS on your computer. If you have chosen to use the high-performance file system (HPFS) on your start-up drive, you cannot install dual boot. Creating a DOS Directory If you have been running only DOS, you must create a DOS directory and copy your DOS files and directories to this new directory before you install MS OS/2 dual boot. To create the directory and copy your files to it, follow these steps: 1. Use the mkdir command to create a new directory for your DOS files. For example, to create a directory named DOS on drive C, type the following: mkdir c:\dos 2. Copy all of your DOS files to the new DOS directory. For example, to copy all of your DOS files from the root directory on drive C to the new DOS directory, type the following: copy c:\*.* c:\dos Editing the DOS Configuration Files You also need to specify the location of your DOS files for MS OS/2 by modifying the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files, using System Editor or another text editor. If you have only DOS on your computer, be sure to modify the original CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files in your root (C:\) directory. (Do not modify the copies in the C:\DOS directory. You may delete these copies if you wish, since they are not used by MS OS/2 dual boot.) If you have an earlier version of MS OS/2, be sure to make your changes to the DOS versions of these files. When you are running DOS, the files you should change are named CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT; when you are running MS OS/2, the files are named CONFIG.DOS and AUTOEXEC.DOS. To modify the CONFIG.SYS file, follow these steps: 1. Specify the location of COMMANDthe shell configuration command. For example, if COMMANDDOS directory on drive C, place the following line in your CONFIG.SYS file: shell=c:\dos\command.com c:\dos /p 2. Edit any device and country configuration commands so that they specify the new DOS directory. To modify the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, follow these steps: 1. Edit the set comspec command so that it specifies the location of the DOS command interpreter, COMMANDDOS directory on drive C, place the following line in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file: set comspec=c:\dos\command.com 2. Add the DOS directory to the set path command. For example, the edited set path command could look like the following: set path=c:\batch;c:\bin;c:\os2;c:\dos 3. Add the following line to copy COMMANDC: copy c:\dos\command.com c:\ Running the Installation Program You install dual boot when you use the MS OS/2 installation program, which determines if you can use dual boot on your computer by checking whether you have already installed DOS (version 3.2 or higher) or a previous version of MS OS/2 dual boot. Make sure that you have moved your DOS files to a separate directory and modified your DOS configuration files before you run the MS OS/2 installation program. To install dual boot, follow these steps: 1. Insert the MS OS/2 Install disk into drive A and turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, restart it by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL. 2. Follow the instructions on your screen to install dual boot. After you install dual boot on your computer, you will find copies of the DOS configuration files in the C:\OS2\SYSTEM directory of your hard disk. When you start MS OS/2, the MS OS/2 configuration files are copied to CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT in your root (C:\) directory, and the DOS configuration files that had been named CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT are copied to the files CONFIG.DOS and AUTOEXEC.DOS in your C:\OS2\SYSTEM directory. When you start DOS, this process is reversed: the DOS configuration files are copied to CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT in your root directory, and the MS OS/2 files are copied to CONFIG.OS2 and AUTOEXEC.OS2 in your C:\OS2\SYSTEM directory. Using Dual Boot Once you have installed MS OS/2 dual boot, you use the boot utility to specify which operating system you want to use the next time you start your computer. For example, if you are using DOS and you decide you want to use MS OS/2 instead, you start the boot utility in DOS and specify MS OS/2. The boot utility renames the DOS and MS OS/2 configuration files and then prompts you to restart your computer. The following sections describe how to use the boot utility. Starting MS OS/2 To use the boot utility to start MS OS/2, follow these steps: 1. At the DOS prompt, type the following: c:\os2\boot /os2 2. The boot utility runs and renames the DOS and MS OS/2 configuration files. When it has finished, the boot utility restarts your computer using MS OS/2. Starting DOS Using dual boot, you can start DOS from the command line of an OS/2 session, or you can add the boot utility to the Utilities group and start DOS from there. By adding the boot utility to the Utilities group, you can start the utility easier and faster. To add the boot utility to the Utilities group, follow these steps: 1. Select the Program menu from the Utilities group and choose the New command. 2. Type the following in the Program Title box: Dual Boot 3. Type the following in the Path and File Name box: c:\os2\boot.com 4. Type the following in the Parameters box: /dos 5. Choose the Add button. For more information about adding an application or utility to a program group, see Chapter 2, "Running Applications with MS OS/2." To start DOS by using the Dual Boot utility, switch to the Utilities group and double-click "Dual Boot." The utility copies the MS OS/2 and DOS configuration files, saves any changes you have made to data files, closes the file system and any running applications, and restarts your computer. If you upgrade your version of DOS while using MS OS/2 dual boot, make sure you run the DOS installation program from DOS, not from MS OS/2; otherwise, the MS OS/2 boot record and configuration files could be overwritten. The DOS installation program can sometimes make the OS2LDR file noncontiguous. This file must be contiguous in order to start MS OS/2. If, when you start MS OS/2, you receive a message telling you that the OS2LDR file is noncontiguous, you must reinstall MS OS/2. Displaying the Current Boot Setting You can also use the boot utility to query which operating system will be used the next time you start your computer. To do this, type the following: c:\os2\boot /q Appendix C Using Picture Utilities ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Introduction The picture utilities─Print Picture, Display Picture, and Convert Picture File─are Presentation Manager applications that you use to work with special graphics files. The graphics files can be in either of two formats: picture interchange or metafile. Picture interchange files have a .PIF filename extension and metafiles have a .MET filename extension. You use the picture utilities to print, display, and convert these graphics files in Presentation Manager. This appendix briefly describes the purpose of the picture utilities and how to start them. For more detailed information on working with the picture utilities, use Help. Starting Picture Utilities You start the picture utilities from the Utilities group window. To start a picture utility, follow these steps: 1. Switch to Desktop Manager and select the Utilities group. 2. In the Utilities group, choose the picture utility you want to start─Print Picture, Display Picture, or Convert Picture File. Print Picture You use the Print Picture utility to print graphics files on your printer. The filenames end with either a .MET or .PIF extension. You use the commands on the File menu to select and print these graphics files. The following list summarizes the commands on the File menu: Command Action ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Select Specifies the graphics files to be printed. The files must have a .PIF or .MET filename extension. Files with a .PIF extension are converted to metafile format (.MET extension) for printing with Presentation Manager. Print Prints graphics files on your printer. You can specify the number of copies you want. Exit Quits the Print Picture utility. You set printing options by using the commands on the Control menu. The following list summarizes the commands on the Control menu: Command Action ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Change Printer Selects the printer to use (if you have more than one printer set up on your system). Printer Options Controls such options as color and background. Paper Selects the paper size. Printing Area Controls the area of the graphics file that prints. Picture Adjusts the scale and position of the graphics file that prints. Display Picture You use the Display Picture utility to view graphics files in Presentation Manager. The files have a .MET or .PIF filename extension. You select the graphics files to view by using the File menu. The following list summarizes the commands on the File menu: Command Action ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Display Selects the graphics files to view. You can control how long each file is displayed by selecting Interactive Display or Automatic Display. Exit Quits the Display Picture utility. After you select graphics files to view by using the Display command, the first graphics file you selected appears in the Display Picture work area. You use the commands on the Control menu to view the next file or to stop viewing files. The following list summarizes the commands on the Control menu: Command Action ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Show Next Picture Displays the next graphics file you selected. Quit Sequence Stops displaying graphics files before all the files you selected are displayed. Convert Picture File The Convert Picture File utility converts graphics files from picture interchange format to metafile format─the format used in Presentation Manager. You may need to use this utility when you transfer graphics files that were created on a different system to Presentation Manager. You can also use Convert Picture File to convert files with font and typeface information to a Presentation Manager format. You can use Convert Picture File to do the following: ■ Convert graphics files with a .PIF extension to files with a .MET extension ■ Convert font files with a .SMB extension to files with a The following list summarizes the commands on the File menu: Command Action ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Convert Selects and converts the files. You can convert files with a .PIF extension to .MET files or files with a .SMB extension to Exit Quits the Convert Picture File utility. Terms ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── A ───── Active Describes a window or icon that is selected in Presentation Manager─the window or icon to which the next keystroke or command will apply. When a window becomes active, the title bar changes color. ANSI character set The American National Standards Institute 8-bit character set. It contains 256 characters. ANSI escape sequence A sequence of ASCII characters used to control the keyboard and screen. The first two characters in the sequence must be the escape character and the left-bracket character. The ANSI character set can be used in full-screen session by using the ansi command, and in the DOS session by installing the ANSI.SYS device driver by using the device command in your CONFIG.SYS file. Application A program used for a particular kind of work, such as word processing or database management. See also DOS application, Full-screen application, and Presentation Manager application. Application file See Program file. Archive flag A file characteristic that determines whether the file will be copied when you use the xcopy, backup, or restore utilities. See also Flag. Argument An option and/or variable accepted by an MS OS/2 command to clarify or enhance its meaning and use. Arrow pointer See Pointer. ASCII character set The American Standard Code for Information Interchange 8-bit character set. The set consists of the first 128 (zero through 127) characters of the ANSI character set. Asynchronous Describes a device or system that is capable of sending and receiving communication at the same time. Attribute See Extended attribute. AUTOEXEC.BAT A batch file that contains a series of DOS commands and which automatically runs when you start or restart your system. This batch file affects the DOS session only. B ───── Background program A program that is running but cannot receive user input and does not send output to the screen. See also Foreground program. Background session A session that is not currently active. Batch file A program file with the .BAT extension or the .CMD extension. See also Batch program. Batch command A command used specifically in batch programs. Batch processor The part of the command interpreter that processes batch commands. Batch program An ASCII file that contains one or more DOS or MS OS/2 commands. Batch files that run in the DOS session have the extension .BAT. Those that run in a full-screen session or in a window have the extension .CMD. When a batch program is run, the commands are processed sequentially by command (in the DOS session) or cmd (in an OS/2 session). Boot See Start. Buffer A temporary storage area in the computer's memory that MS OS/2 uses to store information. Byte A unit of information used by a computer (eight bits). C ───── Cache See Disk cache. Cascade To arrange windows so that they overlap one another. Check box A small square box that appears in a Presentation Manager dialog box and that can be turned on or off. When a check box is turned on, an "X" appears in the box, indicating that the option it represents is selected. In a group of check boxes, several check boxes can be selected at the same time. Choose To perform an action that carries out a command in a menu or dialog box. See also Select. Click To press and release a mouse button quickly. Clipboard A storage area in memory that can hold data being passed from one window to another. You can use the clipboard to store various data formats. Cluster A unit of disk space that is assigned to files or directories. A lost cluster is a section of a file that is no longer associated with the original file; MS OS/2 cannot read, write to, or modify data in a lost cluster. Cmd The MS OS/2 command interpreter. Cmd translates what you type at the command prompt into instructions the computer can use. See also Command and Command interpreter. Code page A table that is used to set up language-specific versions of MS OS/2. You can change the code page your system uses by using the chcp command. Collapse To hide a directory level in File Manager by using the Collapse Branch command. Command A word or phrase, usually found in a menu or typed at the command prompt, that you use to perform a task. Command The DOS command interpreter. Command translates what you type at the command prompt into instructions the computer can use. See also Cmd and Command interpreter. Command button A rectangular button in a dialog box that carries out or cancels an action. Command interpreter A command-line interface that enables you to run commonly used, "built-in" commands, batch programs, and MS OS/2 programs. Command line The place where you type a command. Command-line interface A user interface that allows the user to type commands on the command line. Command prompt The character or characters that appear on the screen at the beginning of the command line. For example, [C:\e] is a standard MS OS/2 prompt. The command prompt indicates that the computer is ready to receive input. You can customize the command prompt by using the prompt command. Communications port A port that you can use to connect your computer to a modem, another computer, or some kinds of printers. Transmits one bit at a time; also called a serial port. See also Port. CONFIG.SYS A start-up file that contains configuration commands. See also Configuration. Configuration The way your computer is set up to operate. Configuration commands in the CONFIG.SYS file help you customize the way MS OS/2 runs on your computer. Control Panel A Presentation Manager application that you use to change settings affecting the cursor-blink rate, screen colors, beep, time and date, border sizes, logo, and mouse. CPU (central processing unit) The part of the computer that receives and carries out instructions. Current directory The directory you are working in. Current drive The drive that you are currently using. Cursor Usually a blinking line or small box on the screen that shows where the next character you type will appear. See also Insertion point and Selection cursor. D ───── Data file A file that contains information. Data path The search path for data files. Default Describes an option, command, or device that is automatically selected or chosen by the system. For example, in most Presentation Manager dialog boxes that contain command buttons, one of the buttons has a bold border when the dialog box appears, indicating that it is the default setting and will be chosen automatically if you press the ENTER key. You can override a default setting by selecting the appropriate option, command, or device. Desktop Manager A Presentation Manager application that you use to start other applications. Destination disk The disk to which you copy or move files. See also Source disk. Destination drive The drive at which files arrive when you use commands such as copy or move. See also Source drive. Destination file A file to which information is copied. See also Source file. Device A component of the system's hardware configuration, such as a modem, printer, mouse, or disk drive. Device driver A program that controls how a computer interacts with another device, such as a printer. A device driver allows other devices to communicate with the computer. Dialog box A box that appears when a Presentation Manager application requires further information from the user before it can carry out a command. It also appears when the application provides information. For example, if you choose the New command from the Group menu in Desktop Manager, a dialog box appears, asking for the name of the group you want to add. Direct-access method A way to choose a command or select a menu in a Presentation Manager application by pressing the key that corresponds to the underlined character in the command or menu name. DIRECTION keys The four arrow keys on the keypad. The names of the individual DIRECTION keys refer to the direction the arrow points: the UP key, the DOWN key, the RIGHT key, and the LEFT key. Directory Part of a structure for organizing your files into convenient groups. A directory is like a file drawer that holds a particular group of files. A directory can contain both files and other directories (sometimes called subdirectories). You can see the directories on your system by using File Manager or by typing the dir command at the command prompt. See also Subdirectory. Directory path See Path. Disk A storage medium: hard disk (fixed disk) and floppy disk (5-inch and 3-inch disk). Disk cache A buffer in which MS OS/2 stores information that it has recently read from your hard disk. When an application is instructed to read information from the hard disk, it first checks for the information in the disk cache. Disk drive Hardware that is used to read from and write to a floppy disk or hard disk. Disk-drive icon The small symbol that appears in some Presentation Manager applications representing a disk drive in your system. Display adapter Hardware that converts (adapts) memory into video output. See also Graphics adapter. DOS application An application that must be run in the DOS session. See also DOS session. DOS session A separate environment created in MS OS/2 in which you can run a DOS application. The DOS session is almost like a separate DOS-only computer with 640K of memory. You can run only one application at a time in the DOS session. You can switch to other MS OS/2 sessions by pressing ALT+ESC or to the Task List by pressing CTRL+ESC. Double-click To rapidly press and release a mouse button twice. Drag To press and hold down the mouse button while moving the mouse. For example, you can move a Presentation Manager window to another location on the screen by dragging its title bar. Drive letter The letter used to label a drive─for example, C. See also Disk drive. Dynamic-link library A replaceable component of a program file. Many MS OS/2 applications use dynamic-link libraries to reduce the size of program files and to allow program files to share resources. E ───── Environment The characteristics of your computer's configuration that can be used by a program or the operating system. Each of the sessions created by MS OS/2 is a separate environment. This term is also used to describe the complete set of environment variables. See also Environment variable. Environment variable A string consisting of environment information, such as a drive, path, or filename, associated with a symbolic name that can be used by MS OS/2. You use the set command to define environment variables. See also Environment. Error message See Message. Escape sequence Codes that affect the appearance of the screen, the movement of the cursor, and the use of the keyboard keys─for example, ANSI escape sequences. Exception condition An error condition caused by an instruction the CPU cannot carry out, such as dividing by zero. Executable file See Program file. Expanded memory Extra memory installed to use with DOS. MS OS/2 does not use expanded memory. If you have expanded memory in your computer, you should convert it to extended mem- ory. See the manual for your extended-memory board for details. Extend a selection To select additional items in a window after the first item is selected. Extended attribute Additional information, such as author, application type, and file history, that some MS OS/2 applications attach to files and directories. Extended attributes are used by other applications, the file system, or the operating system itself. Extended memory Memory beyond the usual 1-megabyte limit of computers such as the IBM PC/AT and compatible models. To use extended memory, you must install an extended-memory board. MS OS/2 can use extended memory. Extended partition An optional partition on a hard disk that can contain additional data files. See also Partition. Extension See Filename extension. F ───── FAT (file allocation table) A map of a disk that indicates which clusters are allocated to each file and in what order. A file system that uses this type of mapping is referred to as a FAT file system. FCB (file-control block) A data structure used by some DOS applications to control an open file. New programs usually use file handles instead of FCBs. File A collection of related information treated as a unit. There are different kinds of files, including program files and data files. For example, a file might contain the text of a letter. File allocation table See FAT. File-control block See FCB. File extension See Filename extension. File flag See Flag. File handle An identification code that is assigned to a file when the file is created or opened. An MS OS/2 program uses the file handle whenever it reads from or writes to the file. File Manager A Presentation Manager application that you use to view and organize your files and directories. Filename A sequence of ASCII characters used to identify a file. In the FAT file system, a filename can be up to 8 characters long, with an optional extension of up to 3 characters. In the high-performance file system (HPFS), the filename can be up to 254 characters long and can include characters that are not allowed in the FAT file system. Filename extension The period and up to three letters at the end of a filename in the FAT file system. The extension identifies the kind of information a file contains. For example, the extensions .CMD and .BAT indicate that the file contains a batch program. Some applications append an extension to the files that you create with them. File system The part of the operating system that takes care of such tasks as disk-space management, file storage, and directory structure. Filter A utility that processes input from a device or file and sends it to an output device or file. Refers to the find, more, and sort commands. Flag A characteristic of a file that can be turned on or off by a user. There are four file flags: archive, hidden, read-only, and system. Floppy disk A 3-inch or 5-inch disk than can easily be inserted into and taken out of your computer and that is used for storing programs and files. Font A complete set of characters of a particular design and size. Foreground program A program that can receive user input and send output. See also Background program. Foreground session The session that is currently active. Format To prepare a disk so that it can hold information. Formatting a disk divides the storage area on the disk into sections and erases whatever information was on it. Full-screen application An MS OS/2 application that uses the full screen. A full-screen application is not part of the Presentation Manager session. Full-screen session A separate environment where MS OS/2 applications run in a full screen. You can start multiple full-screen sessions. From a full-screen session, you can switch to other applications by pressing ALT+ESC or to the Task List by pressing CTRL+ESC. See also Session. Function keys The keys labeled F1, F2, and so on. The purpose of the function keys is defined by the application that uses them. For example, in some applications, pressing the F1 key displays Help information. G ───── Gigabyte Approximately one billion bytes; 1000 megabytes. Graphical user interface A user interface, such as Presentation Manager, that offers you an environment of windows, menus, and dialog boxes in which you can work. Graphics adapter A display adapter that converts memory into video output and provides the capability to display video graphics on your screen. See also Display adapter. Grayed Describes a command or option that is listed in a menu or dialog box but cannot be chosen or selected. The command or option appears in gray type. For example, after you have enlarged a window to its full size, the Maximize command in the System menu is grayed. H ───── Hard disk A disk that can store much more information than a floppy disk and is generally installed in the computer. Hard error An error condition caused by something external to the software, such as an open disk-drive door or an incorrectly formatted disk. Hardware The equipment that makes up your computer system, including such items as the keyboard, mouse, disk drives, and monitor. Hidden file A file that cannot be viewed. High-density floppy disk A 5-inch floppy disk formatted to store approximately 1.2 megabytes of information. HPFS (high-performance file system) A file system that can be installed in addition to the FAT file system in MS OS/2 1.2 and later versions. HPFS uses disk caching and lazy writing, and allows filenames that are longer than FAT filenames and that can contain characters not allowed by the FAT file system. I ───── Icon A small symbol that represents an application or a session that is running in memory. Icons can also represent items (such as a document file) that the user wants to work on, directories, and actions that the user wants to perform. Icon area The area at the bottom of the screen that is normally used to display the application-session icons. You can move icons from the icon area. IFS See Installable file system. Inactive Describes a window or icon that is not selected in Presentation Manager. See also Active and Select. Initialization The system start-up process. This process includes reading MS OS/2 start-up files. Insertion point The place where text is inserted when you type. The insertion point appears as a blinking vertical line in dialog boxes. Installable file system (IFS) A file system installed in addition to the FAT file system in MS OS/2 version 1.2─for example, HPFS. J ───── Job identifier A number that identifies a file waiting to be printed. The job identifier is listed in the work area of the Print Manager application. K ───── Keyname The word, abbreviation, or ASCII character denoting a key on the keyboard. Kilobyte Approximately one thousand bytes. (The exact number is 1024 bytes.) L ───── Label An argument of the goto batch command that controls which part of the batch file is switched to by the batch program. See also Volume label. Lazy writing Sending (writing) information from a disk cache to the disk when the disk is idle or a specified amount of time has passed. List box A box within a dialog box that lists all the items that a command could affect. Logical drive An extended partition on a hard disk that is treated as a separate disk drive─for example, a 60-megabyte hard disk could be divided into logical drives C and D, each of which could have 30 megabytes of storage space. See also Virtual drive. Lost cluster See Cluster. Low-density floppy disk A 5-inch floppy disk formatted to store approximately 360K of information. M ───── Maximize box A small box that is located at the right of the title bar in a window. Mouse users can click the Maximize box to enlarge a window to its maximum size. See also Restore box. Megabyte Approximately one million bytes; 1024 kilobytes. Memory The place where data and programs are stored while your computer is turned on; often referred to as random-access memory or RAM. Any information that is stored in memory is lost when you turn off your computer. To permanently save information located in memory, you need to copy the information to a disk. Memory is often measured in kilobytes and megabytes. Memory-resident program A program that is loaded into system memory and stays there until you remove it or turn off your computer. Memory swapping See Swap. Menu A list of commands in a window. Menu names appear in the menu bar near the top of the window. Menu bar The horizontal bar below the title bar that lists the names of an application's menus in a window. Message A sentence or short paragraph that may appear on your screen. An error message contains a message-identification number that consists of three letters followed by a four-digit number. You can get more information about an error message by typing help and the message number at the command prompt. Minimize box A small box that is located at the right of the title bar in a window. Mouse users can click the Minimize box to reduce a window to an icon. See also Restore box. Move A technique by which MS OS/2 can combine unused areas of storage into larger areas that can be used by a program or application. Multitasking A feature of MS OS/2 that lets you run more than one program at the same time. N ───── NUL A destination to which you can redirect output. Anything sent to NUL is discarded. Numeric keypad The part of your keyboard that resembles a 10-key adding machine or calculator keyboard. In addition to numbers, the numeric keypad also contains the HOME, END, PAGE UP, PAGE DOWN, and DIRECTION keys. O ───── Operating system A collection of instructions that tell your computer how to run programs and applications. MS OS/2 is a multitasking operating system. Operator A symbol representing an operation that can be performed on data. Mathematical operators include +, -, /, and *. Batch-file operators include AND (&&) and OR (||). Option A predefined argument you can use on the command line to modify the way a command operates. Option button A circular button in a dialog box that you can use to select an option for a particular menu command. Within a group of related option buttons, you can make only one selection. See also Check box. OS/2 session One of two types of sessions in MS OS/2 (the other is the DOS session). The Presentation Manager session, a full-screen session, and cmd running in a window are each an OS/2 session. See also Session. P ───── Parent directory Any directory that contains other directories. See also Subdirectory and Root directory. Partition A section created on the hard disk by the operating system to organize the contents of the disk. Different partitions can contain different file systems. See also Extended partition. Path A collection of directory names separated by backslashes (\e\). A path describes the location of a directory within the directory structure of the system. Pipe A symbol (|) used to redirect the output from one command and use it as input for the next command. Placeholder A word in a syntax line that represents specific information you will need to supply. Point To move the pointer on the screen until it rests on the item you want to select or choose. Pointer A small symbol that appears in MS OS/2 and DOS applications if you have installed a mouse. The pointer indicates which area of the screen will be affected when you click the mouse button. Although it is usually shaped like an arrow, the pointer may change shape during certain tasks. Pointing device A device used to move a pointer on the screen─for example, a mouse, a trackball, or a joystick. Port A slot on your computer to which you can connect a printer, modem, or other input or output device. MS OS/2 recognizes three printer ports (LPT1, LPT2, and LPT3) and three communications ports (COM1, COM2, and COM3). Presentation Manager The graphical user interface that is part of MS OS/2. See also Graphical user interface, Presentation Manager application, and Presentation Manager session. Presentation Manager application Any application designed for the Presentation Manager graphical user interface. These applications run in windows, and their commands are organized into menus. They also take advantage of other features of the Presentation Manager interface, such as dialog boxes and icons. Presentation Manager session An OS/2 session that uses the Presentation Manager graphical user interface. See also Session. Primary code page The primary (default) character set used by your computer. See also Code page. Primary partition The partition on your hard disk that must contain system start-up files. Printer Installer A Presentation Manager application that you can use to install printers. Print job A file waiting to be printed. You can check the status of print jobs by using the Print Manager application. Print Manager A Presentation Manager application that organizes and controls printing. You can use this application to print files and to view and control the jobs in the print queue. Print Manager is started each time you start MS OS/2. Print queue A list of files waiting to be printed. You can look at this list by using the Print Manager application. Processor The integrated circuit where your computer interprets and processes information; also called the central processing unit or CPU. Program A set of instructions that tells the computer how to perform a task. See also Application and Batch program. Program file A file that contains a program. In the FAT file system, the file must have one of the following filename extensions: .CMD, .EXE, Programming language A notational system used to create a computer program. Prompt See Command prompt. Q ───── Queue See Print queue. Queue processor A program that prepares a file to be sent to the printer. A queue-processing program is copied to your hard disk when you install MS OS/2 on your system. Quit To close an application or program. R ───── Read-only flag A file characteristic that determines whether or not the contents of a file can be modified. See also Flag. Redirect To send the output from a command to a file instead of the screen. Replaceable parameter A command option that you can define each time you run a batch program. A replaceable parameter is represented by a percent sign (%) followed by a digit from zero through 9. Restart To press CTRL+ALT+DEL when your computer is turned on. See also Start. Restore To return a window to its last size and position. Also, a utility that restores files that were backed up by using the backup utility. Restore box The small box in a Presentation Manager window that contains a down and an up arrow. The box appears at the right of the title bar after you have enlarged a window to its full size. Mouse users can click the Restore box to return the window to its previous size and position. Root directory The primary directory on a disk. All other directories on the disk are secondary. The root directory is represented by a backslash (\). Run To start an application. S ───── Save To store a file or changes to a file on a disk. Screen The surface upon which information is displayed on a video device. Screenful The quantity of information that fills an entire screen or the entire display area of a window. Scroll To move text or graphics up or down, or left or right, in order to see information that cannot fit on the screen. You typically use the DIRECTION keys or the mouse to scroll. Scroll bar A bar that appears at the right side and/or bottom of some Presentation Manager windows and in some dialog boxes. The scroll bar contains a scroll arrow at either end and a scroll box that moves within the scroll bar, reflecting your position in a file or a list. Mouse users can click parts of the scroll bar to scroll a file. Keyboard users use the DIRECTION keys to accomplish the same thing. Scroll box The box within a scroll bar that you move by using either the mouse or the DIRECTION keys. Its position in the scroll bar corresponds to your general location in a file or dialog box; for example, if it is near the end of the scroll bar, you are near the end of the file or list. Search path The list of directories in which MS OS/2 searches for a file or directory. Secondary code page The alternative character set you can use instead of the primary code page. See also Code page. Sector Part of a track on a disk; the smallest unit of disk space that the computer can access. Sectors are created when the disk is formatted. See also Track. Select To indicate the item that the next command you choose will affect. See also Choose. Selection cursor The mark that shows you where you are working in a window or dialog box and what you have selected. The selection cursor varies, depending on where you are working; it is often a dark bar or dotted box. Session An environment in MS OS/2 that determines which applications or programs you can run and how you interact with them. See also DOS session, Full-screen session, OS/2 session, and Presentation Manager session. Shortcut key A special key or key sequence, available for some commands, that you can press to carry out the command without first selecting a menu. The shortcut keys for a command are often listed on the menu to the right of the command name. Software The set of instructions that make computer hardware perform tasks. Both the operating system that allows you to run applications and the applications themselves are software. Source disk The disk from which you copy or move files. See also Destination disk. Source drive The drive you start from when you use commands such as copy or move. See also Destination drive. Source file A file from which information is copied. See also Destination file. Spooler A program that organizes and prioritizes print jobs. Standard error The destination of error messages sent by your computer. The computer usually sends error messages to the screen, but you can redirect them to other destinations. Standard input The source of input to your computer. The computer usually receives input from the keyboard, but you can redirect input from other sources. Standard output The destination of output from your computer. The computer usually sends output to the screen, but you can redirect output to other destinations. Start To turn on your computer, or to press CTRL+ALT+DEL when your computer is already on. Start-up disk The disk that contains your MS OS/2 start-up files. Start-up drive The drive that contains your MS OS/2 start-up files. Start-up files The files that set up the working environment of your computer when you start MS OS/2. String Characters, terms, or other symbols, in a connected sequence. Subdirectory A directory contained within another directory. All directories are subdirectories of the root directory. Swap To temporarily transfer an application or information between system memory and the hard disk. Switch To move from one application to another or from one session to another. You can switch between applications by using the mouse, the keyboard, or the Task List. System disk A disk that contains programs and information that are used by MS OS/2 to start your computer. See also Start-up disk. System menu The menu in the top left-hand corner of windows that contains commands that control the size and position of the window. The menu is represented by a small box with a bar in it. Icons, some dialog boxes, and windows within application work areas also have System menus. System-menu box The small box containing a bar, at the left of the title bar in a window. T ───── Task List A list of the user's current activities. The Task List can be used to switch among the applications you have running on your computer. Text box A box in a dialog box in which you type information needed to carry out a command. Text file See Data file. Thread Part of a program that can be scheduled by MS OS/2 to run on its own. Tile To arrange windows side by side. Time slice The amount of execution time the system will give a thread before reassigning the CPU to another thread. Title bar The horizontal bar across the top of each Presentation Manager window. The title bar contains the name of the application in that window, the System-menu box, and either the Maximize and Minimize boxes or the Minimize and Restore boxes. Track A path where information is stored on a disk. A track is made up of sectors. See also Sector. U ───── User interface The part of the operating system the user interacts with. See also Command-line interface and Graphical user interface. Utility A program provided with MS OS/2 that performs such system-maintenance tasks as copying files or formatting disks. For example, backup is an MS OS/2 utility for creating backup copies of your files. V ───── Virtual disk A section of RAM that is set up as a disk drive. Read and write operations are faster to a virtual disk than they are to a hard or floppy disk. See also Memory. Volume label The name you assign to a disk as part of the disk-formatting process. Volume serial number An individual disk-identification number assigned by MS OS/2 as part of the disk-formatting process. W ───── Wildcard character A character (either * or ?) that can be included in a filename to indicate any character or group of characters that might match that position in other filenames. For example, *.EXE represents every file in a directory that ends with the .EXE filename extension. Window A rectangular region of the screen within which the user can interact with an application. The screen can be divided into several windows, each of which is dedicated to a different application or task. See also Work-area window. Work area The area of a window in which you work with an application. Work-area window A window you can open within a work area. Write-protected disk A floppy disk you can read from but not write to. INDEX ────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── && (double ampersand) ; (double greater-than sign) %% (double percent sign) for command shift command .. (double period) || (double pipe) ; (greater-than sign);prompt ( ) (parentheses) () (parentheses) prompt \&. (period) & (ampersand) prompt & (ampersand) combining redirection in batch program * (asterisk) wildcard @ (at symbol) ^ (caret) : (colon) $ (dollar sign) = (equal sign) environment variable (greater-than sign);redirecting output < (less-than sign) prompt - (minus sign) % (percent sign) batch programs for command replaceable parameter . (period) | (pipe symbol) prompt | (pipe) + (plus sign) ? (question mark) \&.. (double period) 4201.DCP file 5202.DCP file A Absolute priority Active process maxwait command Active window Add Association dialog box Add command Add Font command Add Font dialog box Add Printer dialog box Add Printer Driver command Add Printer Driver dialog box Add queue dialog box Add Queue Driver command Add Queue Driver dialog box Adding file to another file printer driver printer program group program Alias, logical drive letter Ampersand (&) combining redirection in batch program prompt And symbol (&&) ANSI escape sequences ansi utility ANSI.SYS device driver description list ANSI support full-screen session Ansi utility ANSI.SYS device driver Append utility Append directory to path file to file output to file Application Defaults command Application active window adding a font file arguments arranging windows background Cascade command changing information copying copying filename fixed-size window full-screen OS/2 full-screen OS/2;ansi utility full-screen OS/2;default full-screen OS/2;defined full-screen OS/2;Format Diskette full-screen OS/2;Help information full-screen OS/2;moving between full-screen OS/2;scrolling window contents full-screen OS/2;sizing a window full-screen OS/2;start-up files full-screen OS/2;System menu full-screen OS/2;window full-screen OS/2;working with getting Help graphics problems groups Help information icon listed in Desktop Manager logo display time Main Group Maximize command messages Presentation Manager printing a file quitting quitting running in memory saving information about screen scrolling selecting starting starting;from cmd starting;from DOS starting;more than one starting;PATH variable switching System-menu box Task List Tile command title bar title, in Program group visible on screen window Archive attribute Archive flag Argument device setting in batch program New Program dialog box parallel port serial port shifting substituting Arrange menu ASCII file, recovering Assign utility recover utility Associate command Asterisk (*) Asynchronous-communication At symbol (@) Attrib utility AUTOEXEC.BAT dual boot AUTOEXEC.DOS Automatic transit-flow control Autosave dialog box B Background program detach command redirecting messages from starting Backslash (\e) Backup utility see restoring files Restore utility /a option /d option /L option /m option /s option /t option adding files to backup disk archive flag file erased file last modified Backup batch program diskcopy utility file;archive flag .BAT extension Batch processor Batch program /q option backup call command cmd creating echo filename extension goto command help label pause command repeating a task replaceable parameter run command shift command special characters start command start-up files starting stopping using Baud rate Binary file, copying Block file Bold type Bookmark command Command Reference Boot utility /os2 option /q option adding to Utilities group using Border Width command Border Width dialog box Brackets ([ ]) Break command Buffer, tracebuf command Buffers command Button Cancel Index Keys message By name command By type command Bytes available on disk in bad sectors C Call command Canadian French code page Canadian, French, code page Cancel All Jobs command Cancel button Cancel Job command Canceling print job print job selection Capital letters Caret (^) Cascade command Cd command Change Association dialog box Change Flags command Change Flags dialog box Change Printer dialog box Change Queue dialog box Changing application information character size code page code pages CONFIG.SYS date default application information default printer directory display device driver drive environment variable file, read-only flag filename;rename command path print queues printer drivers printer names program groups prompt time user interface Character set codepage command graftabl utility Character deleting, System Editor displaying in batch program redirection symbol sorting by special, in batch program Characters per line display mode parallel printer Chcp command Check box defined selecting Check mark defined group name Text command .CHK extension Chkdsk utility /f option /v option DOS session EAnnnn.CHK FILEnnnn.CHK HPFS join utility subst utility virtual disk drive CHKDSK.COM Clearing screen Click selecting Clipboard Close All dialog box Close All Directories command Close command closing a directory window defined dialog box File Manager Help window quitting quitting;MS OS/2 command interpreter quitting;Presentation Manager application shortcut keys Closing dialog box directory window window Cls command .CMD extension Cmd batch program defined directory naming conventions end automatically environment filename conventions icon initializing location, set comspec command output print command printing a file prompt quitting running in a window search path, setting start-up files starting a utility starting an application starting Code page changing codepage command countries supported default device graftabl utility installation keyb utility prepared for system printer ROM, devinfo command setting up sort utility Code see code pages Code page country keyboard Codepage command Collapsing a directory level Colon (:) Color display Column, sorting by COM01.SYS device driver COM02.SYS device driver COM1 COM2 COM3 Combining files Command button default defined selecting selection cursor Command interpreter command DOS session, shell command Help command MS OS/2, protshell command Command line argument notational conventions starting program Command Reference Append To File command Bookmark command bookmark;adding bookmark;deleting clipboard Collapse All command Collapse Branch command Contents command Contents window Copy command Copy To File command copying topic information defined Exit command Expand All command Expand Branch command Expand One Level command Index command main topic;expanding marking topics Options menu Previous command Print command Print dialog box options printing topic information quitting reviewing a topic Search command Search dialog box options searching topic information selecting a topic Services menu set bookshelf command subtopic;collapsed subtopic;hidden subtopic;minus sign (-) subtopic;plus sign (+) TAB key table of contents Viewed Pages command viewing a marked topic viewing a subtopic viewing a topic viewing an index topic viewing topic information COMMAND.COM Command see button Command button see filter More utility, Sort utility see md Mkdir command see System Editor System Editor Add Font Add Printer Driver Add Queue Driver Add and symbol (&&) ansi Application Defaults Associate AUTOEXEC.BAT Autosave basic method batch program Border Width break buffers By name By type call Cancel All Jobs Cancel button Cancel Job Cascade cd Change Flags chcp choosing Close All Directories Close;defined Close;dialog box Close;directory window Close;File Manager Close;Help window Close;quitting cmd Close;quitting Presentation Manager \ Close;shortcut keys cls codepage combining in batch program Communications Port configuration commands copy Copy;copying a directory Copy;copying a file Country country Create Directory Create directory custom, creating date defined del Delete Font Delete;application Delete;directory Delete;directory Delete;program group Deselect All detach device device;call command device;run command device;virtual disk devinfo dir direct-access method diskcache do DOS command interpreter DOS commands dpath echo ellipsis (...) endlocal Exit Control Panel Exit File Manager Exit Expand All Expand Branch Expand One Level extproc fcbs File details;directory window information File Details;setting file flags File Details;sorting files File Manager File Options for goto grayed grouping together Help Hold Job Hold Queue Icon;directory window information if inactive Include;directory window information iopl Job Details Job Details Large Font libpath Maximize;Control Panel Maximize;defined Maximize;enlarging an icon Maximize;shortcut keys Maximize;sizing a window maxwait memman menu Minimize On Run Minimize;defined Minimize;reducing a window Minimize;shortcut keys Minimize;sizing a window mkdir Mouse Move;copying files into new directories Move;defined Move;directory Move;File Manager Move;icons Move;shortcut keys Move;window Name;directory window information Next notational conventions Open;directory window Open;starting an application or symbol (||) path pause pauseonerror piping input and output Print Job Next Print Printers Printers;changing printer-driver connections Printers;deleting a printer Printers;setting printer options priority Properties protectonly protshell Queues Refresh Now Refresh Release Job rem rename Rename, program group Repeat Job Restore;defined Restore;shortcut keys Restore;sizing a window Restore;window Resume Task List rmdir rmsize run Screen Colors Scroll Select All selecting separating in batch program set bookshelf set comspec set dpath set help set path set prompt set temp set setlocal shell shift shortcut keys Shutdown Now Size;defined Size;File Manager Size;shortcut keys Size;sizing a window Small Font Sort by Sort by;directory window information Start Job Again Start start swappath Switch Window Switch Window;File Manager System menu Task List;defined Task List;shortcut keys threads Tile time timeslice trace tracebuf type underlined letters Undo Selection ver vol Commands HPFS, using with Communication, asynchronous Communications Port command Communications Port dialog box Communications port connecting;serial port device driver DOS session mouse device driver Comp utility Compare Diskette utility Comparing directory file Comspec, set Con CONFIG.DOS CONFIG.SYS backup copy break command buffers command codepage command country command ddinstal program description device command devinfo command diskcache command dual boot editing error message fcbs command font files HPFS information installation iopl command libpath command maxwait command memman command modifying priority command protectonly command protshell command queue-driver file required commands rmsize command run command set bookshelf command set command set comspec command set dpath command set help command set path command set prompt command set temp command shell command swappath command threads command timeslice trace command tracebuf command Configuring DOS session parallel port Presentation Manager session serial port Confirm dialog box Confirmation messages Confirmations dialog box Contents window Command Reference Contiguous files Continuous retry Control Panel adding a font file adding a printer adjusting screen contrast changing;default printer changing;print-queue connections changing;printer options changing;printer-driver connections color values communications port country settings cursor-blink rate default printer defined deleting;font file deleting;printer fixed size font files general uses introduction logo display time mouse double-click mouse options port position on screen printer drivers printer name printing a file queue driver queues quitting removing;printer removing;queue driver screen colors screen contrast setting up a printer Size command starting system date System menu system time warning beep window CONTROL.00\fIn\fP file Convert Picture utility defined File menu using Copy command /a option /b option /v option con copying a directory copying a file Copy dialog box Copy Diskette utility Copy Program dialog box Copying see backup Backup utility directory disk file System Editor Country code Country command Country dialog box Country settings COUNTRY.SYS Create Directory command Create Directory dialog box Creating batch program command directory directory, cd command file CTRL key selecting;Command Reference CTS (clear to send) Ctty command Currency, country settings Current directory prompt, default drive Cursor-blink rate Cursor position System Editor D Data bit file path search path segment Date command Date country settings file modified of file or directory prompt restore utility setting Ddinstal utility .DDP extension Default button Default printer Default-drive prompt Del command Delete command directory directory program group Delete dialog box Delete dialog box Delete Font command Delete Font dialog box Delete Group dialog box Delete Printer Driver dialog box Delete Queue Driver dialog box Deleting character, System Editor directory directory environment variable file printer program group text, System Editor Density Deselect All command Desktop Manager active window adding;application adding;printer adding;program group arranging windows changing application information command buttons defined Desktop menu;Shutdown command Fixed Disk Utility Main Group reducing removing a printer renaming a program group saving program information starting a utility starting an application System menu Utilities group;Fixed Disk Utility Utility Programs group Desktop menu Shutdown command Detach command Detached program Device command call command run command virtual disk Device driver changing display COM01.SYS COM02.SYS COM0\fIx\fP.SYS description device command EGA.SYS EXTDSKDD.SYS installation mouse path pmdd.sys POINTDD.SYS setting up VDISK.SYS Device see NUL NUL assign utility code page description reading input from sending output to setting arguments Devinfo command Dialog box Add Association Add Font Add Printer Driver Add Printer Add Queue Driver Add Queue Autosave Border Width Change Association Change Flags Change Printer Change Queue check box Close All closing command button Communications Port Confirm Confirmations Copy Program Copy Country Create Directory defined Delete Font Delete Group Delete Printer Driver Delete Queue Driver Delete Delete Find How to Run the Program Job Details Job Details Logo Display messages Move moving in New Group New Program New Program Printer Installer Printer Names Printers Properties Queues Rename Group Rename Save As Save Screen Colors scrolling selecting selection cursor System menu text box Type Dir command /p option /w option DOS session file flags wide format Directory list wide format Directory path Directory path Directory path defined directory window Help information joining to drive reassigning substituting for drive Directory Tree window changing displayed information copying a directory defined deleting a directory deleting a directory Move command renaming a directory Directory window active archive flag archived files changing display options collapsing a level default file information file flags file information hidden files printing a file read-only files sorting splitting starting an application system flag title bar Directory see path Directory path adding to path adding to the Window menu application backing up backslash (\e) BACKUP brackets ([ ]) branches changing displayed information changing comparing copying copying;HPFS to FAT creating current deleting deleting destination Directory Tree window displaying File Manager file;default information file;hidden file;setting flags file;specifying location file;test FOUND levels list minus sign (\(en) moving moving;HPFS to FAT name opening a window on organizing OS2 parent plus sign (+) read-only files removing reserved characters restore utility root searching selecting selection cursor starting an application transferring;HPFS to FAT tree, displaying viewing window;opening window;size window;starting an application \eOS2\eDLL Disk cache Disk drive changing designation to a path Directory Tree window directory window door File Manager icon volume label Disk Information utility Disk see drive Disk drive see floppy Floppy disk see hard Hard disk see installation Installation disk backup copies caching checking available space chkdsk utility comparing copying density Disk Information\(emCHKDSK error formatting labeling recovering root directory sectors space storage of files swap file tracks utilities virtual;diskcopy utility virtual;DOS session volume label Diskcache command HPFS Diskcomp utility assign utility join utility subst utility Diskcopy utility assign utility join utility subst utility Display Picture utility Control menu defined Display Picture area File menu using Display, device driver DISPLAY.DLL file device driver Displaying batch program, echo directory listing error message file contents output path text in batch program volume label .DLL extension Do command Dollar sign ($) DOS session active window ANSI escape sequences AUTOEXEC.BAT batch program chkdsk utility command interpreter configuring customizing defined device drivers file-control blocks icon memory mouse printing a file protectonly command setting up start-up starting an application switching terminate-and-stay-resident programs utilities DOS see session DOS session command prompt commands compatibility with HPFS dual boot graphics applications icon prompt starting an application upgrading Dotted box, selection cursor Double ampersand (&&) Double pipe (||) (double quotation mark) Double quotation marks HPFS Double-click Dpath command DPATH environment variable Drag Drive alias changing checking density directory structure joining to directory path logical;EXTDSKDD.SYS device driver reassigning redirecting to or from selecting set temp command substituting for directory path type, formatting disk DSR (data set ready) DTR (data terminal ready) Dual boot AUTOEXEC.BAT AUTOEXEC.DOS boot utility;querying operating system boot utility;using boot utility;Utilities group CONFIG.DOS CONFIG.SYS copy command country command defined device command DOS;directory DOS;starting DOS;upgrading DOS;version HPFS installing mkdir command OS2LDR file set comspec command set path command shell command using Dual-boot HPFS Dynamic priority Dynamic-link library E \e (backslash) EAnnnn.CHK EAnnnn.REC Echo command Editing, System Editor EGA graphics adapter EGA.SYS device driver Ellipsis (...) End, label in batch program Endlocal command Enhanced keyboard Enlarging a window Environment variable adding value to deleting description DOS session DPATH PATH setting TEMP Environment see variable Environment variable inheriting setting up storing data path Equal sign (=) Equal sign Erase function Error Level Error message chkdsk utility CONFIG.SYS help not displaying redirecting sending to file Escape character, in batch program Escape sequences, ANSI Event tracing Exit code Exit command quitting Exit Control Panel command Exit File Manager command Expand All command Expand Branch command Expand One Level command Expanding a directory level EXTDSKDD.SYS device driver Extended attributes .LONGNAME defined HPFS names, preserving searching Extended character set Extended partition creating defined deleting using Extending a selection External disk drive External terminal Extproc command F \.FNT filename extension 4201.DCP file 5202.DCP file FAT file system FAT transferring files Fcbs command Fdisk utility /d option defined File Details command directory window information setting file flags sorting files File details command File Manager active window arranging windows associating files canceling a selection changing;directory information changing;disk drives changing;displayed information changing;font changing;text size check box confirmation messages converting FAT to HPFS converting HPFS to FAT Copy command;HPFS files copying an HPFS file copying HPFS files defined directory path directory windows enlarging a window extended attributes file listing file properties grayed command grayed option HPFS filenames, confirming HPFS filenames, shortening icon, enlarging icon, restoring including files menu bar messages messages Move command;HPFS files moving HPFS files options position on screen Print command quitting Presentation Manager quitting reducing a window restoring a window saving your settings Search Results window specifying file locations starting an application starting System menu transferring files updating window window, enlarging window, reducing window, restoring window, selecting File menu associating files canceling a selection copying a directory creating a directory creating a file deleting a directory deleting a directory moving a directory moving a file New command Open command printing a file renaming a directory turning off file flags turning on file flags File Options command File-control blocks fcbs command File see batch Batch program see extension Filename extension see File Manager File Manager 4201.DCP 5202.DCP appending archive flag archive associating asterisk (*) attribute backup;archive flag backup;batch program backup;diskcopy utility backup;Fixed Disk Utility backup;utility block changing printing priority changing;application information changing;rename command checking, chkdsk utility combining comparing CONFIG.SYS contiguous copying copying;archive flag copying;batch program copying;HPFS to FAT copying;in Desktop Manager COUNTRY.SYS creating data file deleting deleting;directory deleting;directory deleting;read-only flag DISPLAY.DLL displaying;contents displaying;in a window displaying;more utility editing text files exists extending a selection filename flag handle hidden icons KEYBOARD.DCP listing log lost clusters moving moving;HPFS to FAT multilevel system naming notational conventions opening, System Editor organizing printing program question mark (?) read-only flag reading input from recovering renaming reserved characters restoring saving changes searching selecting sending error message to sending output to sorting start-up starting an application swapping system system;FAT system;HPFS system;installable temporary transferring between file systems transferring;HPFS to FAT VIOTBL.DCP wildcard character Filename extension associating files batch program defined icons notational conventions period (.) starting an application \&.CHK \&.CMD \&.COM \&.DDP \&.DLL \&.EXE \.FNT \.MET \.PIF \.SMB FILEnnnn.CHK FILEnnnn.REC Find dialog box Find utility /c option /n option /v option Fixed Disk Utility utility Fixed Disk Utility Create Extended Partition command Create Logical Drive command Create Primary Partition command Exit command format utility hard disk configuration hard disk icon logical drive information Make Startable command partition data Partition Information section quitting starting Fixed-size window Floppy disk comparing copying messages utilities volume label Font files Font changing files printer screen For command Format Diskette utility Format utility /4 option /fs option /n option /t option /v option assign utility Fixed Disk Utility HPFS join utility subst utility Formatting text, System Editor FOUND directory French-Canadian code page G (greater-than sign);tree utility Goto command Graftabl utility Graphical interface Graphics adapter devinfo command display mode extended character set Graphics applications problems Graphics files Graphics, ANSI escape sequences Grayed command Grayed option Greater-than sign ( ) ;);prompt Group menu adding a program group deleting a group File Manager starting Control Panel Groups of applications Groups of options H Handshake Hard disk dual boot icon, Fixed Disk Utility setting up utilities volume label Hardware Help closing the Help window command button command error message index information running an application set help command window Hidden file Hidden flag Hold Job command Hold Queue command Holding a print job How to Run the Program dialog box HPFS chkdsk utility commands, using compatibility;DOS programs compatibility;earlier OS/2 programs copying files to FAT disk caching diskcache command dual-boot earlier OS/2 programs filenames;shortening format utility installation installation;extended partition installation;primary partition lazy writing moving files to FAT multiple file systems naming features naming features;case naming features;characters naming features;commands, using naming features;double quotation marks naming features;preserving in extended attributes preserving;names quitting recover utility Shutdown command transferring files to FAT transferring files utilities, running wildcard characters Hyphen key (\(en) I Icon application, in Program group area cmd command copying a directory data file disk drive DOS enlarging File Manager window enlarging hard disk, Fixed Disk Utility keyboard mouse moving a file moving Print Manager program file reducing File Manager window reducing Restore command restoring File Manager window restoring subdirectory switching between System menu Task List text file Idsr= option If command Inactive command Inactive option Inch, lines per INCLUDE environment variable Include command Index button Infinite time-out Initial capital letters Initialization file Input and output privilege levels Input background program handshake piping reading from file reading from program redirecting sorting Insertion point Installable file system Installation disk chkdsk utility copying ddinstal program display device driver Installation menu deleting fonts deleting printer driver Installation code page CONFIG.SYS device drivers HPFS Interface CONFIG.SYS file graphical protshell command International code page codepage command country code country command keyboard codes keyboard layout subcode Interrupt, intermittent hardware Iopl command Italic type J Job Details command Job Details command Job Details dialog box Job Details dialog box Job identifier Job menu canceling a print job holding a print job moving a print job print job information releasing a print job repeating a print job Join utility /d option assign utility diskcopy utility recover utility K Key see arrow \s-2DIRECTION\s+2 key ENTER+LINEFEED initial letter moving in text box notational conventions pause command shortcut keys Keyb utility Keyboard reference System Editor KEYBOARD.DCP file Keyboard code page codes devinfo command direct-access method enhanced Help information icon input from international Keys Help information layout notational conventions shortcut keys subcode System Editor reference Keynames Keys button L \&.LONGNAME extended attribute Label Diskettes utility Label utility assign utility join utility subst utility Language, code page Large Font command Lazy writing Less-than sign (<) prompt LIB environment variable Libpath command Line, characters per Line, System Editor deleting joining Lines per inch List box defined selecting in Local variable Log, backup utility Logical drive creating deleting information, displaying letter using volume label Logo Display dialog box Logo display time M \.MET filename extension Machine instructions Main Group OS/2 Full-Screen Command Prompt programs Main-group window Command Reference Makeini utility Managing memory Maximize box Maximize command Control Panel defined enlarging an icon Presentation Manager applications shortcut keys sizing a window Maxwait command Memman command Memory buffers command clipboard disk caching DOS session lazy writing managing memman command moving resident in swapping;memman command swapping;swappath command terminate-and-stay-resident programs threads virtual disk drive Menu bar choosing commands defined File Manager full-screen OS/2 application Help menus underlined letters Menu see fdisk Fdisk utility Arrange canceling choosing commands defined File File;associating files File;canceling a selection File;copying a directory File;creating a directory file;creating a file File;moving a directory File;moving a file File;printing a file File;renaming a directory File;turning off file flags File;turning on file flags Group Group;adding a program group Group;deleting a group Group;File Manager Group;Help information Group;starting Control Panel Installation;deleting a printer driver Installation;deleting fonts Job;canceling a print job Job;holding a print job Job;moving a print job Job;print job information Job;releasing a print job Job;repeating a print job Options;changing country settings Options;changing messages Options;setting file flags Options;starting an application Options;warning beep Preferences;adjusting screen contrast Preferences;changing border width Preferences;changing screen colors Program Queue;canceling all print jobs Refresh Setup;adding a printer Setup;changing print queues Setup;changing print-queue connections Setup;changing printer names Setup;changing the default printer Setup;communications port Shutdown System;commands System;defined System;dialog box System;quitting cmd System;restoring a window System;selecting System;sizing a window System;switching to Task List \s-2ESC\s+2 key MenuSystem see box System Menu Message batch program deleting a directory DOS session end the program error help modifying modifying MS OS/2 redirecting retry the operation return the error to the program Metafile graphics files converting picture utilities Minimize box defined reducing a window Minimize command defined reducing a window shortcut keys sizing a window Minimize On Run command Minus key (\(en) Mkdir command Mode utility description DOS session p option parallel printers serial port setcom40 utility Mode see utility Mode utility option protected-mode shell Modem Modifying CONFIG.SYS environment variable messages messages Module, dynamic-link library Monochrome display Monospace type More utility Mouse command Mouse arrow pointer button click device driver;changing operation device driver;options device driver;setting up DOS session double-click drag Help information icon notational conventions options point pointer procedures serial MOUSEA02.SYS device driver Move command copying files into a new directory defined File Manager icon moving a directory moving a file shortcut keys window Move dialog box Moving see between applications Switching cursor, System Editor directories;FAT to HPFS directory drive file files;FAT to HPFS HPFS to FAT icon in check box in dialog box print job text, System Editor window MS OS/2 command interpreter command interpreter;directory naming conventions command interpreter;filename conventions command interpreter;printing a file command interpreter;quitting command interpreter;running in a window command interpreter;starting an application command prompt file flags file system font files graphical interface introduction messages naming conventions printer driver files prompt prompt version number warning beep MSBUS01.SYS device driver MSINP01.SYS device driver MSSER01.SYS device driver Multilingual code page Multitasking modifying priority N Name command Naming see disk Label command directories;FAT directories;HPFS directory files files;FAT files;HPFS New Group dialog box New Program dialog box New Program dialog box Next command Notational conventions O Octs= option Odsr= option Open command directory window starting an application Opening a file application System Editor Option button defined selecting underlined letters Option groups Option +a, attrib utility +r, attrib utility /4, format utility /a;backup utility /a;copy command /a;restore utility /a;xcopy utility /b;copy command /b;restore utility /c;find utility /c;start command /d;backup utility /d;join utility /d;print utility /d;subst utility /e;append utility /e;restore utility /e;xcopy utility /f;chkdsk utility /f;start command /f;tree utility /fs, start command /i, start command /k, start command /L;backup utility /L;restore utility /m;backup utility /m;restore utility /m;xcopy utility /n;find utility /n;format utility /n;restore utility /n;start command /p;dir command /p;restore utility /p;xcopy utility /pm, start command /q, batch program /s;attrib utility /s;backup utility /s;restore utility /s;xcopy utility /t;backup utility /t;format utility /v;chkdsk utility /v;copy command /v;find utility /v;format utility /v;xcopy utility /w, dir command /win, start command dtr=, mode utility idsr=, mode utility mode notational conventions octs=, mode utility odsr=, mode utility p, mode utility parallel printer, mode utility qsize rts=, mode utility serial to=, mode utility xon=, mode utility \(ena, attrib utility \(enr, attrib utility Options menu changing country settings changing messages setting file flags starting an application warning beep Or symbol (||) Organizing directories files screen OS/2 Full-Screen Command Prompt OS/2 Windowed Command Prompt defined OS2.INI file OS2LDR file OS2SYS.INI file Output ANSI escape sequences appearance on screen appending to file background program handshake piping printing redirecting screenful, by the sending to program sorting utility P \.PIF filename extension P option Page, displaying by Parallel port printer Parameter, replaceable Parent directory Parentheses [()] prompt Parentheses, in batch program Parity Partition data, displaying extended;creating extended;defined extended;deleting extended;HPFS extended;using primary;creating primary;deleting primary;hard disk primary;HPFS size start-up;changing start-up;defined Path command PATH environment variable Path see data Data path Add command Add command adding directory data path displaying set path command Pause command Pauseonerror command PCMOU01.SYS device driver Percent sign, double for command shift command Percent sign batch programs for command replaceable parameter Period Picture interchange files converting picture utilities Picture utilities converting graphics files displaying pictures printing pictures starting using Pipe symbol (|) prompt Pipe call command double more utility using Placeholder Plus key (+) Plus sign (+) PMDD.SYS Point POINTDD.SYS device driver Pointer device driver mouse Port asynchronous mouse device driver parallel print utility printer, sending output to sending output to serial;arguments serial;device driver serial;DOS session serial;mode utility serial;mouse device driver serial;printer Portuguese code page Preferences menu adjusting screen contrast changing border width changing screen colors Presentation Manager active window application application check box command buttons command names configuration Control Panel data files default options Desktop Manager device driver dialog boxes File Manager full-screen OS/2 applications graphical interface grayed options Help icons introduction list boxes messages mouse double-click rate notational conventions option buttons Print Manager Printer Installer printing a file screen scrolling window contents selecting session setting up sizing a window starting an application switching between applications Task List text box window Primary partition creating deleting hard disk Print command Print Job Next command Print job Print Manager active window canceling a print job changing;options with Control Panel changing;printing priority changing;settings commands DOS session holding a print job icon introduction job identifier OS2SYS.INI file print job print queue printing order releasing a print job spooler path starting a print job over updating work area Print Picture utility Control menu defined File menu using Print queue Print utility /d option assign utility Print-queue connections Printer drivers Printer Installer dialog box Printer Installer adding a printer changing default printer setting introduction starting Printer Names dialog box Printer adding;default printer adding;font file adding;printer driver adding;printer names adding;printer adding;queues code page default deleting a printer devinfo command drivers font table name network parallel port print utility print-queue connections Printers command Printers dialog box queue driver queues removing a queue driver serial Printers command changing;printer-driver connections deleting a printer Printers dialog box Printing canceling a print job canceling a print job changing the priority changing the spooler path Control Panel controlling print jobs file graphics files holding a print job job information job priority moving a print job output, redirection pictures preventing jobs from printing print job order print utility priority releasing a print job restarting job resuming setting up a printer status Priority command Privilege level, input and output Process active identification number Program group window changing display display Program group changing copying application files defined deleting application files naming Program menu Program see batch Batch program see group Program group see threads Threads command background;detach command background;redirecting messages from background;run command background;starting in changing information copying in Desktop Manager data path detached file foreground foreground;call command output reading input from running from cmd sending output to start-up starting;background starting;DOS session starting;from cmd starting;full-screen starting;PATH variable starting;start command starting;without starting cmd stopping title window Prompt ampersand (&) changing cmd date default drive disappears dollar sign ($) DOS equal sign (=) greater-than sign (;;) less-than sign (<) parentheses [()] pipe symbol (|) setting time version number working directory, default drive \s-2ENTER+LINEFEED\s0 Prompting, restore utility Properties command Properties dialog box Protected-mode shell Protectonly command Protshell command Q Qsize option Question mark (?) Queue driver Queue menu canceling all print jobs preventing jobs from printing Queues command Queues dialog box Quitting application application cmd MS OS/2 command interpreter Presentation Manager System Editor R RAM disk program Read-only file Read-only flag displaying setting Recover utility EAnnnn.REC FILEnnnn.REC HPFS join utility subst utility Redirection see pipe Pipe appending output to file batch program call command combining redirection symbols defined drive, to or from input from file more utility remote terminal tree utility Reducing a window Refresh command Refresh menu Refresh Now command Release Job command Rem command Removing directory file queue driver Rename command Rename dialog box directory Rename Group dialog box Repeat Job command Replaceable parameter Resident in memory Restarting scrolling system Restore box Restore command defined shortcut keys sizing a window window Restore utility /a option /b option /e option /L option /m option /n option /p option /s option archive flag filenames identical Restoring file icon window Resume Task List command Rmdir command Rmsize command ROM Root directory Rows per screen RTS (request to send) Rts= option Run command Running application, from cmd batch program program, from cmd S \s-2ALT\s0 key choosing a command moving a directory moving a file between directories selecting;System menu selecting;Task List shortcut keys switching between applications switching from DOS session \s-2CTRL\s+2 key copying files DOS programs end-of-file marker scrolling selecting;last directory listed selecting;root directory selecting;scattered files selecting;System menu shortcut keys stopping a program switching to Task List viewing a directory \s-2DIRECTION\s+2 key choosing a command extending a selection Help index moving;cursor moving;icons moving;in a list box moving;in a text box moving;windows scrolling selecting selecting;command button selecting;list box selecting;option button sizing a window starting an application switching applications \s-2END\s+2 key list box scrolling selecting System Editor text box \s-2ENTER+LINEFEED\s0 prompt \s-2ESC\s+2 key canceling selecting, System menu shortcut keys switching applications switching to Task List \s-2F10\s+2 key \s-2F11\s+2 key \s-2F1\s+2 key \s-2F4\s+2 key \s-2F5\s+2 key \s-2F7\s+2 key \s-2F8\s+2 key \s-2F9\s+2 key \s-2HOME\s+2 key scrolling selecting;directory window selecting;list box selecting;root directory selecting;text box System Editor \s-2LEFT\s+2 key choosing commands cursor-blink rate system date system time \s-2PAGE DOWN\s+2 key list box scrolling selecting System Editor \s-2PAGE UP\s+2 key list box scrolling selecting System Editor \s-2RIGHT\s+2 key cursor-blink rate scrolling selecting system date system time \s-2SHIFT\s+2 key dialog box extended selection options System menu \s-2SPACEBAR\s+2 canceling selection selecting;options selecting;scattered files selecting;System menu \s-2TAB\s+2 key check box cursor-blink rate selecting;check box selecting;options selecting;Task List switching applications system date System Editor system time \s-2UP\s+2 key choosing commands Scroll command selecting;a directory selecting;directory window system date system time \.SMB filename extension Save As command Save As dialog box Save command Save dialog box Saving a file Screen Colors command Screen Colors dialog box Screen appearance application arranging changing how applications run clearing code page colors contrast device driver devinfo command enlarging a window full-screen OS/2 graphics icon area logo display time messages organizing output to Presentation Manager rows per scrolling window contents sessions System menu viewing by window border width Screenful, displaying by Scroll arrow Scroll bar Scroll box Scroll command Scrolling continuously one line one screen resuming stopping System Editor window contents \s-2CTRL\s+2 key \s-2END\s+2 key \s-2PAGE DOWN\s+2 key \s-2PAGE UP\s+2 key Search-and-replace Searching directory extended attributes file properties results wildcard characters Sector chkdsk utility format utility recover utility Select All command Selecting all files applications canceling check box command button defined dialog box directory window drive extending groups of items Help information keyboard list box mouse moving more than one file options Presentation Manager scattered items System menu text box undoing the last selection window work area \s-2DIRECTION\s+2 keys \s-2SPACEBAR\s+2 Selection cursor canceling a selection command button current directory defined dialog box directory dotted box shape Serial mouse Session ANSI escape sequences basic kinds defined DOS end automatically environment start-up files switching between Set bookshelf command Set command Set comspec command Set dpath command Set path command Set prompt command Set temp command Setcom40 utility Setlocal command Setting up see hard disk Hard disk DOS session environment external disk drive mouse device driver Presentation Manager session printer Setting arguments for device date display mode file flags prompt time variable Setup menu adding a printer changing;default printer changing;print queues changing;print-queue connections changing;printer names changing;Printer Timeouts settings communications port Shell command Shell Presentation Manager protshell command Shift command Shortcut keys Shutdown menu Shutdown Now command SideKick Size command defined File Manager shortcut keys sizing a window Size see disk Disk DOS session Sizing a window Small capital letters Small Font command SMARTDrive Sort by command Sort utility Sorting by column files input output Special character Square bracket ([ ]) Standard error Standard input Standard output Start command /c option /f option /i option /k option /n option /pm option /win option applications batch program environment, inheriting program title starting program without starting cmd window, starting program in Start Job Again command Start-up disk Start-up file description start command Start-up program Starting application;from cmd application;full-screen application;Presentation Manager application;window batch program cmd DOS application print job program;background program;DOS session program;foreground program;full-screen program;PATH variable program;start command scrolling again System Editor STARTUP.CMD file Status see partition Fdisk utility, Fixed Disk Utility disk report Stop bit Stopping batch program program scrolling String comparing finding Subcode, keyboard Subst utility /d option assign utility diskcopy utility recover utility Substituted disk drive subst utility Swappath command Swapping Switch To command Switch Window command File Manager Switching applications code pages directories drives from DOS session icons sessions Syntax, notational conventions System date System Editor Autosave command blank line, inserting colors copying text creating file cursor deleting text directory path displaying directory Edit menu Exit File menu file Find command font, changing inserting text joining line keyboard reference menu bar moving text opening file printing quitting replacing text saving file scrolling searching for text starting undo \s-2CTRL+END\s+2 \s-2CTRL+HOME\s+2 \s-2DIRECTION\s+2 keys System flag System menu box;closing a directory window box;defined box;MS OS/2 application box;using commands defined dialog box quitting cmd restoring a window selecting sizing a window switching to Task List System file messages restarting start-up, start command time tracing T TAB key Command Reference Task List command defined shortcut keys Task List applications currently running defined icon Main Group quitting an application reducing a window restoring a window scroll bars session listing sizing a window switching between applications System-menu command window Task menu TEMP environment variable Temporary files Terminal external remote Terminate-and-stay-resident programs Text box defined deleting moving in selecting in Text selection Thread priority Threads command Tile command Time command Time slice Time-dependent program Time-out loop Time-out processing Time country settings file modified of file or directory prompt restore utility setting Timeslice command Title bar active window arranging windows defined directory window moving a window TMP environment variable To= option Trace command Tracebuf command Tracks Translation table Tree menu changing displayed information expanding a directory level Tree utility Turning off your computer Two-headed arrow Type command Type dialog box Types of messages U Undo command Undo Selection command United States code page Up scroll arrow Utilities group Utility Programs group Utility ansi append assign attrib backup batch program boot chkdsk comp Compare Diskette Convert Picture Copy Diskette defined Desktop Manager Disk Information diskcomp diskcopy Display Picture DOS session fdisk find Fixed Disk Utility Fixed Disk Format Diskette format graftabl help HPFS, running with join keyb Label Diskettes label makeini mode more notational conventions output piping input and output Print Picture print recover restore setcom40 sort starting subst tree Utilities group xcopy V Variable environment;DOS session environment;DPATH environment;setting environment;TEMP for command local setting using VDISK.SYS device driver Ver command Version number Version-number prompt Vertical scroll bar VGA graphics adapter Video-font table Viewing environment variable file contents path volume label VIOTBL.DCP file Virtual disk drive chkdsk utility diskcopy utility DOS session restarting system VDISK.SYS device driver VISION01.SYS device driver Vol command Volume label defined displaying setting W Warning Beep command Wildcard characters dir command find utility in HPFS searching type command using Window menu Window active Arrange menu arranging border Cascade command character size closing cmd Control Panel Directory Tree;copying a directory Directory Tree;deleting a directory Directory Tree;deleting a directory Directory Tree;described Directory Tree;displaying information Directory Tree;Move command Directory Tree;moving a directory Directory Tree;starting an application directory;changing displayed information directory;closing directory;collapsing a level directory;opening directory;printing a file directory;setting file flags directory;size directory;sorting contents directory;starting an application disappears end automatically enlarging extending selection File Manager fixed size full-screen applications full-screen applications Help icon area Keys Help Main-group;Command Reference maximize box Maximize command maximum size menu bar menu minimize box Minimize command moving a directory moving a file moving in dialog box moving Presentation Manager Print Manager program cannot run in Properties command reducing restore box Restore command restoring running an application in a window scroll bar scrolling text scrolling Search Results selecting selecting;active window selecting;dialog box selecting;directory selecting;items selecting;System menu selection cursor shape shortcut keys size sizing switching between System Editor System-menu box Tile command title bar work area Work area defined Directory Tree window selecting X Xcopy utility /a option /e option /m option /p option /s option /v option archive flag